Canon GP160 - F160 - DF160 Service Manual

GP160F/160DF/160
SERVICE
MANUAL
REVISION 0
FEB. 1999 FY8-13G2-000

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com

IMPORTANT
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC., JAPAN, TO SERVE AS A SOURCE OF
REFERENCE FOR WORK IN THE FIELD.
SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY

FROM ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTED
MATTER.
ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED

TO THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY.
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS INTENDED FOR ALL SALES AREAS, AND MAY CONTAIN INFORMA-
TION NOT APPLICABLE TO CERTAIN AREAS.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Imprimé au Japon
Use of this manual should

be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of confiden-
tial information.
Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 3

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION
CANON INC.
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan

INTRODUCTION
This service manual provides basic information required for performing field service
to maintain the product quality and functions of the this machine. The structure of the
manual is as described below.
Material Name Content

Main unit service manual The main unit and cassette feeder’s; functions, mechanism,
disassembly, assembly, adjustment methods, etc.
G3 FAX manual The main unit’s G3 facsimile functions.
ADF The functions, mechanism, disassembly, assembly, adjust-
ment method, etc. of the main unit’s ADF.
Each chapter consists of the following sections.
Chapter 1, “Introduction,” : Features, specifications, operation methods, copying

process.
Chapter 2, “Basic operation,” : Explanation of the machine’s basic operations
Chapter 3, “Exposure system,” : Explanation of the exposure system’s mechanical /

electrical system operating principles, timing, disassembly, assembly and adjustment
methods.
Chapter 4, “Image processing system,” : Explanation of the CCD, analogue / digital

image processing, disassembly, assembly and adjustment methods.
Chapter 5, “Laser exposure system,” : Explanation of the laser exposure system’s

mechanical / electrical system operating principles, timing, disassembly, assembly and
adjustment methods.
Chapter 6, “Image formation system,” : Explanation of the image formation system’s

adjustment methods.
Chapter 7, “Pick-up / Feed system,” : Explanation of the pick-up / feed system’s

adjustment methods.
Chapter 8, “Fixing system,” : Explanation of the fixing system’s mechanical / electri-

cal system operating principles, timing, disassembly, assembly and adjustment meth-
ods.
Chapter 9, “Outer cover / auxiliary control system,” : Explanation of the outer cover /
auxiliary control system’s mechanical / electrical system operating principles, timing,
disassembly, assembly and adjustment methods.
Chapter 10, “Cassette feeder,” : Explanation of the cassette feeder’s mechanical /

electrical system operating principles, timing, disassembly, assembly and adjustment
methods.
Chapter 11, “Installation,” : Conditions relating to the place of installation, and the
installation procedures.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) i
Chapter 12, “Maintenance and Inspection,” : Table of periodic replacement parts and
consumables replacement targets, periodic service list and parts to be cleaned during a
customer service call.
Chapter 13, “Troubleshooting,” : Standards / adjustments, operation failure counter-

measures and delivery failure countermeasures
Appendix : General timing chart, general circuit diagram, etc..
The explanations in this manual are based on the following principles.
1. Each chapter gives an overview of each function’s purpose, role and the connection
between the electrical and mechanical systems as well as the operation timing of
each part.
In the outline diagram, the signal shows the mechanical drive transmission.
When the signal is shown with a signal name, it indicates the electric signal
flow.
In the explanation of this units digital circuit, “1” is indicated when the signal’s volt-
age level is high, and “0” is indicated when it is low. However, the voltage value will
differ depending on the electrical circuit. Furthermore, the * in the signal value
[DRMD*] shows the DRMD signal is “0” and ON.
In each chapter, [Power supply ON] indicates the power supply SW has been turned
“ON”, the front door, etc., has been shut, and power is being supplied to the copier.
2. This unit utilizes micro processors, however, due to the impossibility of checking the
micro processor’s internal operation, an explanation of the micro processor’s opera-
tion has been omitted. Furthermore, assuming that internal repair of the print circuit
board will not take place on the customer’s premises, the explanation of the circuit in
the print circuit board’s circuit is limited to an outline explanation using a block dia-
gram. Consequently, the electrical circuit explanations consist of 2 types, from the
sensors to the main circuit board’s input section, and from the main circuit board’s
output section to the load, and block diagrams by function.
Changes of the contents made for the sake of product improvements will be notified
in Service Information (Technical Information).
Gaining a sound and thorough understanding of the copier through careful reading
of this service manual and the subsequently issued Service Information (Technical
Information) bulletins is the only way to develop the technical skill necessary to prolong
product quality and functionality and the practical ability to be able to determine the
cause of breakdowns.
ii COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Main unit configuration
GP160F GP160DF GP160
System
configuration

Digital black and white copier (with ADF) Digital black and white copier
(Copy board cover model)
Digital black and white copier and facsimile
Installation options
Standard equipment Standard equipment Option

ADF-H1
Option Option Option

Cassette Unit D1

Cassette unit E1
Modular Standard equipment Option Option

Modem board NCU board board
Super G3 FAX board
CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8MB expanded memory

iii
iv COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
I. FEATURES ..............................................1-1 D. User mode .......................................1-14
II. SPECIFICATIONS ...................................1-2 V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE TO BE
III. NAMES OF PARTS .................................1-6 CARRIED OUT BY THE USER .............1-32
A. External view......................................1-6 VI. SAFETY .................................................1-33
B. Cross sectional diagram ....................1-8 A. Laser beam safety.......................1-33
IV. OPERATION EXPLANATION................1-10 B. Toner safety .....................................1-36
A. Control panel....................................1-10 VII. COPYING PROCESS ............................1-37
B. Basic operation ................................1-13 A. Outline..............................................1-37
C. Advanced features ...........................1-13
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

I. BASIC OPERATION ................................2-1 III. BASIC SEQUENCES...............................2-4
A. Function configuration........................2-1 IV. MAIN MOTOR..........................................2-5
B. Copy operation overview ...................2-2 V. PRINCIPAL CIRCUIT PCB
II. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT OVERVIEW .......2-3 INPUT/OUTPUT.......................................2-6
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I. OPERATION OVERVIEW........................3-1 B. Charging the magnification ratio ........3-4
A. Overview ............................................3-1 C. Scanning lamp control .......................3-4
B. Exposure system sequence ...............3-2 III. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..................3-5
II. SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM....................3-3 A. Scanning lamp ...................................3-6
A. Document scanner motor...................3-3 B. Document scanning motor .................3-8
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

I. OVERVIEW..............................................4-1 C. Magnification ratio process ................4-7
II. ANALOG IMAGE PROCESSING.............4-2 D. Edge emphasis / smoothing
A. Overview ............................................4-2 process ..............................................4-7
B. CCD/CCD drive circuit .......................4-2 E. Logarithmic correction........................4-8
C. A-D conversion circuit / F. Half tone density processing ..............4-9
ABC circuit .........................................4-3 G. Binarisation ........................................4-9
III. DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING..............4-4 IV. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ................4-10
A. Overview ............................................4-4 A. CCD unit ..........................................4-11
B. Shading correction .............................4-5
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) v
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
I. OVERVIEW..............................................5-1 B. Laser light intensity control ................5-4
II. BD SIGNAL GENERATION .....................5-3 IV. LASER SCANNER MOTOR
A. Overview ............................................5-3 CONTROL................................................5-6
B. BD generation / detection ..................5-3 A. Operation outline................................5-6
III. LASER DRIVER CIRCUIT .......................5-4 V. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..................5-7
A. Operation ...........................................5-4 A. Laser scanner unit .............................5-8
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

I. OVERVIEW..............................................6-1 IV. SEPARATION STATIC CHARGE
A. Construction .......................................6-1 ELIMINATOR BIAS CONTROL ...............6-6
II. PRIMARY CHARGING ROLLER BIAS A. Operation ...........................................6-6
CONTROL................................................6-3 V. DEVELOPING BIAS CONTROL ..............6-7
A. Outline ...............................................6-3 A. Outline ...............................................6-7
B. Control operation ...............................6-3 B. Operation ...........................................6-7
III. TRANSFER CHARGING ROLLER BIAS VI. RE-CHARGE BIAS CONTROL................6-8
CONTROL................................................6-4 A. Operation ...........................................6-8
A. Overview ............................................6-4 VII. CARTRIDGE DETECTION ......................6-9
B. Bias control ........................................6-5 A. Operation ...........................................6-9
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM

I. OVERVIEW..............................................7-1 V. PAPER FEEDING OPERATION............7-12
A. Construction Overveiw .......................7-1 A. Paper leading edge detection ..........7-12
II. PICK-UP FEEDING OPERATION ...........7-2 B. Paper width detection ......................7-12
A. Overveiw ............................................7-2 VI. JAM DETECTION ..................................7-13
III. CASSETTE PICK-UP MECHANISM........7-3 A. Overview ..........................................7-13
A. Pick-up oparation ...............................7-3 B. Types of Jam ...................................7-14
B. Retry pick-up ......................................7-5 C. Jam sequence..................................7-14
C. Paper size detection ..........................7-6 VII. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ................7-23
IV. MULTI-FEEDER PICK-UP .......................7-7 A. Cassette feeding assembly ..............7-24
A. Overview ............................................7-7 B. Multi-feeder assembly ......................7-30
B. Multi-feeder pick-up mechanism ........7-8 C. Registration roller assembly.............7-33
C. Multi-feeder retry pick-up ...................7-9 D. Feeder assembly .............................7-35
D. Multi-feeder paper size setting .........7-10
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

I. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW ...................8-1 B. Fixing heater safety mechanism ........8-5
A. Overview ............................................8-1 C. Fixing assembly malfunction
B. Fixing pressure roller cleaning ...........8-1 detector ..............................................8-5
II. FIXING CONTROL...................................8-3 III. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..................8-6
A. Fixing temperature control .................8-3 A. Removing the fixing assembly ...........8-7
vi COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL / AUXILIARY MECHANISM
I. CONTROL PANEL...................................9-1 A. Back-up function ................................9-8
A. Overview ............................................9-1 B. Back-up Data ...................................9-12
II. POWER SUPPLY ....................................9-2 V. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ................9-16
A. Low-voltage power supply circuit .......9-2 A. Control panel....................................9-17
B. High voltage power supply circuit ......9-4 B. Main Motor .......................................9-19
C. Energy save function control..............9-5 C. DC controller PCB............................9-25
III. FAN ..........................................................9-7 D. Image processor PCB ......................9-26
A. Rotation control mechanism ..............9-7 E. DC power supply PCB .....................9-27
IV. BACK-UP BATTERY................................9-8
CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER

I. OVERVIEW............................................10-1 A. Operation .........................................10-7
II. OVERVIEW OF THE ELECTRICAL VI. JAM DETECTION ..................................10-8
CIRCUITS ..............................................10-3 A. Overview ..........................................10-8
A. Overview ..........................................10-3 B. Jam Sensing ....................................10-9
III. FEEDER CONTROLLER PCB VII. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..............10-11
INPUT AND OUTPUT .............................10-4 A. Removing the feeder motor ...........10-12
IV. OPERATION OVERVIEW......................10-5 B. Removing the pick-up/feeder/
A. Overview ..........................................10-5 separation motor ............................10-12
B. Basic Sequence ..............................10-6 C. Removing the pick-up unit .............10-14
V. FEEDER MOTOR CONTROL................10-7
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION
I. CHOOSING AN SUITABLE INSTALLATION C. Loading paper into the cassette .......11-8
LOCATION.............................................11-1 D. Loading paper into the
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION.......11-3 multi-feeder ....................................11-11
A. Opening the package and removing E. Attaching the tray/Power cord ........11-12
the packing materials .......................11-4 F. Checking the Copy image ..............11-13
B. Installing the cartridge ......................11-5 G. Setting the Fax machine function ....11-13
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

I. PERIODIC REPLACEMENT PARTS.....12-1 A. Storage when the packing seal is
II. ESTIMATED LIFESPAN OF CONSUMABLE intact ................................................12-3
PARTS ...................................................12-1 B. Storage and handling when the
III. BASIC SERVICING PROCEDURES .....12-2 packing seal has been opened ........12-4
IV. CARTRIDGE STORAGE AND
HANDLING.............................................12-3
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) vii
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
I. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS.....13-2 B. Motor, fan .......................................13-42
A. Machanical system ..........................13-2 C. Sensors ..........................................13-44
B. Electrical System .............................13-9 D. Switches, lamps, miscellaneous ....13-46
II. IMAGE AND MACHINE MALFUNCTION E. PCBs ..............................................13-48
COUNTERMEASURES .......................13-15 F. Variable resistor(VR)/LED/check
A. Initial check ....................................13-15 pin listed by PCB plate ...................13-50
B. Treatment procedures by faulty V. SERVICE MODE..................................13-55
image type .....................................13-17 A. Overview ........................................13-55
C. Operation malfunction B. Operating Procedures ....................13-56
countermeasures ...........................13-26 C. Service mode menu list..................13-57
III. FAULTY FEEDING D. SSSW Default Setting ....................13-63
COUNTERMEASURES .......................13-34 E. Parameter settings .........................13-78
A. Overview ........................................13-34 F. Test Mode (TEST MODE)............13-111
B. Copy paper jam..............................13-35 VI. REPORTS..........................................13-142
C. Faulty feeding ................................13-38 A. User reports .................................13-142
IV. ELECTRICAL PARTS POSITIONS/ B. Service report...............................13-145
FUNCTIONS ........................................13-39 VII. USER ERRORS.................................13-163
A. Clutches, solenoids ........................13-40 VIII. SERVICE ERRORS ...........................13-170
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART.....................A-1 D. LIST OF SPECIAL TOOLS....................A-11
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS...........A-3 E. SOLVENTS AND OILS..........................A-12
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ..............A-5
viii COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides an overview of the unit’s specifications, operating method and
copying process.
I. FEATURES ..............................................1-1 D. User mode .......................................1-14

II. SPECIFICATIONS ...................................1-2 V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE TO BE
III. NAMES OF PARTS .................................1-6 CARRIED OUT BY THE USER .............1-32
A. External view......................................1-6 VI. SAFETY .................................................1-33
B. Cross sectional diagram ....................1-8 A. Laser beam safety.......................1-33
IV. OPERATION EXPLANATION................1-10 B. Toner safety .....................................1-36
A. Control panel....................................1-10 VII. COPYING PROCESS ............................1-37
B. Basic operation ................................1-13 A. Outline..............................................1-37
C. Advanced features ...........................1-13

I. FEATURES
< Copy function >
• 1200 equivalent × 600dpi high resolution copy
• Due to a new engine, high image quality printing with minute particle super fine
toner (diameter 5 microns) has been made possible.
• Due to the integrated drum, toner cassette, the print inner assembly is refreshed
when the cartridge is replace.
• 256 gradation readings, and realistic half tone rendering.
• Max. 5 way / max. 1100 sheets large volume multi-level pick-up.
• Dual operation - allows copying during fax transmission.
< Fax function >

• High speed Super G3 Fax 2 second transmission (33.6kbps) provided as standard
for ordinary telephone lines.
• Able to send and receive A3 size direct copy.
• 400dpi scanning resolution ultra high image quality (ultra fine mode).
• 600dpi recording resolution ultra high image quality, standard mode 600dpi print-
ing.
• Standard 1megabyte memory (roughly 64 sheets), possibility to expand to maxi-
mum 9 megabytes (roughly 576 sheets).
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-1
II. SPECIFICATIONS
1. Type
Item Specifications
Main unit Desk top
Copyboard Fixed
Light source Xenon lamp
Lens Fixed focal lens
Photosensitive medium OPC (φ 30)
2. Method
Item Specifications
Copying Indirect electrostatic copying method
Charging AC roller charging method
Exposure Semiconductor laser
Copy density adjustment Automatic or manual
Developing Dry single component jumping method (single unit drum cartridge)
Pick-up Automatic Cassette
Manual Multi-feeder
Transfer Roller charging method
Separation Electrostatic separation (static charge elimination) + curvature
separation
Cleaning Rubber blade
Fixing SURF Fixing
1-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3. Functions
Item Specifications
Types of document Sheet, book, three dimensional objects (up to max. 2kg)
Max. document size A3 / 11 × 17
Wait time 15 seconds or less from power ON (20°C)
7 seconds or less from the energy saver mode being cancelled
First copy time 12 seconds or less (main unit cassette pick-up, 1-to-1 copy, A4,
no AE)
Continuous copying 1 to 99 sheets
Pick-up capacity Each cassette 250 sheets *1, multi-feeder 100 sheets (80g/m2)
Delivery tray capacity 100 sheets *2
Copy size Cassette Max. : A3 / 11 × 17
pick-up Min. : A5
Multi-feeder Max. : A3
pick-up Min. : A5
Types of Cassette Plain paper 64 to 90g/m2, recycled paper 64 to 90g/m2, tracing
copy paper pick-up paper (GNT-80) *1
Multi-feeder Plain paper 64 to 128g/m2, tracing paper (SM-1) labels, recycled
pick-up paper 64 to 128g/m2, OHP *2, tracing paper (GNT-80)*3
Cassette specifications With tab, universal
Non image Leading 4.0 ± 2.0mm
width edge
Trailing 2.5 ± 2.0mm
edge
Front 2.5 ± 2.0mm
Rear 2.5 ± 2.0mm
Auto clear Yes (Standard 2 min., possible to change in units of 1 min.
between 0 to 9 min)
Energy saver Yes (Standard 3 min., possible to change in units of 1 min.
between 3 to 30 min)
Option *4 Cassette feeder (1 step type / 3 step type), 8MB expanded
memory, ADF, FAX board
*1: 50 or less sheets of tracing paper (GNT-80) by cassette.

*2: 50 or less sheets of OHP sheets by cassette (designated paper).
*3: 1 or less sheets of tracing paper (GNT-80) by multi-feeder.
*4: Differs depending on the main unit configuration.
4. Other
Item Specifications
Operating Temperature range 5 to 35°C
environment Humidity range 10 to 90% RH
Atmospheric pressure 709 to 1013hpa
range
Power Main unit
supply GP160 GP160DF
• 230V(ITA): PNSxxxxx • 230V(ITA): PHLxxxxx
• 230V(UK): QCTxxxxx • 230V(UK): QCLxxxxx
• 230V(FRN): SBTxxxxx • 230V(FRN): SBRxxxxx
• 230V(GER): TBTxxxxx • 230V(GER): TBQxxxxx
• 230V(AMS): UEHxxxxx • 230V(AMS): UEFxxxxx
• 230V(CA): RCXxxxxx
• 230V(Others):PHXxxxxx
GP160F
• 230V(ITA): PHTxxxxx
• 230V(UK): QCMxxxxx
• 230V(FRN): SBSxxxxx
• 230V(GER): TBRxxxxx
• 230V(AMS): UEGxxxxx
• 230V(CA): RCWxxxxx
• 230V(Others):PHMxxxxx
Cassette Feeding Module-D1 Supplied by main unit : ZCRxxxxx
Cassette Feeding Module-E1 Supplied by main unit : ZHRxxxxx
Power Maximum Approx. 800W
consumption Standby Approx. 20W
Energy saving mode Approx. 14W
Operating When in operation 66dB or less
noise Standby 40dB or less
Dimensions Width 616 (mm) / 24.25”
Depth 640 (mm) / 25.20”
Height 427 (mm) / 16.81” (Including ADF)
Mass 48.8kg 107.59 Ò
Storage of Copy paper Store with the package closed and avoid
consumable humidity
items Cartridge Refer to page 12-3

5. Copy speed
Reproduction mode Size Copy paper size No. of copies / minute

Direct copy A4 (210 × 297mm) A4 16
A3 (297 × 420mm) A3 9
B4 (257 × 364mm) B4 10
A4R (297 × 210mm) A4R 9
B5 (182 × 257mm) B5 16
B5R (257 × 182mm) B5R 12
A4 (148.5 × 210mm) A5 12
LTR (216 × 279mm) LTR 16
LTRR (279 × 216mm) LTRR 9
LGL (216 × 356mm) LGL 9
11 × 17 (279 × 432mm) 11 × 17 9
Specifications are subject to change for the sake of product improvements.
III. NAMES OF PARTS
A. External view
Main unit
ADF standard equipment model

[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[7] [10]
[8]
[9] [6]
Figure 1-301 Figure 1-302
Copyboard cover model

[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[7] [10]
[8]
[9] [6]
Cassette feeder (accessory)
[4]
[3]
[1] [2]
Figure 1-305

Main unit
[1] Control panel [6] Right lower cover

[2] ADF [7] Front cover
[3] Document delivery tray [8] Printer unit release handle
[4] Delivery tray [9] Printer unit
[5] Cassette [10] Multi feeder tray
Cassette feeder (accessory)
[1] Cassette feeder

[2] Cassette
[3] Right door
[4] Feeder lifting handle
B. Cross sectional diagram

[1] [3] [5] [7] [9] [11] [13] [15] [17] [19] [21]
[2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [16] [18] [20] [22]
[37] [35] [33] [31] [29] [27] [25] [23]

[38] [36] [34] [32] [30] [28] [26] [24]
Figure 1-306

[1] Mirror 3 [23] Vertical path roller (Main unit pick-up

[2] Mirror 2 assembly)
[3] White reference assembly [24] Vertical path roller (Cassette feeder)
[4] Mirror 1 [25] Separation roller (Main unit pick-up
[5] Document scanning lamp assembly)
[6] Copyboard glass [26] Separation roller (Cassette feeder)
[7] Fixing delivery roller [27] Feed roller (Cassette feeder)
[8] Cleaning roller [28] Feed roller (Main unit pick-up
[9] Fixing film assembly)
[10] CCD [29] Pick-up roller (Cassette feeder)
[11] Lens [30] Pick-up roller (Main unit pick-up
[12] Charge eliminator assembly)
[13] Laser scanner unit [31] Transfer charging roller
[14] Photosensitive drum [32] Separation static charge elimination
[15] Primary charging roller [33] Paper sensor lever (Cassette feeder)
[16] Mirror 4 [34] Paper sensor lever (Main unit pick-
[17] Developing cylinder up assembly)
[18] Cartridge [35] Feed assembly
[19] Registration pressure roller [36] Fixed pressure roller
[20] Registration roller [37] Paper cassette (Main unit)
[21] Multi-feeder pick-up roller [38] Paper cassette (Cassette feeder)
[22] Multi-feeder tray
IV. OPERATION EXPLANATION
A. Control panel
[12] [15]
[4] [5] [6] [10][11] [13] [14] [16] [17]
In Use/Memory Error Coded Direct

Fax Monitor Program Dial Hook R Redial Stamp TX
Energy Saver
Reset ABC DEF Clear
[1] Data Registration GHI JKL MNO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
[24]
Stop 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
[2] Copy Special Features

PRS TUV WXY Start
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
[3] Return Set

Tone OPER SYMBOLS
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
57 ~ 84 29 ~ 56
[18]
[7] [8] [9] [19] [20] [21] [23] [25]
[22]
Figure 1-401

No. Key name Function outline

[1] Display contrast VR Adjusts the control panel contrast.
[2] Collate key Performs sort copying when copying with the ADF.
[3] Copy special features Performs frame erasing, margin, transferring and 2 in 1
copying.
[4] COPY Changes over to the copy mode.
[5] FAX* Changes over to the fax mode.
[6] PRINT/SCAN* Changes over to the printer mode.
[7] Display selection Selects functions shown in the display.
[8] Return Returns to the previous display.
[9] Set Confirms the registration/setting.
[10] Fax Monitor* Confirms the transmission conditions, clears transmission
reservations.
[11] Program* Registers a single operation that can be selected by simply
pushing this key.
[12] Coded Dial* Uses speed dial.
[13] Hook* Ability to listen to the other party’s response through the
speaker.
[14] R* Press to dial an outside telephone number, or an extension
number, when the fax is connected through a swichboard
(PBX).
[15] Redial* Redials the last number dialed.
[16] Stamp* Stamps a completed transmission.
[17] Direct TX* Executes direct transmission.
[18] Reset Resets the copy mode.
[19] Data registration Calls up the user mode setting display.
[20] Numeric key Dials the telephone number, sets the number of copies, etc..
[21] Clear Clears the registration/setting.
[22] Start Starts transmission / copying.
[23] Stop Stops transmission / copying.
[24] Energy saver Clears the energy saver mode.
[25] One touch panel* One touch dial key.
*: Not available on copiers not equipped with the fax function

**: Not available on copiers not equipped with the printer function
Slide seitch (Normally off for user speration) Spealer volume switch
Confidential Relay
Delayed Transmission Polling Mailbox Broadcast Pause Delate
Memory
Memory Box Reception Transfer Space
Memory
Reference Report Clear Set
Receive
TTI Selector Subaddress Password Mode Tone/+ D.T.
Figure 1-402
Key name Function outline

Delayed Transmission* Designates the sending time of the transmission.
Polling* Designates polling transmission.
Confidential Mailbox* Designates confidential transmission.
Relay Broadcast* Designates relay origination transmission.
Delete* Deletes the input characters.
Pause Inserts a pause in the telephone number.
Memory Box* Prints documents when they have been stored in the Memory box,
or when a document has been reception by the memory box.
Memory Reception* Receives in memory and designates the printing of reception
documents.
Transfer* Designates the transfer of reception documents to other faxes.
Memory Reference* Designates the confirmation or deletion of memory contents.
Report* Designates the output of each kind of report and list.
Clear Designates the deletion of registration/setting.
Set Designates the confirmation of registered/set contents.
TTI Selector* Used when changing the senders name.
Subaddress* Used when performing a subaddress transmission.
Password* Used when transmitting with a fax standard password.
Receive mode* Designates switching to receive mode.
Tone/+ Connects to information services that accept tone dialing only,
even if you are using a rotary pulse line or enters a plus sign
in a fax number. And enters a plus sign when registering your
fax number.
DT Press to confirm the dial tone when registering a telephone
number.
Space* Creates a space between rows of numbers or characters.
Shift key Use to selecting items on the control panel.
*: Not available on copiers not equipped with the fax function

B. Basic operation
The basic operations of the copy keys on the operation panel are listed below.
Key name Details
Reproduction ratio key Selects fixed ratio change (2R2E) or zoom (50 to 200%).
Paper selection key Selects the pick-up cassette.
Scanning mode key Selects the scanning density (automatic, F1 to F9) and the
image quality (character, character/photo, photo).
Table 1-401
C. Advanced features
The basic operations of the advanced copy feature keys on the operation panel are
listed below.
Key name Details
Page separation Performs left/right page separation copy in the book mode.
Sets the left and right margins and designates the 2-page
spread copy size.
Binding margin Creates a binding margin on the paper. Sets the margin
position (left margin, right margin, top margin, bottom mar-
gin) and also the margin width (1 to 10mm).
Frame erasing Sets the frame erasing position.
Document frame Copies with document frame erasing.
erasing
Sheet frame Creates a margin around the outside of the document and
erasing copies.
Book frame When copying books, etc., the surrounding and center
erasing margins are deleted.
Punch hole Erases punch holes from the left margin of copied docu-
erasing ments.
2 in 1 copy Inputs the document size and paper size and designates 2
in 1 copying.
Table 1-402
D. User mode
When the registration/setting key is pressed on the control panel, the user mode set-
ting screen is displayed.
The construction of the user mode is shown below.
1. User mode for copies equipped with the fax function
REGISTRATION/SETTING
01 DATA REGISTRATION 01 USER SETTINGS
01 DATE/TIME SETTING
02 UNIT TEL NUMBER
03 UNIT NAME
04 SENDER NAME REG. (9)
05 TX TERMINAL ID 01 ON 01 TTI POSITION 01 OUTSIDE IMAGE

02 OFF 02 INSIDE IMAGE
02 TEL NUMBER MARK 01FAX
06 DENSITY CONTROL 01 LIGHT 3 02 TEL
02 STANDARD 5
03 DARK 7
07 PROGRAM KEY REG 01 PRINT REPORT
02 REPORT
03 TONE
04 SENDER'S NAME
05 SUBADDRESS
06 RX MODE
08 OFFHOOK ALARM 01 ON
02 OFF
09 VOLUME CONTROL 01 KEYPAD VOLUME 01 ON (1 ~ 3) 1
02 OFF
02 ALARM VOLUME 01 ON (1 ~ 3) 1
02 OFF
03 TX DONE TONE 01 ON (1 ~ 3) 1
02 ERROR ONLY (1 ~ 3) 1
03 OFF
04 RX DONE TONE 01 ON (1 ~ 3) 1
02 ERROR ONLY (1 ~ 3) 1
03 OFF
05 PRINTING DONE TONE 01 ON (1 ~ 3) 1
02 ERROR ONLY (1 ~ 3) 1
03 OFF
06 SCANNING DONE TONE 01 ON (1 ~ 3) 1
02 ERROR ONLY (1 ~ 3) 1
03 OFF
07 COPYING DONE TONE 01 ON (1 ~ 3) 1
02 ERROR ONLY (1 ~ 3) 1
10 TEL LINE TYPE 01 ROTARY PULSE 03 OFF
02 TOUCH TONE
11 R-KEY SETTING 01 PSTN
02 PBX 01 PREFIX
02 HOOKING
03 EARTH CONNECTION
Figure 1-403

02 REPORT SETTINGS
01 TX REPORT
01 OUTPUT NO
02 PRINT ERROR ONLY REPORT WITH TX IMAGE 01 OFF
02 ON
03 OUTPUT YES REPORT WITH TX IMAGE 01 OFF
02 ON
02 RX REPORT 01 OUTPUT NO
02 PRINT ERROR ONLY
03 OUTPUT YES
03 CONFID. RX REPORT 01 OUTPUT NO

02 OUTPUT YES
04 MEMORY BOX REPORT 01 OUTPUT NO

02 OUTPUT YES
05 ACTIVITY REPORT 01 AUTO PRINT 01 ON

02 OFF
02 DAILY REPORT TIME 01 OFF
02 ON REPORT PRINT TIME
03 TX/RX SEPARATE 01 OFF
02 ON
03 TX SETTINGS
01 ECM TX 01 ON
02 OFF
02 PAUSE TIME (01 ~ 15) 02 SEC
Figure 1-404
03 AUTO REDIAL 01 ON 01 REDAIL TIMES (01 ~ 15) 02 TIMES

02 OFF 02 REDIAL INTERVAL (02 ~ 99) 02 MIN.
03 TX ERROR RESEND
01 ON RESEND TX FROM
04 BATCH TX 01 ON
02 OFF
02 OFF
01 ALL PAGES
05 ERASE FAILED TX 01 OFF 02 ERROR & 1ST PG
02 ON 03 ERROR PAGE
06 TIME OUT 01 ON
02 OFF
07 STAMP ACTION 01 DIRECT & MEMORY TX
02 DIRECT TX
04 RX SETTINGS
01 ECM RX 01 ON
02 OFF
Figure 1-405

02 REMOTE RX 01 ID CALL # REMOTE RX ID (00 ~ 99, *, #) 25

02 HOOK
03 OFF
03 MEMORY RX 01 ON MEMORY RX ALARM 01 OFF
02 OFF 02 ON
04 RX PAGE FOOTER 01 OFF
02 ON
05 N ON ONE PRINT 01 OFF

02 ON
Figure 1-406
05 PRINTER SETTINGS
01 # OF RX COPIES (01 ~ 99) 01 COPIES

02 SELECT CASSETTE 01 CASSETTE SW A ON
OFF
02 CASSETTE SW B ON
OFF
03 CASSETTE SW C ON
OFF
04 CASSETTE SW D ON
OFF
03 RX REDUCTION 01 ON 01 RX REDUCTION 01 AUTO SELECTION

02 OFF 02 FIXED REDUCTION
SELECT REDUCE % 97%

95%
90%
75%
02 SELECT REDUCE DIR 01 VERTICAL ONLY

02 HORIZ & VERTICAL
04 PRINT IN ORDER 01 OFF

02 ON
05 TONER SUPPLY LOW 01 RX TO MEMORY

02 KEEP PRINTING
*1
06 NAME STACK SIZE 01 OFF
02 ON BYPASS DOC. SIZE 01 A3
02 A4
03 B4
04 B5
05 A4R
06 A5
07 B5R
08 A5R
09 11 x 17
10 LTR
11 LTRR
12 LGL
*1 Even when the [NAME STACK SIZE] is set to [OFF], if [STACK BYPASS] is selected by [CASSETTE
ELIGIBLTY] or [SET REPORT CASSETTE], [STACK BYPASS] will automatically come [ON]
Figure 1-407

07 CASSETTE ELIGIBLTY
01 FAX RECEIVING 01 STACK BYPASS 01 OFF

02 ON
BYPASS DOC. SIZE 01 A3

02 A4
02 CASSETTE 1 01 OFF 03 B4
02 ON 04 B5
03 CASSETTE 2 01 OFF *1 05 A4R
02 ON 06 A5
04 CASSETTE 3 01 OFF 07 B5R
02 ON 08 A5R
05 CASSETTE 4 01 OFF 09 11 x 17
02 ON 10 LTR
11 LTRR
12 LGL
02 COPY 01 STACK BYPASS 01 OFF
02 ON BYPASS DOC. SIZE 01 A3
02 A4
02 CASSETTE 1 01 OFF 03 B4
02 ON 04 B5
03 CASSETTE 2 01 OFF *1 05 A4R
02 ON 06 A5
04 CASSETTE 3 01 OFF 07 B5R
02 ON 08 A5R
05 CASSETTE 4 01 OFF 09 11 x 17
02 ON 10 LTR
11 LTRR
12 LGL
*1 Setting is only possible when a option cassette feeder is installed.
Figure 1-408
08 SET REPORT CASSETTE 01 OFF

02 ON 01 CASSETTE 1
02 CASSETTE 2 *1
03 CASSETTE 3
04 CASSETTE 4
05 STACK BYPASS
BYPASS DOC. SIZE
01 A3
09 RX ROTATE PRINT 01 OFF 02 A4
02 ON 03 B4
04 B5
05 A4R
10 SELECT PAPER 01 PLAIN PAPER 06 A5
02 BOND PAPER 07 B5R
03 TRACING PAPER 08 A5R
04 SPECIAL PAPER 09 11 x 17
10 LTR
11 LTRR
06 FILE SETTINGS
12 LGL
01 CONFIDNTL MAILBOX
01 DELETE FILE (00 ~ 99) 01 FILE NAME

02 CHANGE DATA (00 ~ 99) 02 PASSWORD
03 SETUP FILE (00 ~ 99) 03 SUBADDRESS
04 RX PASSWORD
05 # OF RX COPIES
*2
PASSWORD ENTER 01 FILE NAME
02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 RX PASSWORD
05 # OF RX COPIES
*2
PASSWORD ENTER
*1 Setting is only possible when a cassette feeder is installed.

*2 When creating a confidential mail box, it is necessary to set a password.
Figure 1-409

02 RELAY TX-GROUP
01 SETUP FILE (00 ~ 99) 01 GROUP DIAL NAME

02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 RX PASSWORD
05 SELECT ORIG UNIT 01 OFF
02 ON
06 PRINT RX DOC. 01 OFF
02 ON
07 SELECT LOCATIONS
08 TX REPORT 01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
09 TX START TIME (5 TIMES)
10 RELAY B'CAST 01 ON
02 OFF
*
02 CHANGE DATA (00 ~ 99) PASSWORD ENTER
01 GROUP DIAL NAME

02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 RX PASSWORD
02 ON
02 ON
07 SELECT LOCATIONS
08 TX REPORT 01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
09 TX START TIME (5 TIMES)
10 RELAY B'CAST 01 ON
02 OFF
*
03 DELETE FILE (00 ~ 99) PASSWORD ENTER
* When creating a relay box, it is necessary to set a password.
Figure 1-410
03 MEMORY BOX
01 SETUP FILE (00~99)
01 FILE NAME
02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 TX PASSWORD
05 RX PASSWORD
06 RECEIVE 01 YES 01 SELECT ORIG UNIT 01 OFF
02 NO 02 ON
02 ON
01 PRINT METHOD 01 AUTO

02 MAN.
07 TRANSMIT 01 YES
02 NO 02 # OF RX COPIES (01~99) 01 COPIES
01 SELECT LOCATIONS
02 TX DOCUMENT
01 RECEIVED 01 NOT TRANSMIT

DOCUMENT 02 TRANSMIT TX REPORT 01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
02 SCAN DOCUMENT 01 NOT TRANSMIT

02 TRANSMIT
03 TX START TIME 01 EVERYDAY (5TIMES)

02 SELECT DATS 01 SUN (5TIMES)
02 MON (5TIMES)
03 TUE (5TIMES)
04 WED (5TIMES)
05 THU (5TIMES)
06 FRI (5TIMES)
07 SAT (5TIMES)
08 POLLING TX 01 YES
02 NO
01 ERASE AFTER TX 01 OFF

02 ON
02 TX DOCUMENT 01 RECEIVED DOCUMENT 01 NOT TRANSMIT

02 TRANSMIT

02 TRANSMIT
Figure 1-411

02 CHANGE DATA (00~99)
PASSWORD ENTER*
01 FILE NAME
02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 TX PASSWORD
05 RX PASSWORD
06 RECEIVE 01 YES 01 SELECT ORIG UNIT 01 OFF
02 NO 02 ON
02 ON
01 PRINT METHOD 01 AUTO

02 MAN.
07 TRANSMIT 01 YES
02 NO 02 # OF RX COPIES (01~99) 01 COPIES
01 SELECT LOCATIONS
02 TX DOCUMENT
01 RECEIVED DOCUMENT 01 NOT TRANSMIT

02 TRANSMIT TX REPORT
01 NOT TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
02 TRANSMIT
03 TX START TIME 01 EVERYDAY (5TIMES)

02 SELECT DAYS 01 SUN (5TIMES)
02 MON (5TIMES)
03 TUE (5TIMES)
04 WED (5TIMES)
08 POLLING TX 01 YES 05 THU (5TIMES)
02 NO 06 FRI (5TIMES)
07 SAT (5TIMES)
02 ON
02 TX DOCUMENT 01 RECEIVED 01 NOT TRANSMIT
DOCUMENT 02 TRANSMIT
03 DELETE FILE (00~99) PASSWORD ENTER* 02 TRANSMIT
* When creating an all-purpose box, it is necessary to set a password.
Figure 1-412
04 PRESET POLLING
01 SETUP 01 FILE NAME

FILE 02 PASSWORD
03 SELECT LOCATIONS
04 START TIME 01EVERYDAY (5TIMES)
*1
05 RESET POLLING 01 YES 02 MON (5TIMES)
02 NO 03 TUE (5TIMES)
*2 04 WED (5TIMES)
02 CHANGE DATA PASSWORD ENTER 05 THU (5TIMES)
06 FRI (5TIMES)
01 FILE NAME 07 SAT (5TIMES)
02 PASSWORD
03 SELECT LOCATIONS
04 START TIME 01EVERYDAY (5TIMES)
*1
05 RESET POLLING 01 YES 02 MON (5TIMES)
02 NO 03 TUE (5TIMES)
04 WED (5TIMES)
05 THU (5TIMES)
06 FRI (5TIMES)
07 SAT (5TIMES)
*2
03 DELETE TIME PASSWORD ENTER
05 POLLING BOX 01 SETUP FILE 01 FILE NAME

02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 TX PASSWORD
*3 02 ON
02 CHANGE DATA PASSWORD ENTER
01 FILE NAME
02 PASSWORD
03 SUBADDRESS
04 TX PASSWORD
02 ON
*3
03 DELETE FILE PASSWORD ENTER
*1 Only displayed when the service data SSSW #1 SW09 bit 5 is 1

*2 When creating a fixed time polling box, it is necessary to set a password.
*3 When creating a polling box, it is necessary to set a password.
Figure 1-413

06 TRANSFER
01 SETUP 01 FILE NAME

FILE 02 SELECT LOCATIONS
03 PASSWORD
02 ON
05 TIME SETUP
01 START TIME 01 EVERYDAY (5TIMES)

02 MON (5TIMES)
03 TUE (5TIMES)
04 WED (5TIMES)
05 THU (5TIMES)
06 FRI (5TIMES)
07 SAT (5TIMES)
02 END TIME 01 EVERYDAY (5TIMES)
02 MON (5TIMES)
03 TUE (5TIMES)
04 WED (5TIMES)
05 THU (5TIMES)
06 FRI (5TIMES)
07 SAT (5TIMES)

02 ON (01~99) 01 COPIES
*
02 CHANGE DATA PASSWORD ENTER
01 FILE NAME
02 SELECT LOCATIONS
03 PASSWORD
02 ON
* When creating a transfer box, it is necessary to set a password.
Figure 1-414
05 TIME SETUP
01 START TIME 01 EVERY DAY (5TIMES)

02 MON (5TIMES)
03 TUE (5TIMES)
04 WED (5TIMES)
05 THU (5TIMES)
06 FRI (5TIMES)
07 SAT (5TIMES)
02 END TIME 01 EVERY DAY (5TIMES)
02 MON (5TIMES)
03 TUE (5TIMES)
04 WED (5TIMES)
05 THU (5TIMES)
06 FRI (5TIMES)
07 SAT (5TIMES)
02 ON (01~99) 01 COPIES
*1
03 DELETE FILE PASSWORD ENTER
*2
07 SYSTEM SETTINGS PASSWORD ENTER
01 PASSWORD
02 RESTRICTIVE CODES
01 TX SETTINGS 01 OFF
02 ON DAC SETUP 01 OFF PASSWORD ENTER
02 ON ENTER DAC (9)
PASSWORD ENTER
02 PRINTER SETTINGS 01 OFF

02 ON PASSWORD ENTER
*1 When creating a transfer box, it is necessary to set a password.

*2 Necessary when management password has been registered.
Figure 1-415

03 MEMORY LOCK RX 01 OFF

02 ON 01 MEM LOCK PASSWORD
02 REPOROT 01 OUTPUT YES
02 OUTPUT NO
03 TIME SETUP 01 OFF
02 NO
01 START TIME 01 EVERYDAY (5TIMES)

02 MON (5TIMES)
03 TUE (5TIMES)
04 WED (5TIMES)
05 THU (5TIMES)
06 FRI (5TIMES)
07 SAT (5TIMES)
02 END TIME 01 EVERYDAY (5TIMES)
02 MON (5TIMES)
03 TUE (5TIMES)
04 RX RESTRICTION 01 OFF 04 WED (5TIMES)
02 NO 05 THU (5TIMES)
06 FRI (5TIMES)
07 SAT (5TIMES)
05 DATE SETUP 'YY MM/DD
MM/DD/YY
DD/MM'YY
06 DISPLAY LANGUAGE 01 ENGLISH
02 FRENCH
03 SPANISH
07 TX START SPEED 01 14400bps 04 GERMAN
02 9600bps 05 ITALIAN
03 7200bps 06 DUTCH
04 4800bps 07 FINNISH
05 2400bps 08 PORTUGUESE
06 33600bps 09 NORWEGIAN
10 SWEDISH
08 RX START SPEED 01 14400bps 11 DANISH
02 9600bps 12 SLOVENE
03 7200bps
04 4800bps
09 RX PASSWORD 05 2400bps
06 33600bps
10 ENERGY SAVER 01 ON (03~30) 03 MIN.
02 OFF
11 PHONE NO.CHECK 01 OFF
02 NO
Figure 1-416
12 DEFAULT SETTINGS 01 FAX

02 COPY
13 AUTO CLEAR TIME (1~9) 2MIN.
14 SW AFTER AUTOCLEAR 01 DO NOT RTN TO DFLT

02 RETURN TO DEFAULT
15 FAX DEFAULT 01 RESOLUTION 01 OFF

02 STANDARD
03 FINE
04 SUPER FINE
05 ULTRA FINE
02 SCAN DENSITY 01 OFF

02 LIGHT
03 STADARD
04 DARK
03 IMAGEQUALITY 01 OFF
02 TEXT
03 TEXT/PHOTO
04 HALFTONE
04 BOOK TX SCAN SIZE 01 SHEET

02 A3
03 B4
08 COPY SETTINGS 04 A4R
05 B5
06 A5
05 TX MODE 01 MEMORY SENDING
01 STD IMAGE QUAL/EXP
02 DIRECT SENDING
LIGHT
AUTO EXPOSUR 06 TX STAMP 01 TX STAMP OFF
DARK 02 TX STAMP ON
IMAGEQUALITY 01 TEXT
02 TEXT/PHOTO
03 HALFTONE
02 STD ZOOM RATIO (050~200) 100%
03 STANDARD COPY QTY (01~99) 01
04 FRAME ERASE WIDTH (01~20) 02mm
05 AUTO SORT 01 ON
02 OFF
Figure 1-417

02 TEL#REGISTRATION 01 1-TOUCHN SPD DIAL (01~84) 01 TEL NUMBER ENTRY

02 NAME
03 OPTIONAL SETTING
01 OFF
02 ON
01 TX TIME SETTING (5TIMES)
02 TX TYPE 01 REGULAR TX
03 INTERNATIONAL 01 DOMESTIC 02 CONFIDENTIAL TX

02 INTERNATIONAL(1)
01 PASSWORD
03 INTERNATIONAL(2)
02 SUBADDRESS
04 INTERNATIONAL(3) 03 ORIG RLAY TX 01 PASSWORD
04 TX SPEED 01 33600bit/s 02 SUBADDRESS
02 14400bit/s
03 9600bit/s 04 SUBADDRESS TX
04 4800bit/s 01 PASSWORD
05 ECM 01 ON 02 SUBADDRESS
02 OFF 05 POLLING RX 01 PASSWORD
02 SUBADDRESS
02 CODED SPD DIAL (*000~*115) 01 TEL NUMBER ENTRY
02 NAME
01 OFF
03 OPTIONAL SETTING
02 ON

02 TX TYPE 01 REGULAR
03 INTERNATIONAL 01 DOMESTIC
02 CONFIDENTIAL TX
02 INTERNATIONAL(1)
01 PASSWORD
03 INTERNATIONAL(2)
02 SUBADDRESS
04 INTERNATIONAL(3)
03 ORIG RLAY TX 01 PASSWORD
04 TX SPEED 01 33600bit/s
02 SUBADDRESS
02 14400bit/s
03 9600bit/s 04 SUBADDRESS TX
04 4800bit/s 01 PASSWORD
05 ECM 01 ON 02 SUBADDRESS
02 OFF 05 POLLING RX 01 PASSWORD
02 SUBADDRESS
03 GROUP DIAL (01~56)
01 TEL NUMBER ENTRY

02 NAME
Figure 1-418
2. User mode for copies equipped without the fax function
01 DATE/TIME SETTINGS
02 VOLUME CONTROL 01 ON
01 KEYPAD VOLUME (1~3)1
02 OFF
02 ALARM VOLUME 01 ON (1~3)1
02 OFF
03 COPY DONE TONE 01 ON (1~3)1
02 ERROR ONLY (1~3)1
03 NAME STACK SIZE 01 OFF 03 OFF
02 ON BYPASS DOC.SIZE 01 A3
02 A4
04 CASSETTE ELIGIBLTY 03 B4
04 B5
05 A4R
01 STACK BYPASS 01 OFF 06 A5
02 ON BYPASS DOC.SIZE 07 B5R
01 OFF 08 A5R
02 CASSETTE 1
09 11X17
02 ON 10 LTR
03 CASSETTE 2 01 OFF *1 11 LTRR
02 ON 12 LGL
04 CASSETTE 3 01 OFF
02 ON
05 CASSETTE 4 01 OFF
02 ON
05 SELECT PAPER 01 PLAIN PAPER 01 A3
02 THICK PAPER 02 A4
03 THIN PAPER 03 B4
04 SPECIAL PAPER 04 B5
05 A4R
06 DATE/SETUP 01 'YY MM/DD 06 A5
02 MM/DD/YY 07 B5R
08 A5R
03 DD/MM 'YY 09 11X17
07 DISPLAY LANGUAGE 01 ENGLISH 10 LTR
02 FRENCH 11 LTRR
12 LGL
03 SPANISH
04 GERMAN
05 ITALIAN
06 DUTCH
07 FINNISH
08 PORTUGUESE
09 NORWEGIAN
10 SWEDISH
11 DANISH
12 SLOVENE
*1 Setting is only possible when a option cassette feeder is installed.
Figure 1-419

08 ENERGY SAVER 01 ON (03~30) 03MIN.

02 OFF
09 AUTO CLEAR TIME (1~9) 2MIN.
10 STD IMAGE QUAL/EXP LIGHT 4

AUTO EXPOSUR 5
DARK 6
IMAGEQUALITY 01 TEXT
02 TEXT/PHOTO
03 HALFTONE
11 STD ZOOM RATIO (050~200) 100%
12 STANDARD COPY QTY (01~99) 01
13 FRAME ERASE WIDTH (01~20) 02mm
14 AUTO SORT 01 ON
02 OFF
Figure 1-420
V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE TO BE CARRIED OUT BY

THE USER
Explain carefully to the user that the following part should be thoroughly cleaned
once a week.
1) The copyboard glass should be wiped with a damp cloth and then wiped dry.
2) The copyboard cover and ADF document pressure plate should be wiped with neu-
tral detergent and then wiped dry.
Explain carefully to the user that the following places should be cleaned thoroughly
when the cartridge is exchanged.
1) Using the special tools provided, clean the separation static charge eliminator.
2) Clean away the paper dust from the area around the registration roller (refer to the
diagram below).
Figure 1-501

VI. SAFETY
A. Laser beam safety
1. Laser beam safety
This unit has been approved as a Class 1 product based on the American DHHS
(Department of Health and Human Services) Radiation Performance Standard which
was enacted in 1968.
This means that the laser beam emitted from this unit is not harmful.
The laser scanning assembly of the unit is completely enclosed inside the protective
housing and external covers, therefore there is no leakage of the laser beam from the
unit during customer usage.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
APPAREIL
A RAYONNEMENT
LASER DE CLASSE 1
LASER KLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1
APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1

IN ACCORDO CON LA NORMA
CEI 76-2
Figure 1-601
2. CDRH Regulations
The American CDRH (Center for Device and Radiological Health), which belongs to
the Food and Drug Administration, enforced regulations regarding laser products on
August 2nd1976.
These regulation apply to all laser products manufactured after August 1st 1976. If
product approval is not given, the product may not be sold in America.
The following label indicates that the product has been approved by the CDRH regu-
lations. All products which are sold in the United States are obligated to have this label
affixed.
CANON
30-2, SHIMOMARUKO, 3-CHOME, OHTAKU, TOKYO,
146, JAPAN.
MANUFACTURED:
THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH CQRH RADIATION
PERFORMANCE STANDARD 21CFR CHAPTER 1
SUBCHAPTER J.
Figure 1-602
Note:
Part of this information may differ depending on the product model.

3. Handling the laser unit
When servicing around the unit’s scanning assembly, take particular care not to put
highly reflective tools, such as drivers, etc., in the path of the laser beam.
Also, remove any rings when undertaking maintenance work. (There is a danger that
the laser beam will be reflected into the eyes.)
This unit’s laser beam is infrared. The label in the diagram below is found on covers
which may reflect the laser beam.
Take special care when servicing inside this labeled cover.
This label is on the laser scanning assembly cover inside this unit. There is a danger
of laser radiation leakage from inside this cover.
DANGER - Invisible Laser radiation when open.

AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
CAUTION - INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
ATTENTION - RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D'OUVERTURE.
EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU.
VORSICHT - UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG. WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET.
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
ATTENZIONE - RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA.
EVITARE L'ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO.
PRECAUCION - RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE.
EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYD.
VARO! - AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE
LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
VAENING! - OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NAR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD.
BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.
ADVARSEL! - USYNLIG LASER STRÅLING. NÅR DENNA ER ÅBEN.
UNDGÅ BESTRÅLING.
ADVARSEL - USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES.
UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.
RS5 - 8169
Figure 1-603
The above diagram is equipped with an ADF unit.

The main units construction is the same for units whether equipped with the ADF
units, or not.
B. Toner safety
The toner is a non-toxic substance composed of plastic, iron and a small amount of
pigment.
If toner gets onto skin or clothes, wipe off as thoroughly as possible with a dry tissue,
then wash. If warm water is used to clean, the toner gels and soaks permanently into
clothing making it then impossible to clean away the stain. Also, this toner decomposes
easily with vinyl material, therefore avoid contact.
Caution:
Never throw the toner into fire - there is a danger of explosion.

VII. COPYING PROCESS
A. Outline
The construction of this unit, which employs the indirect method electro-static
process, is shown in Figure 1-701.
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp
CCD Lens
Image processing assembly
Photosensitive drum
Laser scanner unit
Cartridge
Developing cylinder
Primary charging roller
Cleaner blade Paper
Transfer
Fixing Re-charge eliminator charging roller
assembly
Static charge eliminator
Paper
Figure 1-701
Electrostatic latent image formation block
1.1 Primary charging 2. Laser exposure
3. Developing
8. Drum cleaning Cartridge
4. Transfer Multi feeder

6. Re-charge Registration
Delivery 7. Fixing 5. Separation
eliminator
Paper flow Cassette

Drum rotation direction
Figure 1-702
In this unit, the main image formation components; drum, toner, primary charging,
developing and drum cartridge are integrated in a cartridge system.
Furthermore, this unit employs the SURF fixing process; fluorocarbon coated film is
heated and the paper is passed between pressure rollers, thus being fixed by heat and
pressure.
This units image formation process is composed of the following steps.
Step 1 Primary charging (AC & negative DC)

Step 2 Laser emission
Step 3 Developing (AC & negative DC bias)
Step 4 Transfer (positive DC)
Step 5 Separation (negative DC)
Step 6 Re-charge eliminator (positive DC)
Step 7 Fixing
Step 8 Drum cleaning
Reference:
Regarding the Re-charge step
In the transfer charging step, the transfer toner image on the paper adheres due to a
positive charge from the back of the paper. This charge is weakened by the separa-
tion step, therefore the toner would scatter if moved in this state to the fixing step. In
order to prevent this, the Re-charge eliminator is located before the fixing step., and
positive DC bias is applied to the back of the paper.
Fixing film
Paper
+++ + + + + + + + + +
Re-charge eliminator
DC bias
Figure 1-703

CHAPTER 2
BASIC OPERATION
In this chapter the unit’s basic operations, purposes and functions, as well as the
relationship between the electrical and mechanical systems, are summarized. An
overview of each part’s operation timing is also included.
I. BASIC OPERATION ................................2-1 III. BASIC SEQUENCES...............................2-4

A. Function configuration........................2-1 IV. MAIN MOTOR..........................................2-5
B. Copy operation overview ...................2-2 V. PRINCIPAL CIRCUIT PCB
II. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT OVERVIEW .......2-3 INPUT/OUTPUT.......................................2-6

I. BASIC OPERATION
A. Function configuration
The functions of the unit can broadly be divided into 7 blocks; pick-up/ feeding sys-
tem, document exposure system, image processing system, laser exposure system,
image formation system, transmission system and the control system.
Document <Exposure system>
Optical path Scanning
CCD
Operation panel Analog processor PCB
<Control system> <Image processing system>
Image processor PCB
<Laser exposure system>
*
G3 fax Laser driver PCB Laser scanner
control unit
<Image formation system>

DC controller PCB Charging
Drum cleaning Drum Developing
Fixing Separation Transfer
Delivery tray Feeding Multi feeder

Main unit cassette <Pick-up feeding system>
Cassette feeder 1
Accessory Cassette feeder 2
Cassette feeder 3
*: Only applicable for units equipped with a fax function.
Figure 2-101
B. Copy operation overview

This unit will, depending on the copy mode set by the customer, automatically oper-
ate in the direct copy mode or memory copy mode.
Memory copy: After storing all the image data read from one job in the image data
housing memory DRAM (IC7, IC8, IC9, IC10) on the image processor PCB, the printing
operation begins.
The operating conditions for the copy mode and memory copy mode are described
below.
Conditions for the different copying methods
Document scanning mode Copy mode Number of copies Copy method

Book mode*1 No designation 1 to 99 Direct copy
Sheet mode Sort mode No designation Memory copy
For 2 in 1 mode No designation Memory copy
Other than sort 1 sheet Direct copy
mode, 2 in 1 mode 2 sheets or more Memory copy
No designation Copy by multi-feeder No designation Memory copy
pick-up
*1 Book mode is when the document is set on the copyboard glass and then copied.
*2 Sheet mode is when the document is set in the ADF and then copied.
Table 2-101
Reference:
When copying using the multi-feeder pick-up, memory copying will take place no mat-
ter what conditions are in effect.

II. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT OVERVIEW

The main electrical control of the unit is performed by the IC on the image processor
PCB and the IC on the DC controller PCB.
Furthermore, the unit is equipped with 2 backup lithium batteries on the image
processor PCB.
The function of each PCB is listed below.
• Image processor PCB
IC No. Function overview

IC26 (CPU) • Sequence control
• Serial I/F control
• Timer control
• Interrupt control
IC15 • DRAM control
• Control panel and transmission control
• DMA control
• DC controller PCB and transmission control
• ADF motor control
IC28 • Control panel display control
IC29 • Image processing control (shading control)
• Analogue processor PCB transmission control
IC38 • Image processing control (half tone processing, binarisation pro-
cessing)
IC41 • Image reduction and enlargement
ICI, IC2 (on ROM DIMM) • Control program built-in flash ROM)
IC7, IC8, IC9, IC10 • Image data storage DRAM
IC36, IC37 • Storage SRAM for service mode, user mode, and other
parameters
Table 2-201
• DC controller PCB
IC No. Function overview

IC301 (CPU) • Print operation program built-in
• Print process control
• Motor, clutch sensor, etc., load control
• High voltage output control
• Cassette feeder operation control
• Jam detection
• Laser scanner drive control
Table 2-202
2-4
General timing chart
• Conditions: Copy / A4 paper / main unit cassette pick-up / 3 sheets
Power ON Start ON
INTR1 STBY INTR2 SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY ESS
Main motor (M601)

150˚C control 160˚C control
Fixing heater
forward backward
Document scanner motor (M701)
Scanner HP sensor (PS101)
Scanning lamp
Shading measurement
III. BASIC SEQUENCES
Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL302)
Pick-up vertical path clutch (CL301)

Pick-up sensor (PS303)
Registration clutch (CL302)
Registration sensor (PS302)
Paper leading edge sensor (PS301)
Figure 2-301
Paper width sensor (PS304)
Primary charging roller bias DC
Primary charging roller bias AC

Negative bias Paper interval bias Negative bias
Transfer charging roller bias
Separation static charge eliminator bias
Re-charge eliminator bias
Laser scanner motor (M801)
Laser exposure
Paper interval bias
Developing bias DC
Developing bias AC
Delivery sensor (PS306)
Delivery sensor (FM301)
90 sec.

IV. MAIN MOTOR

1. Overview
The rotation and stopping of the main motor (M601) is controlled by the drive signal
output from DC controller PCB.
The DC controller PCB changes the speed in accordance with the print resolution.
2. Rotation operation
The unit’s main motor has a Hall element built-in 3 phase DC brushless motor, and
is integrated with the motor drive circuit.
When the main motor drive signal (MMD*) from the DC controller PCB is “0”, the
main motor begins to rotate, and when it reaches the designated rotation, the main
motor ready signal (MRDY*) signal changes to “0”.
The DC controller PCB’s CPU (IC301) judges that there is a motor malfunction when
the following situations occur, and displays the error code “##325”.
1) When the MRDY* does not change to “0” 100ms after the main motor’s drive has
started.
2) When the MRDY* signal has changed to “0”, but does not revert to “1” after 0.1s of
continuous rotation.
Main motor driver PCB
+24V
0V Driver Main motor
Drive
DC controller PCB circuit (M601)
J304-9 MMD* control
circuit
-6 MRDY* Rotation speed
detection
Reference
signal
generation
Figure 2-401
Related error code

###325: Main motor / exhaust fan malfunction
Related service mode

The print status is displayed by pressing TEST>6:FACULTY TEST>6-3:SENSOR> on
the input numeric key 7. Check the condition of the main motor malfunction using the
status 35 feeding unit malfunction detailed status Bit 6.
V. PRINCIPAL CIRCUIT PCB INPUT / OUTPUT

Image processor PCB input / output (1/2)
Image processor PCB
+5V
J212-1
Scanner home -3 PS101S When the scanner is in the home position: “1”
position sensor PS101 -2 (When the light-blocking plate is in PS101)
+5V
J216-1
Copyboard cover -3 PS102S When the copyboard cover or the ADF
open/shut sensor PS102 -2 is shut: “1”
(When the light-blocking plate is in PS102)
Analogue processor An actual check is not possible, therefore an explanation

PCB of the signal name has been omitted.
An actual check is not possible, therefore an explanation

Control panel PCB of the signal name has been omitted.
Control panel sub

PCB
Figure 2-501

Image processor PCB input / output (2/2)

Image processor PCB
J214-1
-2
Document -3
scanner M61 -4 Refer to P. 3-3
motor -5
-6
CN1-1 Inverter printed An actual check is not possible, therefore an explan

-2 J207 ation of the signal name has been omitted.
circuit board
Refer to P.3-4
Scanner lamp
J211-1
Speaker -2
+24V
Stamp J219-1 When “0” , the SL303 is ON
solenoid *1 SL303 -2 STMP* (the document is stamped)
DC power supply J209 An actual check is not possible, therefore an

PCB explanation of the signal name has been omitted.
J201 An actual check is not possible, therefore

DC controller PCB
an explanation of the signal name has been omitted.
FAX modem board *2 J202 An actual check is not possible, therefore

an explanation of the signal name has been omitted.
To the ADF relay

J205 Refer to the ADF service manual
PCB
Figure 2-502
*1 This function only applies to units equipped with the ADF.

*2 Is only installed if the unit is equipped with a FAX function.
DC controller PCB input / output (1/3)

DC controller PCB
+5V
J306-1
Paper leading -2 PS301S* When the PS301 detects paper: “0”
edge sensor PS301 -3 (When the light-blocking plate
is not in PS301)
+5V
J303-1
Registration sensor -2 PS302S* When the PS302 detects paper: “0”
PS302 -3 (When the light-blocking plate
is not in PS302)
+5V
J303-4 When the PS303 detects paper: “0”
Paper sensor -6 PS303S* (When the light-blocking plate
PS303 -5 is not in PS303)
When the unit is on standby,
this sensor detects right lower cover
+5V open / close
J306-4
Paper width sensor -5 PS304S* When the PS304 detects paper: “0”
PS304 -6 (When the light-blocking plate
is not in PS304)
+5V
J306-7
Cassette -8 When paper is in the cassette: “1”
PS305S
paper sensor PS305 -9 (When the light-blocking plate
is in PS305)
J302-1
-2 PSIZ3
Cassette paper size PSIZ2
-3 Refer to P.7-6
detection switch -4 PSIZ1
-5 PSIZ0
+24V
J312-4
Front cover open /
shut sensor -1
CVROPN When the front cover is open: “1”
SW301
+5V
J309-8 When paper is in the cassette: “0”
Multi-feeder -7 (When the light-blocking plate
paper sensor PS501 -6 PS501S* is not in PS501)
-3
-2 TSTON* When the switch is pushed: “0”
Test print -1
output switch -4
SW501 -5
Sensor printed circuit board
Figure 2-503


DC controller PCB
+24V
J307-4
Pick-up vertical
path clutch CL301 -3 CL301D* When “0”, CL301 is ON
+24V
J307-5
Registration clutch CL302 -6 CL302D* When “0”, CL302 is ON
+24V
J306-11
Pick-up solenoid SL301 -10 SL301D* When “0”, CL301 is ON
+24V
Multi-feeder J307-2
SL302 -1 SL302D*
pick-up solenoid When “0”, SL302 is ON
J304-5
-6
-7
M601 -8
Main motor Refer to P.2-5
-9
-10
-11
+24V
J304-1
-2 ACC Laser scanner motor acceleration signal
M701 -3 DEC Laser scanner motor deceleration signal
-4
Laser scanner motor
+5V
J304-12
-13 BDI
BD PCB -14 BD input signal (pulse signal)
Laser scanner
unit
+5V
Laser driver
PCB Refer to P.5-4
J308-7
Fan FM301 -8 Refer to P.9-7
-6
Figure 2-504

DC controller PCB
J308-3 Delivery input signal

-5
Delivery PS306 PS306 When PS306 detects paper: “0”
-2 (When the light-blocking plate
sensor
-4 is not in PS306)
-1
TH1 Fixing heater surface temperature
J103-1 detection signal (Analog signal)
-3 J305-1
RLYD When “1” relay is ON
Heater 2
Heater 1
-11
TH1
FSRDRV1 When “1” heater 1 is ON

-13
RL1 FSRDRV2 When “1” heater 2 is ON
-5
FU2
-14 ZEROX ZEROX Temperature
FU1
TSW1
adjustment reference signal
Fixing assembly
DC power supply
PCB
JH401
Primary charging roller
JH402
Developing cylinder
JH403
High-voltage
output circuit
Transfer charging roller (refer to P.9-4)
JH404
Separation static charge eliminator
JH405
Re-charge eliminator
JH406
Remaining toner sensor
Figure 2-505

CHAPTER 3
EXPOSURE SYSTEM
In this chapter the purpose and functions of the unit’s scanner system drive and doc-
ument sensors, etc. as well as the relationship between the electrical and mechanical
systems is summarized. An overview of each parts operation timing is also included.
I. OPERATION OVERVIEW........................3-1 B. Charging the magnification ratio ........3-4

A. Overview ............................................3-1 C. Scanning lamp control .......................3-4
B. Exposure system sequence ...............3-2 III. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..................3-5
II. SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM....................3-3 A. Scanning lamp ...................................3-6
A. Document scanner motor...................3-3 B. Document scanning motor .................3-8

I. OPERATION OVERVIEW
A. Overview
The image exposure system’s function is to expose the document, and irradiate the
CCD with the reflected light.
The scanning lamp irradiates the document and the light from this is reflected by 4
mirrors, converged by a lens and then transmitted to the CCD. The reflected light in the
CCD is then image processed with a scanning resolution of 400 × 600pdi.
Figure 3-101 is a cross sectioned diagram of the image exposure system, and
Figure 3-102 is an external view diagram.
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp
Mirror 2
Forward (document scanner)

Mirror 1
Mirror 3 Mirror 4
Lens
CCD light receiving unit
Analog processor PCB
Figure 3-101
Light-blocking plate
Scanner home position Forward

sensor (PS101)
Mirror mount 1
Mirror mount 2
Backward
Figure 3-102
B. Exposure system sequence

Start
key ON
STBY INTR SCFW SCFW LSTR STBY
SCRV
SCRV
Document scanner
motor (M701)
Scanner home
position sensor (PS101)
Scanning lamp
Figure 3-103

II. SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM
A. Document scanner motor

The document scanner motor (M701) uses a 2 phase excitation stepping motor
which is controlled by the image processor PCB.
The image processor’s PCB drive control IC (IC15) sends instructions for the clock-
wise rotation (scanner forward movement), anti-clockwise rotation (scanner backward
movement) and the rotation speed to the motor driver IC (IC3). The motor driver IC (IC3)
supplies power to the document scanner in compliance with the clock signal which is
sent with this control instruction.
Reference:
In the event of a failure such as a blown fuse in the document scanner motor, 24 V
continues to be supplied to the motor driver’s IC (IC3) which causes the IC’s surface
temperature to increase. Consequently, a thermoswitch has been installed in the
motor driver IC (IC3) for its protection. When the IC surface temperature reaches 115
± 5°C the thermoswitch’s contact is released, cutting off the 24V power supply to the
motor driver IC (IC3).
If it is not possible to replace this thermoswitch, or if the switch has tripped because
the temperature does not return to normal, eliminate the cause of the temperature
increase, and then replace the image processor PCB.
Image processor PCB

+24V
Thermo
switch
Document scanner motor
A
COM
M701
Drive Motor
A*
control IC driver IC
(IC15) (IC3)
B
COM
Clock pulse
B*

By setting service mode>#10 CS SET>, the Mirror 1 mount will be moved to the fac-
tory setting position.
Figure 3-201
B. Changing the magnification ratio

The magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction (drum axis direction) is
changed by line skipping (for reducing) when writing the image signal to the line memo-
ry, or double scanning (for enlarging) when reading out from the line memory.
The magnification ratio in the vertical scanning direction is changed by increasing
the speed of the mirror mounts movement (when reducing), or reducing the movement
speed (when enlarging).
C. Scanning lamp control

This unit’s scanning lamp uses a xenon tube.
The ON/OFF control of the scanning lamp is performed by the scanning lamp light-
ing control IC (IC38) which is on the image processor PCB.
Based on the scanning lamps drive signal (LMPON), which is output from the scan-
ning lamp lighting control IC (IC38), the inverter PCB drive circuit comes into operation,
causing 24V to be supplied to the scanning lamp via the scanning lamp lighting circuit.
Scanning lamp
Image processor
xenon tube
PCB Inverter PCB
+24V
Scanning
Scanning
lamp lighting J207-3 Drive lamp lighting
control IC [1] LMPON circuit circuit
(IC38)
[1] LMPON: Scanning lamp drive signal

Service mode>TEST MODE>5:AGING TEST (Number Key 5)
Scanning lamp lighting, ADF motor operation, oblique line pattern print
Figure 3-202

III. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY

This chapter describes mechanical features and operations as well as disassembly
and assembly procedures.
The following precautions must be observed during disassembly and assembly work.
1. For the sake of safety, disconnect the power plug before performing any disas-
sembly or assembly work.
2. Unless otherwise specified, assembly work is performed in the reverse order of the
disassembly operations.
3. Be sure to use the right type (diameter and length) or screws in the right places.
4. An inner-clip washer is used with one securing screw in the metal cover to prevent
buildup of static electricity. Make sure to use this washer during assembly work.
5. In principal, the copier must not be operated when parts have been removed.
6. Do not throw the drum cartridge into fire - there is a danger of explosion.
7. In order to discharge any static electricity, touch the main unit’s metal assembly
before embarking on any work relating to the PCB. This will protect the PCB from
any electrostatic damage.
8. When disassembling, do not remove screws which have been paint-locked.
A. Scanning lamp
1) Remove the ADF or pressure plate
(Refer to P.3-1 of the ADF service
manual).
2) Remove the 2 installation screws, [1]

and then remove the copyboard
glass stay.
3) Remove the copyboard glass.
4) Remove 2 of each of the installation

screws, then remove the upper rear
cover [1] and the upper front cover
[2].
5) Slowly move the Mirror 1 mount

assembly from the home position
about 10cm to the right. [2]
Figure 3-301
6) Remove the installation screw [3], [3]

and then remove the inverter PCB
cover [4]
[4]
Figure 3-302

7) Remove one of the inverter PCB’s [5] [5]

connectors (CN2) [6].
[6]
Figure 3-303
8) Insert a screwdriver into the upper
frame metal sheet’s front and back
holes, and prise loose the 2 installa-
tion pins.
9) Removed a scanning lamp at slide.
Figure 3-304
B. Document scanning [1] [2]

motor
1) Remove the 4 installation screws and
remove the main unit’s rear cover.
2) Remove the copyboard cover open /

shut sensor’s connector [1]
3) Remove the installation screw [2],

and remove the copyboard cover
open / shut sensor together with the
sensor holder.
Figure 3-305
The above diagram shows the config-

uration of units equipped with an ADF.
The configuration of the main unit is
also the same for units which are not
equipped with an ADF.
[3] [6] [4]

4) Remove the document scanner
motor’s [3] connector [4].
5) Remove the 4 installation screws [5].
6) Remove the tension spring [6], and

while removing the drive belt from the
motor gear, remove the document
scanner motor together with the sup-
port plate.
Caution:
When installing the document scanner
motor, lock in position with a installa- [5]
tion screw after pulling the tension
spring between the motor and the
main unit. If the spring is locked in Figure 3-306
position before it has been stretched,
the drive belt will not have the correct
tension which could lead to faulty The above diagram shows the config-
operation of the scanner. uration of units equipped with an ADF.
The configuration of the main unit is
also the same for units which are not
equipped with an ADF.

CHAPTER 4
IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
In this chapter the unit’s CCD/Analog processor PCB, analog image processing and
digital image processing are summarized.
I. OVERVIEW..............................................4-1 C. Magnification ratio process ................4-7

II. ANALOG IMAGE PROCESSING.............4-2 D. Edge emphasis / smoothing
A. Overview ............................................4-2 process ..............................................4-7
B. CCD/CCD drive circuit .......................4-2 E. Logarithmic correction........................4-8
C. A-D conversion circuit / F. Half tone density processing ..............4-9
ABC circuit .........................................4-3 G. Binarisation ........................................4-9
III. DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING..............4-4 IV. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ................4-10
A. Overview ............................................4-4 A. CCD unit ..........................................4-11
B. Shading correction .............................4-5

I. OVERVIEW
The image processing system changes the optical image, which has been irradiated
onto the CCD, into an electrical signal (image signal), and then corrects and processes
it.
Analog processor Image processor

PCB PCB
A-D Shading Image

Binari-
conversion correction processing
zation
circuit circuit circuit
CCD
Laser driver DC controller

PCB PCB
Laser
Photosensitive Laser
exposure
drum drive circuit
control circuit
Figure 4-101
II. ANALOG IMAGE PROCESSING
A. Overview
The analog processor PCB converts the CCD drive control and CCD output signals
(analog signals) into digital signals. It also controls the AE.
B. CCD/CCD drive circuit

The CCD is a linear image sensor with 5000 pixel per line (light receiving unit). The
signal which has undergone photoelectric conversion at the light receiving unit is output
separately as even number pixels and odd number pixels, and is transmitted to the CCD
drive circuit. The CCD drive circuit then synthesizes the separately output odd number
and even number pixel signals, and outputs the synthesized signal to the A-D conver-
sion circuit.
CCD
Odd number
pixel signal
Image signal Image signal
(analog) A-D (digital)
CCD drive circuit conversion
Even number circuit
pixel signal Reference
voltage circuit
ABC circuit
ABC setting signal
ABC circuit off signal
Analog signal setting signal
Clock pulse
Figure 4-201

C. A-D conversion circuit / ABC circuit

The CCD’s PCB A-D conversion circuit converts the analog image signal (voltage
signal), which has been sent from the CCD, into an 8 bit digital image signal.
The A-D conversion circuit performs A-D conversion processing based on the refer-
ence voltage. By increasing or decreasing the reference voltage, the density range (the
difference between the max. output level and min. output level) of each pixel will also
increase or decrease, therefore it has an affect on the signal level after the A-D conver-
sion.
The ABC (Auto Background Control) function applies this characteristic, and
changes the reference voltage in accordance with the output signal from the A-D con-
version circuit, and by altering the density range, converts the documents background
density. This technique is used for adjusting the density when copying from a coloured
background document to one with a white background.
As show in figure 4-202, in the case of a document with a coloured background, by
lowering the density range compared to a white background, the coloured background is
erased.
When the unit’s copy function density adjustment is set at “Auto”, the ABC function
comes into operation automatically. After A-D conversion, the image signal is returned
by the ABC circuit, and judgement of the A-D conversion circuit output signal level takes
place, the reference voltage is converted in accordance with the judgement results. ABC
control takes place by the voltage being input into the A-D conversion circuit,.
<White background documen> <Coloured background document> By means of the ABC

circuit, the reference
Document voltage changes and
the FFH (white) level
surface is lowered.
(The density level is
decreased)
FFH (white)
FFH (white)
Output level A
B
00H (black) 00H (black)
A : White background document density range

B : Coloured background document density range
Figure 4-202
III. DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
A. Overview
The digital image processing assembly processes the image signals sent from the
Analog processor PCB.
The following block figure shows the contents of the image processing.
Image processor PCB
Analog Magnifi- • Edge

Shading cation ratio emphasis
processor correction
PCB processing • Smoothing
DC Density Logarithmic
controller Binarization processing correction
PCB
Figure 4-301

B. Shading correction
Even when reflected light from a document with even density is detected by the
CCD, the CCD output will not be consistent for the following reasons.
Reason 1: There is variation in the photosensitivity of the individual CCD pixels.
Reason 2: The volume of light filtered through the lens center and the peripheral
areas is different.
Reason 3: The volume of light from the scanning lamp centre and ends is different.
Reason 4: The scanning lamp’s quality gradually deteriorates. Shading is performed
in order to correct the above.
There are two types of shading correction; shading correction for every copy and the
automatic shading (the value of which is set in the service mode).
a. Shading target value setting

The automatic shading correction is operated and executed by TEST MODE 2:CCD
in the service mode.
This operation measures and records the density of the white reference plate
(behind the copyboard glass). The memorized data are arithmetically processed and
used as the ‘target value’ when correcting the shading.
b. Shading correction
In this operation, the scanning lamp light irradiates the white reference plate, (refer
to Figure 4-302) and the volume of that reflected light is digitized by the analog image
processing assembly. The digitized reflected light volume is input as shading data into
the image processor PCB’s shading circuit.
The memorized target value and the shading data are arithmetically processed. The
result is then set as the shading correction value.
The shading correction value corrects the unevenness in the CCD’s pixels at the
time of document scanning, and is used to create image density uniformity.
Shading correction takes place at the following times:
• When the power is switched ON.
• When the number of pages in a document is between 1 and 19, shading correction
occurs before the first page is scanned.
• When performing continuous copying (copying 20 pages or more), shading correc-
tion takes place before the first page is scanned and then once every 20 pages
(after the previous shading correction has taken place, it will take place again after
scanning the 20th page).
• For Fax transmissions, shading correction takes place before scanning the first
page. (Shading correction only takes place once regardless of the number of
pages).
White reference plate Copy board glass
Scanning lamp
Mirror 2
Mirror 1
Mirror 3 Mirror 4
CCD Lens
Figure 4-302
CCD output
After correction
Target value
Measured data
Before correction
White reference plate Document density
Figure 4-303

Shading automatic adjustment:
Control panel RMSW ON, Service mode> TEST MODE>2:CCD (Numeric key 2 >
Numeric key 8 >

C. Magnification ratio process

The magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction (drum axis direction) is
changed by line skipping (for reducing) when writing the image signal to the line memo-
ry, or double scanning (for enlarging) when reading out from the line memory.
The magnification ratio in the vertical scanning direction is changed by increasing
the speed of the mirror mount’s movement (when reducing), or reducing the movement
speed (when enlarging).
D. Edge emphasis / smoothing process

When the character mode is selected on the control panel, edge emphasis process-
ing takes place. When the photo mode is selected, smoothing processing takes place.
When edge emphasis processing takes place, it is possible to emphasize an image’s
gradation variations thus producing a more distinct image. Conversely, the smoothing
process softens the image’s gradation variations, and produces a softer image. When
copying a photo, the smoothing process makes the moiré effect less conspicuous.
Black 255
1 pixel
200
100
Horizontal scanning direction

White 0
After output
Black 255 Black 255
200 200
100 100
Horizontal scanning direction Horizontal scanning direction

White 0 White 0
After output After output
Smoothing process Edge emphasis process
Figure 4-304
E. Logarithmic correction
The CCD output has linear characteristics with regards to the reflected light from the
document, however, the density seen by the eye when looking at a document is not lin-
ear in relation to reflected light.
Figure 4-305 shows the relationship between the document density seen by the eye,
and that of the CCD output.
In order to correct this, the level is adjusted, using the correction curve shown in
Figure 4-306.
CCD output Output level
25 25
0 0
Black White 0 25
Document density Input level

F. Half tone density processing

The half tone density processing correction curve changes depending on the follow-
ing:
• The copy density setting on the control panel
• The scanning mode (character, character/photo, photo)
In accordance with the copy density setting on the control panel, there is either a
light image or a dark image curve as shown in Figure 4-307.
Furthermore, when photo mode is selected in the scanning mode, the gradation
characteristics are good, and the curve faithfully reproduces the document’s density as
shown in Figure 4-308.
Copy density Copy density
Character
mode
Dark
image
Light Character /
image photo mode
and photo
mode
Character
mode
Document density Document density
G. Binarisation
After the half tone processing has finished, multi-value data are converted into bina-
ry data.
The binarisation technique which the unit uses employs is the error diffusion system.
The data which have been binarised are sent to the DC controller PCB with a
recording resolution of 1200 x 600pdi equivalent.
IV. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY


A. CCD unit
1) Remove the 2 installation screws,
remove the copyboard glass stay,
and then take out the copyboard
glass.
2) Unclip the tab [1] and remove the

CCD connector [2]. [2]
[1]
Figure 4-401
[4] [3] [5]

3) Remove the analog processor PCB
connector [3] and flat cable [4].
4) Remove the 4 installation screws [5]

and then remove the CCD unit.
[5]
Figure 4-402
CHAPTER 5
LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM
In this chapter the operation, purpose and function of the unit’s laser exposure
process, as well as the relationship between the electrical and mechanical systems, is
summarized. An overview of each part’s operation timing is also included.
I. OVERVIEW..............................................5-1 B. Laser light intensity control ................5-4

II. BD SIGNAL GENERATION .....................5-3 IV. LASER SCANNER MOTOR
A. Overview ............................................5-3 CONTROL................................................5-6
B. BD generation / detection ..................5-3 A. Operation outline................................5-6
III. LASER DRIVER CIRCUIT .......................5-4 V. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..................5-7
A. Operation ...........................................5-4 A. Laser scanner unit .............................5-8

I. OVERVIEW
The principal parts making up the laser scanner unit are; the laser beam generating
laser unit, the laser scanner motor which contains a six sided mirror for laser scanning
and a BD sensor PCB for detection the laser beam.
The laser beam generated by the laser unit illuminates the 6 sided mirror, which
rotates at a fixed speed. The laser beam reflected by the 6 sided mirror is filtered
through a condensing lens in order to be focussed on the photosensitive drum. The optic
path is bent by the lens mirror, and the beam arrives at the photosensitive drum. Then,
the laser beam reflected by the BD mirror installed in the laser scanner unit is illuminat-
ed onto the BD sensor PCB. (Refer to Figure 5-102)
When the 6 sided mirror is rotating at a fixed speed, the laser beam is scanned onto
the photosensitive drum at a fixed speed, the static charge eliminated and then an elec-
trostatic latent image formed.
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp
Mirror 2
Mirror 1
Mirror 4
Mirror 3
Image processor Lens

PCB
CCD light receiving unit
Laser mirror
DC controller Laser Laser beam

PCB driver
Laser scanner unit

Photo-
sensitive
drum
Figure 5-101
Image processor PCB

VDO*
VDO
DC controller PCB
6 sided mirror
BD signal
Laser scanner
Laser scanner motor

Laser drive
BD sensor PCB
motor drive
Condensing
lens
signal
signal
Laser mirror
Laser unit
Laser driver PCB
BD mirror
Photosensitive drum
Figure 5-102
Related error code

##0323: Laser scanner assembly BD signal output error
Laser scanner motor rpm error

The printer status is displayed as follows: Service mode > TEST MODE> 6: FACULTY
TEST>6-3: SENSOR> Press Numeric key 5. Check the main motor fault condition by
status 8 service technician call status Bit 2.

II. BD SIGNAL GENERATION
A. Overview
When the laser is illuminated onto the photosensitive drum, a laser emission start
signal (horizontal sync. signal) is necessary. The laser beam sensor signal is used to
generate this start signal.
B. BD generation / detection
The DC controller PCB CPU outputs the laser forced light signal (LON*) at “0”,
based on the BDI* signal, and forcibly emits the laser. The laser beam is reflected by the
BD mirror and then input in the BD sensor PCB. BD sensor PCB detects this laser beam
and generates a BD input signal (BDI*), then sends it to the DC controller PCB CPU
(IC301). The CPU (IC301) generates a horizontal sync. signal (BDO*) based on the
BDI* signal, and outputs it to the image processor PCB.
Back Front
Photosensitive drum
BD sensor PCB
BD mirror
Laser
Collimator lens
BD input signal (BDI)
Polygon mirror
(6 sided)
Laser scanner unit
Laser forced light emission signal (LON*)

Horizontal sync.
DC controller PCB signal (BDO) Image processor
PCB
Figure 5-201
III. LASER DRIVER CIRCUIT
A. Operation
This circuit turns the laser diode (LD) ON at a fixed light intensity. The fixed beam is
based on a video signal (VDO*, VDO) which is sent from the image processor PCB via
the DC controller PCB.
The binarised image signal is converted to a VDO signal with the low amplitude dif-
ferential VDO* signal, inside the image processor PCB, and sent to the DC controller
PCB. Then, it is sent unchanged to the laser driver PCB receiver. The receiver returns
the low amplitude differential signal to its original form and sends it as a video out signal
(VDOUT* signal) to the logic circuit inside the laser driver.
When the image formation enabling signal (ENBL*) from the DC controller PCB
(IC30) is “0”, the laser driver PCB, turns the laser diode ON/OFF in accordance with the
VDOUT* signal. Furthermore, when the print resolution is output by 1200 dpi equivalent
or by 600dpi, by changing the laser light intensity switching signal (600*), the laser light
intensity can be altered. By changing the laser light intensity switching signal to “1” when
1200 dpi equivalent, and to “0” when 600pdi equivalent, the laser light intensity is
switched by the laser driver IC power adjustment circuit.
B. Laser light intensity control

The laser (semiconductor laser) has the characteristic that the light intensity will fluc-
tuate greatly when the ambient temperature changes. Therefore, the laser drive current
is controlled to change automatically with the changes in the light intensity.
When the laser diode emits light, the laser elements built-in photo-diode receives the
laser beam, and returns the received light output voltage, which corresponds to the
strength of the light intensity, to the laser driver IC control amplifier circuit. At the control
amplifier circuit, the electrical current which was set at the photo diode output voltage
and the power adjustment circuit is compared, and the electrical current flow to the laser
diode is controlled. This laser control takes place constantly during laser beam emis-
sion.

DC controller PCB Laser driver PCB
+5V
Laser
element
LD
CPU PD
[1] ENBL*
(IC301)
Logic circuit
Image [2] VDO* [5] VDOUT*
Drive
processor [2] VDO circuit
PCB
Receiver
Control
Power amplifier
[3] 600* circuit
adjustment
circuit
[4] BDI*
BD sensor PCB
[1] ENBL* : Image formation enabling signal [2] VDO*/VDO : Video signal
[3] 600* : Laser beam changeover signal [4] BDI* : BD input signal
[5] VDOUT* : Video out signal
Figure 5-301
IV. LASER SCANNER MOTOR CONTROL
A. Operation outline
The laser scanner motor is a 3 phase 8 pole DC brushless motor integrated, with the
laser scanner motor drive circuit.
The laser scanner motor rotates when receiving the instruction from the DC con-
troller PCB. The supply of electrical power to the motor is controlled inside the scanner
driver PCB.
When the scanner motor acceleration signal (ACC*) is output from the DC controller
PCB, electrical power is supplied from the scanner driver PCB motor drive circuit, and
the laser scanner motor rotation is maintained.
When the laser scanner motor is rotating by the CPU forcing the laser to emit light, a
BDI* signal is sent from the BD sensor PCB to the DC controller PCB. The DC controller
PCB’s CPU detects the BDI* signal cycle, and the ACC* signal controls the laser scan-
ner motor rotation until it reaches the stipulated rotation count.
Furthermore, when stopping the laser scanner motor, the CPU changes the scanner
motor deceleration signal (DEC*) to “0”, and stops the motor’s rotation.
DC controller PCB
BD input signal (BDI*)
BD sensor PCB
24VA
Laser scanner motor
Laser scanner motor
driver PCB
Scanner motor acceleration
signal (ACC*)
Scanner motor deceleration
signal (DEC*)
Motor drive circuit
6 sided mirror
Laser
scanner
motor
Figure 5-401

V. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY
6. Do not throw the drum cartridge into fire there is a danger of explosion.
7. In order to discharge any static electricity, touch the main units metal assembly
A. Laser scanner unit

1) Remove the printer from the main
body. (Refer to 9-19)
2) Remove the mylar sheet [1] and the

sponge [2] from the upper part of the
laser scanner unit.
[2] [1]
Figure 5-501
3) Remove the 3 connectors [3] which [5] [3]

are connected to the laser scanner
unit. Then, after removing the 4
installation screws [4], remove the [4]
laser scanner unit [5].
[4]
[3]
Figure 5-502

CHAPTER 6
IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
In this chapter the operation, purpose and function of this unit’s image formation
process as well as the relationship between the electrical and mechanical systems is
I. OVERVIEW..............................................6-1 IV. SEPARATION STATIC CHARGE

A. Construction .......................................6-1 ELIMINATOR BIAS CONTROL ...............6-6
II. PRIMARY CHARGING ROLLER BIAS A. Operation ...........................................6-6
CONTROL................................................6-3 V. DEVELOPING BIAS CONTROL ..............6-7
A. Outline ...............................................6-3 A. Outline ...............................................6-7
B. Control operation ...............................6-3 B. Operation ...........................................6-7
III. TRANSFER CHARGING ROLLER BIAS VI. RE-CHARGE BIAS CONTROL................6-8
CONTROL................................................6-4 A. Operation ...........................................6-8
A. Overview ............................................6-4 VII. CARTRIDGE DETECTION ......................6-9
B. Bias control ........................................6-5 A. Operation ...........................................6-9

I. OVERVIEW
A. Construction
The principal components of image formation system are shown in the diagram
below.
This unit’s image formation system uses a cartridge system. The principal compo-
nents are the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, processing cylinder, drum
cleaner and toner. These are integrated to form the cartridge system.
The DC controller PCB has a built-in high-voltage output assembly, and high-voltage
is output for the charging, with the designated timing.
DC power
supply PCB
Cartridge
DC controller
PCB
JH401
Primary charging roller JH402
JH406
Toner sensor
Blade
Drum Developing cylinder
High-
voltage
output unit
Transfer charging roller

Charge JH403
Re-charge eliminator JH404
eliminator
JH405
Figure 6-101
6-2
Power ON Start key ON
INTR1 STBY INTR2 SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY
Main motor (M601)
Fixing heater 150˚C control 160˚C control
forward backward

Scanning lamp

■ High voltage related output sequence
Figure 6-102
Conditions: When copying 2 sheets of A4 size paper.
Primary charging roller bias DC component
Primary charging roller bias AC component

negative bias Paper interval bias negative bias
Separation static charge eliminator bias

Paper interval bias
Developing bias DC component
Developing bias AC component
Re-charging bias

II. PRIMARY CHARGING ROLLER BIAS CONTROL
A. Outline
The primary charging roller bias is controlled by the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC301). AC bias as well as DC bias is applied to the primary charging roller in order to
stabilize the charging.
• DC bias fixed voltage control
• AC bias fixed current control
• Bias switching control
B. Control operation
The outputs of the DC bias and AC bias, which are applied to the primary charging
roller, are controlled by the DC (DCPWM) control signal and AC (PRACON) control sig-
nal respectively, which are output from the CPU (IC301). The DC bias, which is output
from the DC drive unit, is detected by the DC voltage sensor circuit, and is fed back to
the DC drive circuit via the comparison circuit. In this way, the CPU controls the primary
high-voltage DC component (constant voltage control).The AC bias output is detected
by the AC current control circuit, is fed back to the AC drive circuit via the comparison
circuit, and controlled by the CPU (constant current control).
Furthermore, the bias output to the primary charging roller of this unit changes
depending on the print resolution (1200dpi equivalent or 600dpi equivalent).
The bias output switches between the DC and AC drive circuits, in response to the
bias switching signal (1200dpi equivalent) from the CPU.
DC controller PCB
AC drive
JH401 Super- [1] PRACON

AC voltage Compari-
Primary charging roller impose control son
CPU
[2] 1200DPI (IC301)
Photo-
sensitive Bias switching
drum
[3] DCPWM
Compari-
DC drive son
DC voltage
[1] PRACON: AC control signal control
[2] 1200DPI: Bias switching signal
[3] DCWM: DC control signal
Figure 6-201
III. TRANSFER CHARGING ROLLER BIAS CONTROL
A. Overview
This unit employs the roller direct transfer charging system. There are 4 types of
transfer charging roller bias, their respective roles and timings are explained below.
1. Transfer bias
Positive voltage is applied by this bias, which transfers the toner from the photosen-
sitive drum to the paper.
2. Cleaning bias
Because a direct transfer system is employed, there are times when, because of
jams, etc., the toner on the drum adheres to the transfer charging roller. In order to clean
this toner off, negative voltage is applied at the times below, causing the toner which has
adhered to the transfer charging roller to return to the photosensitive drum. The output
of this negative voltage is as follows:
• During forward rotation
• During part of backward rotation
3. Reference bias
Due to fluctuations in the environment, or the transfer charging roller’s resistance,

there is the possibility that the transfer effectiveness will fluctuate. In order to minimise
image deterioration caused by this, the transfer charging roller bias applied voltage level
is compensated.
The reference bias is applied when the start key is pushed, and the voltage level
compensated.
4. Paper interval bias
When performing continuous printing, the bias value is lowered to prevent the toner
between the paper adhering to the transfer charging roller.

B. Bias control
The transfer charging roller bias is controlled by the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC301). When a positive bias drive signal (TRPWM) is output from CPU, the positive
bias generation circuit comes into operation.
Also, when a negative bias signal (TRNFOT) is output, the negative bias generation
circuit comes into operation.
As mentioned before, 4 types of bias are applied to the transfer charging roller at
designated times.
Furthermore, the transfer bias to the transfer charging roller is switched, depending
on the print resolution (1200dpi equivalent and 600dpi equivalent) of this unit.
By means of the bias switching signal (1200DPI) from the CPU, the output voltage
from the positive bias generation circuit and negative bias generation circuit switches
over.
DC controller PCB
Fixed voltage
Photo- control
sensitive
+24V
drum
Comparison
JH403 Super-
Positive bias circuit [1] TRPWM
impose generation
circuit
Transfer charging roller CPU
[2] 1200DPI (IC301)
Bias switching
Negative [3] TRNFOT

bias
[1] TRPWM: Positive bias drive signal generation
[3] TRNFOT: Negative bias switching signal
Figure 6-301
IV. SEPARATION STATIC CHARGE ELIMINATOR BIAS

CONTROL
A. Operation
The separation static charge eliminator is controlled by the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC301)
When a separation static charge eliminator bias ON signal (DCSON) is output from
the CPU, the drive circuit transformer T406 comes into operation and negative voltage is
applied to the separation static charge eliminator.
Also, when output voltage from the transformer T406 is returned to the bias drive cir-
cuit, the constant voltage control is performed in order to output a fixed voltage.
Furthermore, the separation static charge eliminator supply bias is switched depend-
ing on the print resolution (1200dpi equivalent and 600dpi equivalent) of this unit,.
The bias drive circuit, by means of the bias switching signal (1200DPI) from the
CPU, judges the print resolution and the switches the output voltage.
DC controller PCB
Photo-
sensitive +24V
drum
Bias control
Drive circuit [1] DSCON
circuit
(transformer
Separation static T406) CPU
charge eliminator (IC301)
Bias [2] 1200DPI

[1] DSCON: Static charge eliminator switching
bias ON signal circuit
Figure 6-401

V. DEVELOPING BIAS CONTROL
A. Outline
The circuit shown in Figure 6-501 is the circuit which controls the developing bias in
the DC controller PCB. It’s principal functions are as follows:
• Developing bias AC ON/OFF control
• Developing bias DC ON/OFF control
• Developing bias DC constant voltage control
B. Operation
The developing bias control is performed by the DC ON/OFF signal (DVDUP) and
the AC ON/OFF signal (DVACON), which are output from the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC 301).
When DVDUP*=0 is output from the CPU, developing bias DC is applied by power
being supplied to the DC bias generation circuit,. And, when the DVACON signal is out-
put from the CPU, AC bias is generated.
Due to the CPU outputting these signals at designated times, developing bias is gen-
erated and applied to the developing cylinder.
Furthermore the output voltage from the DC bias generation circuit undergoes con-
stant voltage control by being returned to the comparison circuit.
DC controller PCB
JH402 AC bias [1] DVACON

Bias drive generation
circuit circuit
Photo-
+24V
sensitive
drum
CPU
Compara-
tive circuit
[2] DVDUP (IC301)
DC bias
generation
circuit
DC bias
detection circuit
[1] DVACON: AC bias drive signal
[2] DVDUP: DC ON/OFF signal
Figure 6-501
VI. RE-CHARGE BIAS CONTROL
A. Operation
The unit re-charges once again before fixing, in order to increase the transfer toner
adhesiveness, which has been weakened by the separation static charge.
The re-charge bias is controlled by the DC controller PCB’s CPU (IC301).
When a re-charge bias ON signal (RECON) is output from the CPU with the pre-
scribed timing, the drive circuit transformer T407 comes into operation and DC positive
bias is applied to the re-charge eliminator.
Also, when output voltage from the transformer T406 is returned to the bias control
circuit, constant voltage control occurs in order to output a fixed voltage.
Furthermore, the re-charge eliminator power supply bias is switched depending on
the print resolution (1200dpi equivalent and 600dpi equivalent).
The bias drive circuit, by means of the bias switching signal (1200DPI) from the
CPU, judges the print resolution and the switches output voltage.
Re-charge eliminator DC controller PCB
+24V
Bias control
JH405 Drive circuit circuit [1] RECON
(transformer CPU
T407) (IC301)
Bias [2] 1200DPI

[1] RECON: Re-charge eliminator switching
bias ON signal circuit
Figure 6-601

VII. CARTRIDGE DETECTION
A. Operation
The circuit for detecting whether or not there is a cartridge, and the volume of toner
in the cartridge, is shown in the diagram below.
The DC controller PCB’s CPU (IC301) compares the developing bias AC (TNRCHKD)
which has been sent from the developing bias generation circuit and the output signal
(TNRCHKT) which has been output from the antenna inside the cartridge, and, judges
whether there is a toner cartridge, and also the level of toner in the cartridge.
When the developing bias is applied to the developing cylinder, the CPU checks the
difference between the 2 signals and judges whether there is a toner cartridge, and also
the level of toner in the cartridge.
Furthermore, the volume of remaining toner is regularly monitored when the devel-
oping bias is being applied, but the presence of the cartridge is only monitored when
developing bias is being applied during the initial rotation.
DC controller PCB
Developing
[1] TNRCHKD
bias gene-
ration circuit
CPU
(IC301)
Antenna [2] TNRCHKT
Toner cartridge output detection
circuit
[1] TNRCHKT: Developing bias AC output [2] TNRCHK: Antenna output signal
Figure 6-701
CHAPTER 7
PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM
In this chapter, the operation, purpose and function of the unit’s paper feeding, from
pick-up to delivery, as well as the relationship between the electrical system and the
mechanical system is summarized. An overview of each part’s operation timing is also
included.
This chapter contains illustrations of the main unit with an automatic document feed-
er installed.
Refer to the ADF service manual, which is included in this manual, for details regard-
ing the construction of the automatic document feeder.
I. OVERVIEW..............................................7-1 V. PAPER FEEDING OPERATION............7-12

A. Construction Overveiw .......................7-1 A. Paper leading edge detection ..........7-12
II. PICK-UP FEEDING OPERATION ...........7-2 B. Paper width detection ......................7-12
A. Overveiw ............................................7-2 VI. JAM DETECTION ..................................7-13
III. CASSETTE PICK-UP MECHANISM........7-3 A. Overview ..........................................7-13
A. Pick-up oparation ...............................7-3 B. Types of Jam ...................................7-14
B. Retry pick-up ......................................7-5 C. Jam sequence..................................7-14
C. Paper size detection ..........................7-6 VII. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ................7-23
IV. MULTI-FEEDER PICK-UP .......................7-7 A. Cassette feeding assembly ..............7-24
A. Overview ............................................7-7 B. Multi-feeder assembly ......................7-30
B. Multi-feeder pick-up mechanism ........7-8 C. Registration roller assembly.............7-33
C. Multi-feeder retry pick-up ...................7-9 D. Feeder assembly .............................7-35
D. Multi-feeder paper size setting .........7-10

CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
I. OVERVIEW
A. Construction Overview
The construction of the unit’s pick-up feeding system is illustrated in the diagram
below.
The pick-up feeding system rollers in the main unit are all driven by the main motor
(M601) via the gear and clutch.
■ Jam detection sensors

Symbol Sensor name Function
PS301 Paper leading edge Detects the paper’s leading edge and controls the laser ON
sensor timing.
PS302 Registration sensor Detects the timing to form a loop in the paper leading edge,
at the registration roller.
PS303 Paper sensor Detects the feeding condition of paper picked-up from the
cassette while it is in the vertical path assembly.
PS306 Delivery sensor Detects the feeding condition of the delivery assembly’s paper.
Table 7-101
■ Paper sensor and size sensors

Symbol Sensor name Function
PS305 Cassette paper Detects whether there is paper present in the cassette.
sensor
PS501 Multi-feeder paper Detects whether there is paper present in the multi-feeder.
presence sensor
PS304 Paper width sensor Detects the paper width. If paper is fed which is different in
width from the paper size set by the cassette paper size
lever, the feeding operation will stop.
Table 7-102
PS304
PS306 PS301 PS302 PS501

PS305
PS303
Figure 7-101
II. PICK-UP FEEDING OPERATION
A. Overview
The unit’s pick-up feeding system is controlled by the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC301). The pick-up feeding system’s rollers are all driven by the main motor (M601) via
the gear and clutch.
The paper picked-up from the paper cassette and multi-feeder is fed to the registra-
tion roller unit by the vertical path roller, which is driven by the vertical path clutch
(CL301). The vertical path clutch (CL301) is controlled by the DC controller PCB’s verti-
cal path clutch drive signal (CL301D). At this time the registration roller is not revolving,
therefore the paper stops moving and a loop formed at the leading edge, and any cor-
rection necessary is made to ensure the paper is not fed at a skew angle. At the desig-
nated time, the DC controller PCB (IC301) turns the registration clutch ON, and by the
main motor’s revolutions being transmitted to the registration roller, paper is fed and
passed through the transfer, separation and fixing/delivery assemblies to the delivery
tray.
J307-6
CL302
[1] CL302D*
DC controller PCB
[1] CL302D*: Registration clutch drive signal

[2] CL301D*: Vertical path roller clutch drive signal
J307-3
[3] MMD*: Main motor drive signal CL301
[2] CL301D*
Main motor
[3] MMD*
M601
Figure 7-201

III. CASSETTE PICK-UP MECHANISM
A. Pick-up operation
The pick-up roller rotation is controlled by both the pick-up roller drive gear which
transmits the main motor’s (M601) drive to the pick-up drive axis gear, and the pick-up
solenoid (SL301).
The construction of the cassette pick-up assembly is illustrated in Figure 7-302.
When the main motor rotates, the connected drive relay gear also begins to rotate.
At this time, the cogless part of the feeding roller drive gear is in the drive relay gear
position, and the 2 gears are not engaged, therefore power is not transmitted to the
pick-up drive axis gear.
The pick-up solenoid ON signal (SL301D*) is output from the DC controller PCB,
and when the solenoid comes ON, the paper roller drive gear is released, and by the
push of the control arm the paper roller drive gear rotates a small amount.
When the feeding roller drive gear connected to this rotates, power is transmitted to
the pick-up drive axis gear, and the pick-up roller rotation begins.
When the pick-up roller has rotated once, the drive relay gear position and the cog-
less part of the feeder roller drive gear match, therefore the main motor’s drive is no
longer transmitted and the pick-up roller rotation stops.
The paper which has been picked-up is separated by the cassette’s separation tab
and separation roller, and then sent to the pick-up vertical path assembly. The pick-
up/feeding rollers are rotated by the main motor (M601) rotation which is transmitted via
the vertical path clutch (CL301), and paper is sent out to the registration roller assembly.
Registration sensor
Registration roller Vertical path roller clutch
Registration clutch
Vertical path roller
Feeder roller
Pick-up sensor
Pick-up roller Separation roller
Figure 7-301
The above diagram shows a

unit equipped with an ADF.
The construction of the main
unit is also the same for units
Feed roller drive gear not equipped with the ADF.
Pick-up roller drive gear
Drive relay gear
Pick-up solenoid Rotation Rotation Rotation
Gears are engaged
Solenoid ON
Rotation
Pick-up drive axis gear
The pick-up roller drive gear is at a standstill The pick-up roller drive gear rotates due to
due to the pick-up solenoid being OFF. the pick-up solenoid being ON. Therefore
(Pick-up/feed rollers are not rotating) the pick-up drive gear rotates.
(Pick-up/feed rollers are rotating)
Figure 7-302

B. Retry pick-up
When paper is not picked-up even when the pick-up roller is rotating, the retry pick-
up operation occurs.
The DC controller PCB’s CPU counts the time from when the paper solenoid
(SL301) comes ON. If the pick-up sensor (PS303) cannot detect the paper’s leading
edge within a designated period of time, the pick-up solenoid comes ON again and the
pick-up operation is retried. Even when the retry pick-up is actuated once, if the pick-up
sensor does not detect the paper’s leading edge within the specified period of time, it
judges there is a jam, and a jam message is displayed on the control panel’s display.
Start signal 2nd sheet pick-up Retry pick-up
Pick-up solenoid
(SL301)
Pick-up sensor 3.0 sec. 3.0 sec. 3.0 sec.
Normal Abnormal
(PS303)
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-303
C. Paper size detection

The size of the paper inside the cassette is monitored by the DC controller PCB’s
CPU. The CPU detects the change in position of the cassette paper size lever which is
set by the customer.
When the cassette is inserted into the main unit, the paper size lever presses the
main unit’s paper size switch and therefore the presence of paper in the cassette and
also the paper size is monitored.
The construction of the paper size switch is illustrated in the diagram below. The
paper size lever is comprised of 4 push switches which detect the paper size.
Paper size switch
sw401 sw404
sw402 sw403
Figure 7-304
A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 11 × 17 LGL LTR LTRR

SW401 ¡ ¡ ™ ™ ¡ ¡ ™ ™ ™ ¡ ¡
SW402 ¡ ™ ¡ ¡ ™ ¡ ™ ¡ ¡ ™ ™
SW403 ™ ¡ ™ ¡ ™ ¡ ¡ ™ ¡ ™ ¡
SW404 ™ ™ ™ ™ ™ ™ ™ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
¡: Push switch pressed

™: Push switch not pressed
Table 7-301

IV. MULTI-FEEDER PICK-UP
A. Overview
The multi-feeder is the mechanism which continuously picks-up paper stored in the
multi-feeder tray. The paper is picked-up from the top.
The paper in the tray is lifted up by the lifter plate and pressed down by the multi
feeder pick-up roller. The multi-feeder pick-up roller is driven by the main motor (M601),
via the solenoid and gear. The paper is fed one sheet at a time through the use of the
multi-feeder pick-up roller and separation pad to the registration roller. This series of
operations takes place for every pick-up.
The multi-feeder paper size is designated by the user in the control panel.
Main motor drive signal (MMD*)

M601 Main motor
Paper
J307-1 Multi-feeder pick-up solenoid Multi-feeder
drive signal (SL302D*) pick-up solenoid
DC controller PCB
SL302
J309-6 Multi-feeder paper signal (PS501S) Multi-feeder paper

sensor (PS501)
Multi-feeder pick-up roller
Registration roller
J303-5 Registration sensor

paper signal (PS302S) Lifter plate
Pre-Registration sensor
(PS302)
Separation pad
Figure 7-401
B. Multi-feeder pick-up mechanism
1. Lifter plate operation
The mechanism for raising the lifting plate is illustrated in the diagram below.
During standby, the lifter plate is supported and lowered by the cams fitted onto the
front and rear of the multi-feeder pick-up roller.
When the paper roller rotates, the cams are also made to rotate, causing the lifter
plate to rise, and the paper set in the multi-feeder comes into contact with multi-feeder
pick-up roller.
A separation pad and sub pad are fitted onto the pick-up roller’s facing surface, and
through the separation process, only one sheet of paper is fed at a time to the main unit.
Cam
Lifter plate Lifter plate
in the lowered position in the raised position
Multi-feeder pick-up
roller drive axis
Separation
sub pad
Multi-feeder
pick-up roller
Separation pad
Separation
sub pad
Cam
Lifter plate push-up spring
Lifter plate
Figure 7-402

2. Multi-feeder pick-up drive mechanism
The multi-feeder pick-up roller is driven by the main motor, via the multi-feeder pick-
up drive assembly gear. The pick-up timing is controlled by multi-feeder pick-up solenoid
drive signal (SL302D), which is sent from the DC controller PCB.
The construction of the multi-feeder pick-up drive assembly is illustrated in Figure 7-
403.
When the main motor rotates, the pick-up drive relay gear rotates simultaneously.
When the multi-feeder pick-up solenoid drive signal (SL302D*) is output from the DC
controller PCB, and the solenoid comes ON, the cogless gear is rotated slightly by the
spring tension. This causes the rotation to be transmitted to multi-feeder pick-up drive
gear, and the pick-up roller rotates.
When the pick-up roller has rotated once, the cogless gear’s cogless part, and the
pick-up drive relay gear position match, therefore drive is no longer transmitted to the
Multi-feeder drive axis gear and the pick-up roller rotation stops.
C. Multi-feeder retry pick-up

When paper is not picked-up even when the multi-feeder pick-up roller is rotating,
retry pick-up operation occurs.
The DC controller PCB’s CPU counts the time from when the multi-feeder pick-up
solenoid (SL301) comes ON. If the registration sensor (PS302) cannot detect the
paper’s leading edge within a designated period of time, the pick-up solenoid comes ON
again and the pick-up operation is retried. Even when the retry pick-up is actuated
again, if the pick-up sensor does not detect the paper’s leading edge within the specified
period of time, the retry operation is tried for a second time. If, during this second pick-
up retry paper does not arrive at the registration sensor, it judges there is a jam, and a
jam message is displayed on the control panel’s display.
D. Multi-feeder paper size setting

The multi-feeder paper size setting differs, depending on how the multi-feeder is
used.
a) When using the multi-feeder with a fixed paper size.
b) When resetting the size when replenishing the multi-feeders paper.
For a), designate the paper size by:
Registration/Setting key > 01 Data registration > 05 Printer settings > 06 Name stack
size “ON”.
If 06 Name stack size “OFF” is selected, the size needs to be set as for the above b).
In this case, set the paper size when setting paper in the multi-feeder.
In both cases a) and b), if the paper size setting and the size of the paper in the
multi-feeder are not the same, the “PAPER SIZE SETTING IS WRONG” message will
be displayed on the control panel.
In addition, the above methods a) and b) are the only 2 methods available when
printing fax reception data on multi-feeder pick-up paper.

Multi-feeder pick-up roller
Pick-up drive
transmission Cogless gear
gear [1] The pick-up solenoid comes into operation,
Spring the cogless gear lock is released.
[2] When the lock is released, the cogless gear

[3] rotates a little due to the spring’s power.
[2]
[3] Drive from the motor is transmitted to the
[1] cogless gear causing it to begin rotation.
Multi-feeder
pick-up solenoid
[4]
Cam
[5] Control arm
[4] Due to the cogless gear cam pushing up the
control arm, the pick-up roller drive gear lock
is released.
[5] The pick-up roller drive gear rotates a small

Pick-up amount, and the drive is transmitted from the
drive transmission motor causing rotation to begin.
gear
Pick-up drive
axis gear
Figure 7-403
V. PAPER FEEDING OPERATION
A. Paper leading edge detection

The paper sent from the pick-up assembly is sent to the transfer area by the registra-
tion clutch (CL302) rotation.
A sensor is installed in front of the transfer area which detects the leading edge of
the paper sent from the registration roller. The DC controller PCB sends a vertical syn-
chronizing signal (TOP*) to the image processor PCB when the paper leading edge sen-
sor (PS301) detects the paper’s leading edge.
A designated period of time after the image processor PCB receives the TOP* sig-
nal, it sends out a video signal (VDO*, VDO) which causes the image on the photosen-
sitive drum and the paper’s leading edge to coincide.
After this, the paper passes through the transfer, separation and fixing areas, and is
then delivered onto the eject tray.
B. Paper width detection

The unit’s cassette size detection is judged by the position of the cassette paper size
lever which the user has set in the unit.
In the event of the paper size (width) in the cassette and the setting of the paper size
lever differing from each other, the paper size sensor (PS304) detects this and a paper
width detection signal (PS304S) will be sent to the DC controller PCB which will stop the
feeding operation.
Due to this, even if smaller paper (widthwise) than set by the cassette size lever is
fed through, the toner developed on the photosensitive drum will not adhere to the edge
of the transfer charging roller, therefore internal machine soiling caused by the toner is
prevented.

[3] TOP*
Image processor PCB
[1] PS304S
DC controller PCB
[2] PS301S [4] VDO

Transfer charging roller
[4] VDO*
Registration roller
[1] PS304S: Paper width detection signal [3] TOP*: Horizontal synchronized signal
[2] PS301S: Paper leading edge detection signal [4] VDO/VDO*: Video signal
Figure 7-501

VI. JAM DETECTION
A. Overview
The unit is equipped with 4 jam sensors to detect the condition of the paper feeding.
In addition, the unit is equipped with one sensor to detect paper presence in the
multi-feeder and one sensor to detect paper presence in the cassette.
In order to check the presence of paper and jams, the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC301) checks at pre-programmed check timing intervals whether there is paper in the
sensor areas. When it is judged that a jam has occurred, the main motor is turned OFF,
and a jam message is displayed on the control panel.
Reference:
When a jam occurs during memory copying, the images saved in the memory are
completely erased, therefore it is necessary to copy the document again.
PS501
PS306
PS301 PS304 PS302
PS305
PS303
Figure 7-601
Symbol Name Signal name Jack number

PS301 Paper leading edge sensor PS301S J306-2
PS302 Registration sensor PS302S J303-2
PS303 Pick-up sensor PS303S J303-5
PS304 Paper width sensor PS304S J306-5
PS305 Cassette paper sensor PS305S J306-8
PS306 Delivery sensor PS306S J308-5
PS501 Multi-feeder paper presence sensor PS501S J309-6
*1 Jack number on the DC controller PCB.
Table 7-601
B. Types of Jam
The DC controller PCB microprocessor (IC301) determines there is a jam in the fol-
lowing situations
a. Delay jam
The copy paper has not arrived in the sensor area within a stipulated period of time
(not detected by the sensor).
b. Stationary jam
The paper has not left the sensor within a stipulated period of time after the sensor
has detected the copy paper (the sensor has not turned OFF).
c. Residual paper jam

When power is turned on paper is left behind in the sensor area (the sensor detects
copy paper).
C. Jam sequence
1. Pick-up delay jam
■ Detection by the pick-up sensor (PS303)

At the time of cassette pick-up, when paper has not arrived at the pick-up sensor
(PS303) within approx. 3 seconds after the pick-up solenoid (SL301) has been turned
ON, the retry operation will take place. If, during the retry pick-up operation the pick-up
sensor does not come ON within approx. 3 seconds after the pick-up solenoid comes
ON, it is judged there is a delay jam.
2nd sheet pick-up
Start signal Retry pick-up
Pick-up solenoid
(SL301)
Pick up sensor
jam check
Pick-up sensor 3.0 sec. 3.0 sec. 3.0 sec.
Normal Abnormal
(PS303)
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-602

■ Detection by the registration sensor (PS302)

The conditions for detection by the registration sensor differ from the time of the first
sheet pick-up operation and the second and subsequent sheet pick-up in consecutive
paper feed.
a. Delay jam at the time of the first sheet pick-up

When paper has not arrived at the registration sensor (PS302) within approx. 2.3
seconds after the pick-up sensor (PS303) has turned ON, it is judged that a delay jam
has occurred.
Start signal Start signal
Pick-up sensor Pick-up sensor

(PS303) (PS303)
Registration sensor Registration sensor

jam check jam check
Registration sensor 2.3 sec.
Normal Registration sensor 2.3 sec.
Abnormal
(PS302) (PS302)
Main motor Main motor

(M601) (M601)
Figure 7-603
b. Delay jam at the time of the second or subsequent sheet pick-up.

In this case there are 2 types of timing which monitor the feeding situation. Detection
and jam judgement is done by both these timings.
• A jam is determined at the same timing as the previously explained delay jam at
the time of the first sheet pick-up.
• Counting starts when the preceding sheet of paper has passed through the regis-
tration sensor (PS302), and if the leading edge of the next sheet of paper has not
arrived at the registration sensor (PS302) within approx. 2.0 seconds, it is judged
that a delay jam has occurred.
Start signal
Pick-up sensor
(PS303)
Registration sensor
jam check
Registration sensor 2.3 sec.
Normal 2.3 sec.
Abnormal
(PS302)
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-604
Start signal
Pick-up sensor
(PS303)
Registration sensor
jam check
Registration sensor 2.0 sec. 2.0 sec.
Abnormal
(PS302)
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-605

2. Pick-up delay jam (in the case of multi-feeder pick-up)
The pick-up from the multi-feeder is monitored by the registration sensor (PS302)
The timer count begins after the multi-feeder pick-up solenoid (SL302) has come
ON, or, in the case he second sheet during multiple sheet continuous pick-up, after the
paper sheet previously picked up has passed through the registration sensor. If paper
has not arrived at the registration sensor approx.1.5 seconds from the count beginning,
a retry pick-up takes place.
After the retry pick-up solenoid has turned ON, the timer count begins again, if paper
has not arrived at the registration sensor within approx.1.5 seconds, the retry pick-up
takes place once again. If paper has not arrived at the registration sensor within
approx.1.5 seconds after the second retry pick-up timer count begins, it is judged that a
delay jam has occurred.
Start Retry Retry
Start signal signal pickup pickup
Multi-feeder pick-up Multi-feeder pick-up

solenoid (SL302) solenoid (SL302)

jam check jam check
1.5 sec. 1.5 sec. 1.5 sec.1.5 sec.
Registration sensor Normal Registration sensor Abnormal
(PS302) (PS302)
Main motor Main motor
(M601) (M601)
Jam detection sequence for 1 sheet pick-up
Figure 7-606
Retry
pick-up
Start signal
Second Third Retry
First sheet sheet sheet pick-up
solenoid (SL302)
Registration sensor
jam check
Registration sensor 1.5 sec. 1.5 sec.1.5 sec. 1.5 sec.
(PS302)
Main motor Abnormal
(M601)
Jam detection sequence for multiple sheet pick-up
Figure 7-607
3. Registration sensor stationary jam (for cassette pick-up)
A registration sensor (PS302) stationary jam is only detected when continuous multi-
ple sheet pick-up takes place.
At the time of the following sheet pick-up, the jam detection starts within approx. 3.0
seconds after the pick-up sensor (PS303) has turned ON (the following sheet leading
edge is in a position of approx. 10mm in front of the vertical path roller).
If approx. 2.5 seconds has passed, but the trailing edge of the preceding sheet has
not left the registration sensor (PS302), the registration sensor judges a delay jam has
occurred.
Start
signal
First sheet Second sheet Third sheet
Pick-up solenoid
(SL301)
Pick-up sensor 0.3 sec. 0.3 sec.

(PS303)
jam check
Registration sensor Normal Abnormal
(PS302)
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-608

4. Registration sensor stationary jam (for multi-feeder pick-up)
In the case of multi-feeder pick-up, if, after the multi-feeder pick-up solenoid (SL302)
has come ON from the second or subsequent sheet pick-up, the preceding paper has
not left the registration sensor (PS302) after approx. 1.0, it is judged that a registration
sensor stationary jam has occurred.
Start
signal
First sheet Second sheet Third sheet
solenoid (SL302)
1.0 sec. 1.0 sec.
Registration sensor
jam check
Registration sensor Normal Abnormal
(PS302)
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-609
5. Paper leading edge sensor delay jam (for cassette pick-up)
If paper has not arrived at the leading edge sensor (PS301) approx. 1.2 seconds
after the registration clutch (CL302) has come ON, it is judged a paper leading edge
sensor jam has occurred.
Start signal
Registration clutch
(CL302)
jam check
Paper leading edge Normal Abnormal
sensor (PS302)
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-610
6. Paper leading edge sensor delay jam (for multi-feeder pick-up)
In the case of multi-feeder pick-up, if paper has not arrived at the leading edge sen-
sor (PS301) after approx. 1.2 seconds after the registration clutch (CL302) has come
ON, a retry pick-up takes place. If paper has not arrived at the paper leading edge sen-
sor approx. 1.2 seconds after the registration clutch operation for the retry pick-up has
come ON again, yet another retry takes place. If paper still does not arrive at the sensor
after the stipulated amount of time has passed, it is judged a paper leading edge sensor
Start signal
Registration clutch Retry pick-up

(CL302) Retry pick-up
1.2 sec.
Paper leading edge 1.2 sec. 1.2 sec. 1.2 sec.
sensor jam check
Paper leading edge Normal Abnormal
sensor (PS301)
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-611
7. Paper leading edge sensor stationary jam
If 6.7 seconds passes after paper has arrived at the leading edge sensor (PS301)
but has not passed through it, it is judged a paper leading edge sensor stationary jam
has occurred.
Start signal
Paper leading edge

sensor (PS301)
Paper leading edge 6.7 sec. 6.7 sec.
Normal Abnormal
sensor jam check
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-612

8. Delivery sensor delay jam
If the delivery sensor (PS306) does not come ON after 5 seconds has passed since
the paper leading edge sensor (PS301) has come ON, it is judged a delivery sensor
Start signal
Paper leading edge

sensor (PS301)
Delivery sensor 5.0 sec. 5.0 sec.
jam check
Delivery sensor Normal Abnormal
(PS***)
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-613
9. Delivery sensor stationary jam
If paper has not passed through the delivery sensor (PS306) approx. 5 seconds after
the paper leading edge sensor (PS301) has come ON, it is judged there is a delivery
sensor stationary jam.
Start signal
Paper leading edge

sensor (PS301)
Delivery sensor 5.0 sec. 5.0 sec.

(PS306)
Delivery sensor Normal Abnormal
jam check
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-614
10. Fixer wraparound jam
It is judged there is a fixer wraparound jam if paper has wrapped around the fixer,
causing the delivery sensor to turn OFF within 1.4 seconds after the delivery sensor
(PS306) has detected the paper leading edge.
Start signal
Delivery sensor
(PS306)
Delivery sensor 1.4 sec. Normal 1.4 sec. Abnormal
jam check
Main motor
(M601)
Figure 7-615
11. Door open jam.
If, during pick-up/feeding the front cover is opened, a door open jam will be detected
and the feeding process immediately stopped.
Furthermore, if the pick-up vertical path assembly cover is opened during pick-
up/feeding, a jam message will be displayed on the control panel, indicating there is a
pick-up feeding malfunction.
12. Forced delivery operation
When the jams listed below occur during multiple copy printing, the sheet prior to the
one which caused the jam (preceding sheet) will be left inside the machine. Therefore
the main motor is forced to rotate causing the sheet to be delivered out of the machine.
Note: Even if residual paper is detected at the time of the power supply being turned
on to the unit, automatic delivery does not take place.
< Types of forced delivery jams >

• Pick-up sensor delay jam
• Pick-up delay jam *
• Paper leading edge sensor delay jam*
* Jams at the time of cassette pick-up and multi-feeder pick-up.

VII. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY

6. Do not throw the drum cartridge into fire there is a danger of explosion.
7. In order to discharge any static electricity, touch the main units metal assembly
A. Cassette feeding assembly
1. To remove the pick-up roller
The pick-up roller’s attachment and

removal is easier when the printer unit is
removed from the main unit.
1) Rotate the pick-up roller’s axis [1], [2]

unclip the roller collar tabs and
remove the pick-up roller [2].
roller collar tab

roller collar
[1] tab
Figure 7-701
Reference:
The pick-up roller’s installation posi-
tion is indicated in Figure 7-702 Installation location
Figure 7-702

2. To remove the Feeding / Separation

rollers
It is possible to attach and remove

the feeding / separation rollers even if the
printer unit is not removed from the main
unit.
1) Pull out and remove the main unit’s

cassette.
2) Slightly widen the lower right cover’s

front/rear suppor t assembly and
remove the lower right cover.
Caution:
Do not overly widen the suppor t
assembly.
[1]
Figure 7-703
3) Unclip the roller collar tabs [2] and [2] [3]

remove the feed roller [3] and separa-
tion roller [4]. The feed roller is
removed from the cassette insertion
opening and the separation roller is
removed from the lower right side.
[2] [4]
Figure 7-704
3. To remove the pick-up unit
1) Remove the print unit from the main

unit (refer to 9-19).
2) Remove the main drive unit (refer to

9-22).
3) Remove the installation screw [1] and

tension spring [2], then remove the [1]
front print unit pressure lever [3].
[3]
[2]
Figure 7-705
4) Remove the E-ring [4], then remove [6] [4] [7] [8] [6]
the drive relay gear [5].

and the multi-feeder pick-up solenoid
[7] connector. Then remove the multi-
feeder drive unit [8].
[6] [5] [6]

Figure 7-706

6) Remove the E-ring [9], then remove [11] [9]

the vertical path clutch [10] and the
registration roller clutch [11] (is it not
necessary to remove the clutch con-
nectors).
[10] [9]
Figure 7-707
7) Remove the connector [12] and relay [13]
connector [13] from the DC controller [12]
PCB (printer unit rear side). Remove
the disconnected cable from the cord
guide.
Figure 7-708
8) Remove the installation screw [14] [14]
and remove the earth plate spring
[15]
[15].
9) Remove the installation screw [16],

and then remove the printer unit sup-
port roller [17].
10) Remove the tension spring from the

rear side printer unit pressure lever
[18], then slightly slide the pressure
lever together with the axis. [17]
[18]
[16]
Figure 7-709
11) Remove the 5 installation screws

[19], and remove the pick-up unit.
[19]
Figure 7-710
4. To remove the pick-up solenoid
1) Remove the 3 installation screws [1], [1]

and then remove the pick-up drive
unit cover [2].
If the pressure lever roller [3] is
secured by tape, etc., before remov-
ing the drive unit cover, re-installation
of the drive unit cover will be made
easier.
2) Remove the installation screw and

then remove the pick-up solenoid.
[3] [2]
Figure 7-711

Construction of the pick-up assembly

pick-up roller axis
Registration sensor lever
Spring
Gear
Cogless gear
Pick-up solenoid
Pick-up drive unit cover

Figure 7-712
Construction of the pick-up roller drive gear (Front View)

When installing the gear, refer to the diagram below and confirm the gear’s positioning.
Pick-up roller drive relay gear (cogless gear)
Pick-up drive gear (cogless gear)
(Grey area)
Figure 7-713
B. Multi-feeder assembly
1. To remove the multi-feeder pick-

up roller
1) Remove the printer unit from the

main unit ( refer to 9-19).
2) While pressing the tab, remove the [3] [1]

release lever [1]. Then remove the 3
installation screws [2] and remove
the drive unit cover [3].
[2]
Figure 7-714
3) Remove the 3 installation screws [4], [4] [5]

then remove the right cover [5].
Caution:
Take care not to damage the multi-
feeder paper sensor lever.
Figure 7-715

4) Unclip the rear side tab [6], slide the

[7]
roller collar [7] and remove the multi-
feeder pick-up roller [8].
[8]
[6]
Figure 7-716
2. To remove the separation pad

main unit (Refer to 9-19).
2) Follow steps 3) to 5) of ‘3. To remove

the pick-up unit’, and remove the
multi-feeder drive unit.

then remove the right cover.
4) Remove the 2 installation screws [1] [3] [1] [2] [1]

and the connector [2], then remove
the sensor PCB [3].
Figure 7-717
5) Widen the tabs [4] and remove the

[5]
multi-feeder pick-up axis drive gear
[5].
[4]
Figure 7-718
6) Unclip the tab [7] on the multi-feeder
pick-up axis rear lifting plate pressure [7] [6]
cam [6] and slide the cam to the
inside.
Figure 7-719
7) Slide the multi-feeder pick-up axis to
[8]
the rear side and remove from the
bearing.
8) Open the lifting plate, rotate the sep-

aration pad [8] and remove.
Figure 7-720

C. Registration roller assem-

bly
main unit (refer to 9-19).
2) Remove the pick-up unit from the

printer unit (refer to 7-26).
3) Open the registration roller guide

plate [1], remove the 2 installation
screws, then remove the transfer
guide [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
Figure 7-721
4) Remove the 4 installation screws [4],

then remove the registration roller [4]
unit.
[4]
Figure 7-722
Construction of the registration roller assembly
Lower registration guide plate
Upper registration
guide plate
Registration pressure roller
Registration roller
Figure 7-723

D. Feeder assembly
1. To remove the feeder assembly

main unit (refer to 9-19)
2) Remove the DC controller PCB (refer

to 9-25)
3) Follow steps 3) to 5) of ‘To remove

the main motor’ and remove the main
drive assembly.
4) Remove the transfer charging roller.
5) Remove the fixing assembly (refer to

8-7).
6) Remove the 2 installation screws [1] [1]

and then remove the feeder assem-
bly.
Figure 7-724
Caution:
Install the feeder unit before installing
the DC controller PCB. If the feeder
unit is installed after the DC controller
PCB, there is the possibility that the
high-voltage contact pins will become
deformed.
CHAPTER 8
FIXING SYSTEM
In this chapter, the basic operation, purpose and function of the fixing system, as
well as the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system is
I. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW ...................8-1 B. Fixing heater safety mechanism ........8-5

A. Overview ............................................8-1 C. Fixing assembly malfunction
B. Fixing pressure roller cleaning ...........8-1 detector ..............................................8-5
II. FIXING CONTROL...................................8-3 III. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..................8-6
A. Fixing temperature control .................8-3 A. Removing the fixing assembly ...........8-7

I. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
A. Overview
The main motor drives both the fixing assembly’s pressure roller and the delivery
roller. The paper, which has separated from the photosensitive drum, is then fed into the
fixing assembly by means of the feeder belt. After the toner has been fixed to the paper
by the fixing film and the pressure roller, it is fed out of the machine.
The paper, which is fed out of the fixing assembly is detected by the delivery sensor
(PS306).
B. Fixing pressure roller cleaning

Occasionally, problems such as smudges or blotches appear on the reverse side of
the paper due to toner which has adhered to the fixing pressure roller. In order to elimi-
nate these types of problems, this unit is equipped with a cleaning roller mechanism,
which cleans the fixing pressure roller.
Figure 8-101 illustrates this mechanism’s construction. The cleaning roller comes
into contact with the fixing pressure roller. Rotation of the fixing pressure roller causes
the cleaning roller to also rotate, and any clumps of toner which may have adhered to
the surface of the pressure roller are thereby removed.
The fixing pressure rolling cleaning only takes place when the fixing pressure roller
is rotating, and the cleaning mechanism only works during printing when the pressure
roller is rotating.
Also, when the unit’s print counter reaches 500 sheets, the rotation time is elongat-
ed. After every five hundredth copy, the length of time the pressure roller rotates is
extended. Consequently, a more thorough cleaning of the fixing pressure roller is
achieved, increasing the overall effectiveness of the cleaning process.
Fixing film
Delivery roller
Fixing heater
Fixing assembly inlet guide

Cleaning roller
Pressure roller
Figure 8-101
DC controller PCB
Heater drive (FSRDRV)

Motor drive signal (MMD)
Delivery signal (PS306S)
Main
motor
DC Power supply
PCB
M601
Delivery
sensor
(PS306)
Fixing heater
Delivery roller
Pressure roller
Cleaning roller
Figure 8-102

II. FIXING CONTROL
A. Fixing temperature control
1. Overview
This unit’s fixing heater uses two surface heaters, which are installed into one
ceramic base. The heater heats up the fixing film.
The two surface heaters are equipped with ON/OFF switches, which keep the power
consumption low.
The temperature of the fixing heater is monitored by a thermistor (TH1), which is
located on top of the fixing heater. The DC controller PCB CPU (IC301), based on the
fixing heater surface temperature signals, turns ON or OFF the fixing heater drive 1 sig-
nal (FSRDRV1) and the fixing heater drive 2 signal (FSRDRV2). This controls the fixing
heater’s surface temperature so it reaches the stipulated temperature.
During printing, the heater surface temperature setting is based on the following five
conditions:
• When the fixing assembly is warming up, the temperature detects the initial tem-
perature.
• Printing interval (first copy, intermittent copying, multiple copying)
• Paper size
• Resolution (600dpi, 1200dpi)
• Paper type, as selected in the user mode
Paper type selection Resolution Target temperature (˚C)

in user mode*1 (dpi) Print temperature Page interval
control temperature control
600 190 to 175 175 to 145
Bond paper
1200 170 to 155 155 to 125
Plain paper 600 175 to 160 160 to 130
Special paper 1200 150 to 140 140 to 110
600 160 to 145 145 to 115
Tracing paper
1200 137 to 127 130 to 100
*1: USER MODE > 05 PRINTER SETTING > 10 SELECT PAPER
Table 8-201
Reference:
When the amount of time which has lapsed between the delivery sensor (PS306)
detecting the end of one paper, and the next paper passing the through the paper
leading edge sensor (PS301) is less than one second, the temperature control
changes to the paper interval temperature control.
When compared to printing at 1200dpi equivalent, the feeding speed when printing at
600dpi is doubled, and so the fixing target temperature is high. A sudden rise in tem-
perature of the fixing heater end may occur if small-sized paper is used when printing
at 600dpi. In order to prevent this, the throughput is decreased by control of the fixing
assemblys temperature.
DC power supply PCB DC controller PCB
J201-4 J305-37 FSRDRV1

1
J201- J305-39 FSRDRV2
2
Fuse (F2)
Zero cross J201- J305-40 /ZEROX 19
detector circuit
Fuse (F1) +24VA
+5V Fixing heater safety circuit

Q4 IC301
+5V +5V CPU
Relay
(R1) IC304
RLYD 1 - 2
+5V J201- J305- +
3
+5V
/PRNT
FSRH2
FSRH1
FSRN
RLYDRV 100
J203-2
J102-1 +5V
J102-3
Thermistor J102-5
Fixing film
unit IC304
FSRTH J203-1 7 - 6
+ FSRTM
25
5 +5V
Thermo-
switch
Q301 THCHG 43
Pressure Fixing
roller heater
J201- J305-4
FSRTH
Delivery M601 Main
roller motor
Figure 8-201

B. Fixing heater safety mechanism

This unit is equipped with a fixing heater safety circuit, located inside the DC con-
troller PCB, which monitors the fixing temperature for abnormal rises in temperature.
Should an abnormality occur, the output from the main circuit will switch the relay (RL1),
located on the power supply PCB, to the OFF position, which cuts off the power supply
to the fixing heater.
When, due to rises in the temperature of the fixing heater, the power voltage of the
thermistor reaches 0.8V or higher (230 °C or higher), the output of the number 7 pin of
the comparator (IC304) changes to “L”. When this happens, the number 1 pin of the
IC304 changes to “L”, the Q4 changes to OFF, which causes the relay (RL1) to switch
OFF.
Furthermore, the fixing assembly has been equipped with a thermoswitch (TSW1).
Should the surface temperature of the thermoswitch reach approximately 240 °C, the
thermoswitch switches OFF, and the power supply to the fixing heater is cut off.
C. Fixing assembly malfunction detector

Should the CPU (IC301) of the DC control PCB detect any of the conditions from ‘a’
to ‘h’, described below, it judges the fixing heater is malfunctioning and the error mes-
sage (# # 322) is displayed on the operation panel.
a. When 10 seconds have passed since the initial rotation began, and the thermistor’s
temperature is below 100°C.
b. When 50 seconds have passed since the initial rotation began, and the thermistor’s
temperature is 10°C or more below the target temperature.
c. When the fixing heater is switched on, and the temperature doesn’t rise over 15°C in
less than 0.75 seconds.
d. When the thermistor’s temperature is less than 75°C during the print temperature
control.
e. When the fixing heater’s temperature is 21 degrees or more higher than the target
temperature for 30 continuous seconds.
f. When the fixing heater’s temperature rises to 221°C or over.
g. When there was no detection of the zero cross signal (temperature control reference
signal) after turning on the power of the main unit.
h. When there was no detection of the zero cross signal while the heater was ON for 3
or more continuous seconds.
III. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY


A. Removing the fixing

assembly
1) Remove the two screws, and take off [1]
the lower left cover.
2) Open the front cover, remove the 5

screws [1], and then remove the
delivery assembly cover.
When removing the delivery assem-
bly cover, please place your hands in
the positions shown in the diagram
on the right, and then lift the cover
up.
Place your hands here to lift.

Figure 8-301
Note:
On the top of the delivery assembly
cover, inside the area marked ▲ ,
there is a tab. When the cover is lifted
up, the tab is disconnected from the
catch.
When replacing the cover, be sure to Be sure to insert correctly.
place the cover tab correctly in the “U”
guide.
Figure 8-302
3) Remove the two screws [2], and [3] [2]

remove the grounding cable.
[3]
4) Remove the two screws [3], and
remove the fixing assembly.
Figure 8-303

CHAPTER 9
EXTERNAL / AUXILIARY MECHANISM
In this chapter, the operation, function and purpose of this unit’s auxiliary control sys-
tem as well as the relation between the electrical system and mechanical system is
explained. Furthermore, an overview of each part’s operation timing is explained.
I. CONTROL PANEL...................................9-1 A. Back-up function ................................9-8

A. Overview ............................................9-1 B. Back-up Data ...................................9-12
II. POWER SUPPLY ....................................9-2 V. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ................9-16
A. Low-voltage power supply circuit .......9-2 A. Control panel....................................9-17
B. High voltage power supply circuit ......9-4 B. Main Motor .......................................9-19
C. Energy save function control..............9-5 C. DC controller PCB............................9-25
III. FAN ..........................................................9-7 D. Image processor PCB ......................9-26
A. Rotation control mechanism ..............9-7 E. DC power supply PCB .....................9-27
IV. BACK-UP BATTERY................................9-8

CHAPTER 9 EXTERNAL/AUXILIARY MECHANISM
I. CONTROL PANEL
A. Overview
The structure of the control panel is displayed in the diagram below.
The control panel interface uses a single-line two-way serial interface.
The control panel is made up of two boards, and is controlled by the image proces-
sor PCB (IC15).
The liquid crystal display console is composed of 80 × 320dots.
Image processor Control panel Control panel

PCB PCB 1 PCB 2
Control
panel
CPU
Key SW
Key SW
IC15 Slide SW
LED
VR
LCD
VR
Figure 9-101
II. POWER SUPPLY
A. Low-voltage power supply circuit
1. Low-voltage power supply circuit
The DC power supply of the main unit is generated by the DC power supply PCB.
The DC power supply PCB converts the input AC power supply into DC+24V,
DC+12V, DC-12V, and DC+5V, and supplies each of the internal electrical loads.
An overview of the DC power supply is shown in the table below.
Output voltage name Output voltage value

+5V1 and +5V2 +5.1V ± 3%
+12V +12.0V ± 5%
-12V -12.0V ± 5%
+24V1 and +24V2 +24.0V ± 5%
Table 9-201
Ratings for the fuses installed on the DC power supply PCB
Electrical symbol Rating

F1 15A 125V
F2 15A 125V
F3 5A 125V
F4 5A 125V
Table 9-202

Fixing heater
RL1
Fuse 1 Front cover Main switch
open/close
Fuse 2 5V generation switch
DC controller PCB
5V Cassette feeder
Noise filter DC+5V1
and electrical
24V DC+24V2 load
12V generation Image processor PCB

5V
DC+5V1 Control panel
12V DC+12V Automatic
document feeder
DC-12V
and electrical loads
24V DC+24V1
24V generation CCD PCB

5V
24V DC+5V1
Noise filter DC+12V Electrical loads
12V
Accessory function PCB

Abnormality 24V DC+5V1
detection printed 12V DC+5V2
circuit DC+12V
DC power supply PCB 5V DC+24V1
DC+24V2
Figure 9-201
2. Protection function
There is an overcurrent / overvoltage protective function located on the DC power

supply PCB, which automatically interrupts the output voltage. This is to protect the DC
power supply circuit from damage which may occur from problems such as a short in
the electrical load, which can cause an overcurrent or overvoltage.
When the overcurrent / overvoltage protective function is activated, turn off the
power supply switch, and once the electrical load trouble has been rectified, turn the
power switch on again to restart.
Also, there are two fuses which have been built into the internal circuit. Should an
overcurrent occur in the AC line, the fuses blow, and the flow of electricity is cut off.
B. High voltage power supply circuit

The high voltage power supply circuit is built into the DC controller PCB.
At designated times, the DC controller PCB’s CPU (IC301) emits instructions to gen-
erate the high voltages listed below.
• Primary charge roller applied voltage (AC voltage + DC positive voltage)
• Developing bias (AC voltage + DC negative voltage)
• Transfer charge applied (DC positive voltage as well as DE negative voltage)
• Static charge eliminator bias (DC negative voltage)
Please refer to chapter 6 “Image formation system” for more information regarding
the control of each electrical load.

C. Energy save function control
1. Overview
This unit is equipped with an Energy Save function (referred to hereafter as ESS),
which serves to reduce the energy consumption while the unit is in standby mode.
When the main unit has been in stand-by mode for the specified length of time, it
switches over to the ESS function.
The settings for the activation times of the ESS function and the settings for the
stand-by time can be registered in the user mode.
Stand-by time: from 3 to 30 minutes (factory setting: 3 minutes)
2. Control
The ESS is controlled by the image processor PCB.

The main unit stays in the stand-by mode until the ESS activation time specified in
the user mode has elapsed. Then, the ESS control signal is emitted by the ESS con-
troller assembly, which is located on the image processor PCB.
The DC controller PCB, the control panel and the electrical loads are controlled by
this signal.
■ Power consumption during stand-by mode

Normal stand-by mode: 20W ± 10%
When the ESS is activated: approximately 14W
DC power supply PCB
DC power supply DC power supply
ESS DC power Cassette feeder

Image control signal
DC supply and
processor controller
PCB each electrical
PCB load
DC power
supply DC power
ESS supply
ADF relay
controller ESS Electrical loads
controller signal PCB
assembly
DC power
supply
IC IC Control
ESS
controller signal panel
IC IC
Figure 9-202
3. Operation
When the ESS function is activated, all of the LED lights on the main unit’s control
panel, except the Energy Saver Key, are extinguished.
If any of the conditions listed below exist, then the ESS mode is not activated.
• The Energy Save mode has not been registered in the user mode.
• When the paper-out light, the jam light, the toner-out light, a service error or other
error lights are on.
• When there are image data stored in the image memory.
• When there is a document in the ADF.
To turn off the ESS mode, press the Energy Saver Key. If any of the situations below
occur, the unit will automatically turn off the ESS mode.
• A document is placed in the ADF.
• A fax is received (for those machines fitted with the fax function).
• The phone is taken off the hook (for those machines fitted with the fax function).
• The pre-set report output time has arrived (for those machines fitted with the fax
function).
• The pre-set timer alarm time has arrived (for those machines fitted with the fax
function).

III. FAN
A. Rotation control mechanism

This unit has been equipped with an exhaust fan motor (FM301), located at the rear
of the printer assembly. The fan motor Hall element has a built-in 2 phase 4 pole DC
brushless motor, and is integrated with the motor drive circuit.
The DC controller PCB’s CPU (IC301) controls the rotation of the fan motor.
When the power switch of the main unit is turned ON, the DC controller PCB’s CPU
(IC301) sends out the half-speed rotation signal (HALFFAM*) “0”. This activates the fan
motor at half-speed rotation.
When the main unit starts printing, once the fixing assembly’s temperature has
reached the target temperature (160ÞC), the CPU (IC301) sends out the half-speed
rotation signal (HALFFAM*) “1”. This activates the fan motor drive signal (FAMON),
which in turn raises the electrical voltage to the full speed levels, and full speed rotation
of the fan begins.
The fan continues at full speed rotation until printing is finished. Then, the main
motor (M601) stops and it powers down to half-speed 30 seconds after the printing
operation is completed.
Should there be a problem with the CPU (IC301) for any reason, and the fan motor
does not rotate according to the set timings, the fan motor lock detector signal (FAM-
LOCK) detects this, and outputs an error code (##0325).
DC controller PCB
+24V
Half-speed
rotation signal FM301
(HALFFM*) J308-8
Drive circuit
Fan motor drive signal
CPU (FMON)
(IC301)
Fan motor lock detection signal
(FMLOCK) J308-7
J308-6
Figure 9-301
IV. BACK-UP BATTERY
A. Back-up function
1. Overview
Should there be a power failure, or should the power supply switch be turned off, the
image processor PCB of the main unit has been equipped with a data back-up lithium
battery (BAT2) and a vanadium lithium secondary battery (BAT1), which are part of the
data back-up function. For more information about the types of data which can be
backed up, please refer to page 9-12.
Caution:
The lithium battery and the vanadium lithium secondary battery are made up of lithi-
um and organic solvents, which are extremely combustible materials. Should these
batteries be put in a fire, an explosion or very intense fire may occur. Also, the liquids
inside the batteries may damage the skin. For these reasons, please handle these
batteries with sufficient care.
When the batteries have been completely used up dispose of them in an appropriate
manner (dispose them separately from normal garbage).
Vanadium lithium
secondary battery (BAT1)
Image processor PCB
Lithium battery
(BAT2)
Figure 9-401

2. Vanadium lithium secondary battery (BAT1)
• Types of data this battery backs up: Image data (data of fax transmission and
receiving).
• IC which this battery backs up: DRAM on the image processor PCB (IC7, IC8, IC9,
IC10).
• Amount of back-up time: approximately 3 hours (in an environment subject to nor-
mal temperatures and normal atmospheric pressure, where the power switch of
the main unit has been ON continuously for one day or more).
• Effective life of the battery: approximately 5 years, or until the battery has been
100% discharged 40 times).
The BAT1 of the main unit cannot be replaced as a single unit. For this reason, when
the battery dies, it is necessary to replace the image processor PCB.
The data this battery protects are the image data from transmitting and receiving
faxes. It does not store the image data from the usage of the memory copy function.
Caution:
Should the length of time noted above as “amount of back-up time” be exceeded, the
backed up data will be erased.
In addition, the image data will also be erased should the jumper plug (JP1), located
on the image processor PCB, be removed. In order to avoid this, when servicing the
unit, please print out the data stored in the memory prior to commencing servicing
operations.
■ How to print:
• Printing transmission image data:
Memory Reference > Print document > Select document to print > Print.
• Transfer Printing received image data:
In case the machine malfunctions and cannot print, this machine is equipped with
a function which allows the transfer of received image data to another fax machine
for printing.
Memory Reference > Transmit document > Select document to transfer >
Designate transfer destination > Select sender’s name > Transfer.
Reference:
1. A DRAM check will erase all the image data; therefore, prior to performing a
DRAM check, please be sure to print the image data. To perform a check on the
DRAM, press: SERVICE MODE>TEST MODE>1:DRAM.
2. If a memory clear report automatically prints out when the power switch of the
main unit is turned on, the data on the list are the image data the unit was unable
to save, and which were deleted.
After this list is printed, the system automatically deletes the stored management
information. An example of a memory clear report is displayed below in diagram 9-
401.
Figure 9-401
3. Lithium battery (BAT2)
• Types of data this battery backs up: Control data (User data, activity management
data, service mode settings content, etc.)
• IC which this battery backs up: image processor PCB (IC36, IC37).
• Effective life of the battery: approximately 5 years.
When the lithium battery (BAT2) dies the message “DATA ERROR” is displayed on
the display panel when the power switch is turned on. When this occurs, please change
the lithium battery. In this situation, the information stored in the control memory has
been erased, and so printing out is not possible.
After the lithium battery has been changed, and the power switch on the main unit is
turned on again, the message “Data have been destroyed” is displayed on the display
panel again. Please press the set key on the control panel. The data stored in the con-
trol memory will be reset to the factory settings. The unit will go into stand-by mode.

4. Jumper plugs
The image processor PCB has been equipped with a jumper plug. This acts to pre-
vent the depletion of the back up batteries.
The function of the jumper plug (JP1) is to help prevent the consumption of the bat-
teries. Service parts processor PCB’s come with jumper plug (JP1), set to the OFF posi-
tion, and without jumper plug (JP3). Consequently, when the image processor PCB
needs to be replaced, please set the JP1 to the ON position. When the JP3 is being
replaced, it is necessary to remove it from the board prior to replacement, and mount it
on the new board.
When the above operation is performed, and the power supply of the main unit is
switched back on, the message “PRESS SET KEY” appears on the display. Please
press the set key found on the control panel, which will re-set the SRAM (IC36, IC37) to
the factory settings. The unit will go into stand-by mode. The control data can be re-
entered at this point.
Caution:
The function of the vanadium lithium secondary battery (BAT1) is to back up transmit-
ted and received faxed image data. Accordingly, if the main unit has not been
equipped with a fax function, it is not necessary to change the JP1 to the ON posi-
tion.
Should a fax be added to the main unit as an accessory, the JP1 must be changed to
Jumper plug (JP1)

Vanadium lithium
secondary battery
(BAT1)
Image processor PCB
Jumper plug (JP3)
Lithium battery
(BAT2)
Figure 9-403
B. Back-up Data
1. Data types
The table below lists the types of data that each back-up lithium battery (BAT1,
BAT2) stores. These batteries are located on the image controller PCB.
The lithium battery BAT2 backs up the a), b), and c) types of data stored in the con-
trol memory, while the vanadium lithium secondary battery BAT2 backs up the data d)
stored in the image memory.
a) User data
Item Details
Registration/Setting 1. Data registration (Reception/transmission
mode settings)
2. Telephone number registration (One-touch dial, etc)
Table 9-401
b) Service mode data
Item Details
#1. SSSW Error management, echo countermeasures etc.
#2. MENU NL equalizer, sending level, etc.
#3. NUMERIC Param T1 Timer setting, etc.
#4A. SPECIAL Normally not operated
#4B. NCU Normally not operated
#4C. ISDN Normally not operated
#5. TYPE Normally not operated
#6. SCANNER Normally not operated
#7. PRINTER Reduction / cassette selection settings, etc.
#8. CLEAR Scan count, print counter, etc.
#9. ROM Version number, checksum, etc.
#10. CS SET Revert to initial mirror mount settings.
Table 9-402

c) Management data
These are automatically stored data regarding the main unit’s operating conditions.
Item Details
Activity management record Record of the past 40 transmissions
System dump record Past communication conditions, error communication his-
tory, etc.
Table 9-403
d) Data backed up by BAT1
Item Details
Transmission image Transmission (memory transmission, report transmission)
Delayed communications
Delayed broadcast transmission
Polling transmission
Relay broadcast transmission
Reception image Confidential reception
Memory reception
Table 9-404
2. Printing the back-up information list
It is possible to print out an information list of the data backed up by the batteries in
the control memory.
When changing the image processor PCB or the lithium battery, or while the power
switch is off, when removing the jumper plug (JP3) located on the image processor
PCB, please make sure to print out the following lists prior to removing the jumper plug.
a) User data list
Item List name

Registration mode User data list
Dial registration mode 1-touch dial telephone number list 1
Coded speed-dial telephone number list 1
Group dial telephone number list 1
1-touch dial telephone number list 2
Coded speed-dial telephone number list 2
Table 9-405
b) Service Mode data list
Item List name

Service mode data System data list
Table 9-406
c) Management data
Item List name

Activity management records Activity management report
System dump records System dump list
Table 9-407

■ Back-up battery function table

BAT1 BAT2
Type Vanadium lithium secondary Lithium battery
battery
Back-up IC DRAM (IC7,IC8,IC9,IC10, and SRAM (IC36, IC37)
8MB increased memory DRAM)
Battery life Approximately 5 years, or until Approximately 5 years
the battery has been 100% dis-
charged 40 times
Individual battery Not possible Possible
replacement
Operation JP plug JP1 (in operation when in the JP3
ON position)
Back-up data • Transmission image data • User data (User mode registra-
(Memory transmission, broad- tion)
cast transmission, delayed • Telephone number registration
transmission, delayed report, • Service mode registration
polling transmission, relay • Management data (communi-
broadcast transmission) cations management registra-
• Reception image data tion, system dump registration)
(Confidential reception, memo-
ry reception)
Back-up data informa- • Transmitted image print using • User data list
tion print the Memory Reference func- • One-touch dial telephone num-
tion, and received image trans- ber lists 1 and 2
fer print. • Speed-dial telephone number
lists 1 and 2
• Group dial telephone number
list 1
• System data list
• Activity management report
• System dump list
Table 9-408
V. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY
This section describes mechanical features and operations as well as disassembly

A. Control panel
from the left and the right sides, and
remove the front upper cover [1].
2) Remove the 2 installation screws

from the left and the right sides, and
remove the control panel lower cover
[2].
[2]
Figure 9-501

from the left and right sides (two are
attached to the grounding cable).
[3]
Figure 9-502
[3]
Figure 9-503
4) Move the control panel forward, [4]

remove the 2 connectors [4], and
remove the control panel.
Figure 9-504

B. Main Motor
1. Removing the printer unit
1) Pull out the cassette on the main

unit, and open the front cover.
2) Remove the cartridge.

remove the lower left cartridge.

and remove the delivery cover. Place
your hands as indicated in the dia-
gram, and lift it up a little to remove it.
Handles
Figure 9-505
Caution:
On the upper portion of the delivery
cover, inside the part marked ▲, there
is a tab for connecting. When the
cover is raised, the tab is released
from the catch.
When putting the cover on, while Insert correctly
ensuring that you have placed the tab
correctly in the ‘U’ guide, re-fit the
cover to the unit.
Figure 9-506
5) Remove the 2 installation screws [2] [2]

on the fixing assembly, and remove
the grounding cable [3]. [3]
6) Remove the 5 connectors [4], which

are attached to the DC controller
PCB.
7) Remove the stop ring, and remove

the cord guide [5].
[5]
[4]
Figure 9-507
8) Remove the installation screw [6], [6] [7]

and remove the car tridge drive
release plate [7].
9) While gripping the release lever [8],

slowly pull out the printer unit.
10) Place your hand in the cassette

insertion inlet, and while pushing on
the upper por tion of the release
catch, slowly pull out the printer unit.
Once the unit has come out far
enough, place your hands on the Catch Push
front part and the rear side, and con-
tinue to remove the printer unit while Lower side of the main unit [8]
(Upper portion of the recording
supporting it. paper insertion inlet)
Figure 9-508
Caution:
If the printer unit is pulled out too
quickly, there is a chance that it may
fall out, so please be sure to pull it out
slowly.

2. Cautionary points relating to the

removal and insertion the printer
unit
■ When lifting the printer unit, please

place your hands in the positions indi-
cated in the diagram.
Printer unit
Figure 9-509
■ When removing and inserting the print-

er unit, please be sure not to bend the
main unit’s sheet metal plate which is
indicated in the diagram. This is the
primary cause of problems during
removal and insertion of the cassette.
Be careful not to bend during removal

and attachment of the printer unit
Figure 9-510
■ When setting the printer unit into the Seals

main body, ensure that the ↑ ↓ marks
on the seals located on the front and
rear portions of the main unit rail line
up with the positions of the yellow
rollers located on the front and rear
portions of the left edge of the printer
unit.
Yellow rollers
Figure 9-511

3. Removing the main motor

main unit (see page 9-19 for further
information).
2) While pressing the tab, remove the [3]

release lever [1]. [1]

and remove the drive assembly cover
[3].
[2]
Figure 9-512
4) Remove the connector [4] from the

[4]
main motor driver PCB. [6]

and remove the main drive assembly
[6].
[5]
Figure 9-513

and remove the main motor [8] from
the driver PCB. [8]
[7]
Figure 9-514
Reference:
The structure of the main drive unit is depicted below.
Main motor
Figure 9-515

C. DC controller PCB
main body (see page 9-19 for further
information).
2) Stand the printer unit in the same

way as depicted in Figure 9-516.
Caution:
■ When standing the printer unit on a
desk or other furniture, please be
careful not to scratch the surface of
the furniture.
■ Also, before performing this step,
please spread out newspapers, etc.
to ensure the right side of the print-
er unit’s exter nal cover is not
scratched.
■ Do not perform this operation on an
unstable surface. Stand the printer
unit on a horizontal surface, and
make sure that it cannot topple
over. Make sure to remove the car- Figure 9-516
tridge prior to standing the printer
unit up.
3) Remove all connectors which are

attached to the DC controller PCB.
4) Remove the 4 installation screws [1]. Slide
5) Slide the DC controller PCB together

with the support plate upwards. Then,
[1]
pull it out towards the front.
[1]
Figure 9-517
D. Image processor PCB
1. Removing the ROM DIMM
1) Remove the installation 4 screws,

and remove the main unit’s back
cover.
[2] [1]
2) Spread the upper and lower tabs [2]
of the ROM DIMM [1], and remove
the ROM DIMM.
Caution:
When removing the ROM DIMM, if it is
pressed down too strongly, it may
cause damage to the mount, so per-
form this operation carefully.
[2]
Figure 9-518
2. Removing the image processor

PCB

remove the main unit’s back cover.
[1]
2) Remove the 7 connectors which are
attached to the image processor PCB
and remove the 2 flat cables.

and remove the image processor
PCB [2].
[2]
[1]
Figure 9-519

E. DC power supply PCB

1) Remove the 4 installation screws,
and remove the main unit’s back
cover.
4) Remove the 5 installation connectors

which are attached to the DC power
supply PCB.
[1]
5) Remove the 4 screws [1], and
remove the DC power supply PCB.
[1]
Figure 9-520
CHAPTER 10
CASSETTE FEEDER
In this chapter, the cassette feeder’s basic operation, purpose and function, as well
as the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system is summa-
rized. An overview of each part’s operation timing is also included.
In this manual, the accessory one level cassette feeder unit D1 and the accessory
three level cassette feeder unit E1 are called the cassette feeders.
The units depicted in the diagrams in this chapter have all been fitted with the auto-
matic document feeder. For more information regarding the automatic document feeder,
please refer to the ADF service manual included in this manual.
I. OVERVIEW............................................10-1 A. Operation .........................................10-7

II. OVERVIEW OF THE ELECTRICAL VI. JAM DETECTION ..................................10-8
CIRCUITS ..............................................10-3 A. Overview ..........................................10-8
A. Overview ..........................................10-3 B. Jam Sensing ....................................10-9
III. FEEDER CONTROLLER PCB VII. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ..............10-11
INPUT AND OUTPUT .............................10-4 A. Removing the feeder motor ...........10-12
IV. OPERATION OVERVIEW......................10-5 B. Removing the pick-up/feeder/
A. Overview ..........................................10-5 separation motor ............................10-12
B. Basic Sequence ..............................10-6 C. Removing the pick-up unit .............10-14
V. FEEDER MOTOR CONTROL................10-7

I. OVERVIEW
The cassette feeder structure is displayed in the diagrams below.
The unit may be equipped with a one level cassette feeder or with a three level cas-
sette feeder unit.
The structure of each cassette feeder is the same, and each cassette feeder is
equipped with a pick-up assembly and a feeder controller PCB, which controls the oper-
ation of the pick-up assembly.
Reference:
If the cassette feeder has two levels, or four levels or more, a control malfunction will
occur in the main unit.
Feeder controller
PCB
Cassette
feeder
Paper flow
Cassette feeder one level type
Figure 10-101
Feeder controller
PCB Paper flow
Cassette
feeders
Cassette feeder three level type
Figure 10-102
The units depicted above are fitted with an ADF. Those units not equipped with an
ADF are the same.
Reference:
With the three level cassette feeder, in the lowest cassette feeder there is no inter-
face connector provided between this and a lower feeder. Therefore, the lowerst cas-
sette feeder cannot be used as the first or second cassette feeder.
Interface connector
First cassette feeder
Interface connector
Second cassette feeder
Interface connector
Third cassette feeder
Figure 10-103

II. OVERVIEW OF THE ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
A. Overview
Operation of the load used by the cassette feeder is controlled by commands sent
from the CPU (IC301) on the main unit’s DC controller PCB, based on the programme
stored in the CPU (IC601) on the feeder controller PCB.
DC controller PCB
CPU
(IC301)
[Input side] [Output side]
Cassette feeder (first level)
Feeder controller
PCB (first level)
Photo-interrupter Motor
• Pick-up sensor (PS651) • Feeder motor (M651)
• Paper supply sensor (PS652) CPU
(IC601)
Switch Solenoid
• Cassette size detector • Pick-up solenoid (SL651)
switch
Cassette feeder (2nd level)

Feeder controller
PCB (2nd level)
(IC601)
Switch Solenoid (SL651)

• Cassette size detector • Pick-up solenoid
switch
Cassette feeder (3rd level)

Feeder controller
PCB (3rd level)
(IC601)
Switch Solenoid (SL651)

• Cassette size detector • Pick-up solenoid
switch
Figure 10-201
III. FEEDER CONTROLLER PCB INPUT AND OUTPUT
Feeder controller PCB
+5V
J655-1
-3 PS651S* “0” when the PS651 detects paper.
Pick-up sensor (when the light-blocking plate is not at PS301)
PS651 -2
+5V
J655-4
-6 “1” when the PS652 detects paper.
Paper sensor PS652S
PS652 -5 (when the light-blocking plate is not at PS302)
J654-1
PSIZ3
-2
Cassette size PSIZ2
-3 Refer to page 7-6
detector switch -4 PSIZ1
-5 PSIZ0
+24V
J653-2
Pick-up solenoid SL651
SL651D * When “0”, the SL651 is ON
J652-1
-2
M651 -3 Refer to page 10-7
Feeder motor
-4
Figure 10-301

IV. OPERATION OVERVIEW
A. Overview
Figure 10-401 is the concept figure of the structure of the cassette feeder.
The cassette feeder’s operation is controlled by the feeder controller PCB. The main
unit’s DC controller PCB sends the pick-up control signal to the feeder controller PCB.
When the feeder controller PCB receives the pick-up control signal, the feeder motor
(M651) begins to rotate, and the pick-up solenoid is turned ON. Once the paper has
passed through the separation roller in order for any double feeds to be extracted, the
paper is fed through the feed roller and the vertical path roller on its way to the main
unit.
Further, the mechanical pick-up mechanism and the paper size selector mechanism
of the cassette feeder perform in the same way as those of the main unit.
Main unit DC controller PCB
Serial communication

Pick-up solenoid drive signal (SL651D)
Feeder motor drive signal
Feed roller
Pick-up Separator roller
roller
Pick-up solenoid SL651

Vertical path
roller
M651
Feeder motor
Figure 10-401
The unit depicted above is fitted with an ADF. The construction of the main unit is
also the same for units not equipped with an ADF.
B. Basic Sequence
Condition: When 2 pieces of A4 paper are picked up from the first level cassette
feeder
Start Key ON
Main unit paper leading

edge sensor (PS301)
Main unit main motor
Main unit registration
Main unit registration
Main unit delivery

Pick-up solenoid
sensor (PS302)
sensor (PS306)
Pick-up sensor
clutch (CL302)
Feeder motor
(PS651)
(SL651)
(M651)
(M601)
Figure 10-402

V. FEEDER MOTOR CONTROL
A. Operation
The feeder motor (M651) of this unit uses a stepping motor.
The A phase pulse circuit and the B phase pulse circuit, located on the feeder con-
troller PCB, emit drive pulses (A • A* • B • B*). Changes in the order and frequency of
the pulses control the rotation.
+24V
A J652-4
A phase
pulse Feeder
M651 motor
control
A* -3
Drive
control
circuit B -2
B phase
pulse
control
B* -1
Figure 10-501
VI. JAM DETECTION
A. Overview
The cassette feeder is equipped with a pick-up sensor (PS651), which monitors the
pick-up and feeding function. It is also equipped with a paper supply sensor, which
detects the presence or absence of paper.
According to a pre-programmed timing, the feeder controller PCB’s CPU (IC601)
performs checks to determine whether there is paper or not in the sensor area, as well
as checks for jams. When the sensor judges there is a jam, the main unit’s motor and
the feeder motor are immediately turned OFF, and a jam message is displayed on the
control panel.
Reference:
For more information regarding jam sensor timing after the main unit’s registration
sensor, please refer to the main unit’s service manual.
PS501
PS**
PS301 PS304 PS302
PS305
PS303
PS652
PS651
PS652
PS651
PS652
PS651
PS651: Pick-up sensor PS652: Paper sensor PS302: Registration sensor

Figure 10-601

B. Jam Sensing
1. Pick-up delay Jam
During the cassette feeding sequence, once the pick-up solenoid (SL301) is ON, if
the paper does not arrive at the pick-up sensor (PS303) within 3 seconds, the feeding
operation is retried. Once again, if the pick-up sensor does not come ON in the 3 sec-
onds following the activation of the pick-up solenoid, the unit determines that a delay
jam has occurred.
Second sheet pick-up

Start signal Retry feed
Pick-up solenoid
(SL651)
Pick-up sensor
jam check
Approx. Approx. Approx.
Pick-up sensor 3 seconds
Normal 3 seconds 3 seconds
Abnormal
(PS651)
Feeder motor
(M651)
Figure 10-602
2. Registration sensor delay jam
Following the activation of the pick-up sensors in each of the cassette feeder levels,
if the paper does not arrive at the registration sensor (PS302) within the designated
amount of time, a registration sensor delay jam has occurred.
These are the detection timings for each cassette feeder:
Pick-up level Timer count time

Cassette feeder first level Approx. 2.4 seconds
Cassette feeder second-level Approx. 2.8 seconds
Cassette feeder third-level Approx. 3.1 seconds
Table 10-601
Start signal Start signal
Pick-up sensor Pick-up sensor

(PS651) (PS651)
jam check jam check
a’ a’
Registration sensor seconds
Normal Registration sensor seconds
Abnormal
(PS302) (PS302)
Feeder motor Feeder motor

(M651) (M651)
Note: In the figure, ‘a’ seconds stands for the timing count times displayed in table
10-601.
Figure 10-603

VII. DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY

A. Removing the feeder

motor
1) Remove the two screws, and take off
the cassette feeder’s rear cover.
[2] [4] [2] [3] [1]
2) Remove the relay connector [1], and
remove the cord guide [2] from the
cable in the two places indicated on
the figure.
3) Remove the two screws [3], and

remove the feeder motor [4].
[3]
Figure 10-701
B. Removing the pick-up/

feeder/separation motor
It is easier and more reliable to
remove the cassette feeder from the
main unit prior to attempting to remove
the pick-up/ feeder/separation motor.
1) Grip the pick-up tab [1], and remove

it from the pick-up drive shaft [2].
[2]
Lift up to remove
[1]
Figure 10-702

2) Open the hinge door a little, and

remove the right cover assembly [3].
Be careful not to open the hinge too
far.
[3]
Figure 10-703
3) While gripping the claw, remove the [4]

feeder roller and the separation roller.
[5]
Figure 10-704
C. Removing the pick-up unit

1) Remove the cassette feeder from the
main unit.
2) Remove the cassette.
3) Remove the rear cover of the cas-

sette feeder.
4) Remove the connectors J652 and

J653 from the top of the feeder con-
troller PCB [1], and remove the dis-
connected connector cables from the
cable guides, at three locations.
[2] [2] [2] [1]
Figure 10-705
5) Remove the two screws [3], and [3]

remove the cord cover [4].
[4]
Figure 10-706

6) Remove the relay connector [5] and

the cord guide [6] from the front rear
side of the cassette feeder.
[6]
[5]
Figure 10-707
7) Remove the 4 screws located in the [7] [7]
upper-right near side and far side [7],
and remove the right foot cover
assembly [8].
[8]
Figure 10-708
8) Remove the 6 screws [9], and [9]
remove the pick-up unit.
Figure 10-709
CHAPTER 11
INSTALLATION
This chapter explains the installation method for this unit.

The unit’s depicted in the diagrams in this chapter have all been fitted with an auto-
matic document feeder. For machines which are not fitted with an ADF, the installation
steps for the main unit are the same.
I. CHOOSING AN SUITABLE INSTALLATION C. Loading paper into the cassette .......11-8

LOCATION.............................................11-1 D. Loading paper into the
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION.......11-3 multi-feeder ....................................11-11
A. Opening the package and removing E. Attaching the tray/Power cord ........11-12
the packing materials .......................11-4 F. Checking the Copy image ..............11-13
B. Installing the cartridge ......................11-5 G. Setting the Fax machine function ....11-13

I. CHOOSING AN SUITABLE INSTALLATION LOCATION

The conditions relating to the installation location are listed below. It is therefore
advisable to read these conditions prior to the machine being brought into the cus-
tomer’s premises.
A. The unit must be connected independently to an electrical outlet which provides the
rated power supply.
B. The ambient temperature must be between 5°C and 35°C, and the humidity must be
between 10 to 90%RH. Please do not place the unit near water faucets, hot-water
heaters, humidifiers or refrigerators.
C. Do not place the unit near a fire source, very dusty location, in a location where
ammonia gas may occur, or in direct sunlight. In situations where placing the unit in
direct sunlight is unavoidable, it is recommended that curtains be hung to protect the
unit.
D. The room should have good ventilation.
E. The legs of the copier should not rise up off the floor. The copier should be kept
level.
F. The machine should be set up at least 10 cm away from the wall, and there should
be enough space to perform maintenance on the machine.
(Please refer to the following page “operation space overview”)
Operation space overview
The figure below outlines the space necessary for performing maintenance.
10 cm or more
70 cm
or more
160cm or more
Figure 11-101
The above figure shows a unit which has been fitted with an ADF. The required width
and depth for performing maintenance on machines which are not fitted with an ADF
is the same as for those depicted.

II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

When bringing something metal from a cold environment into a warm environment,
drops of water may adhere to the metal surfaces. This phenomenon is known as con-
densation. If a machine is used while it has condensation on it, it is possible that it will
become unable to copy images. For this reason, when moving the machine from a cold
environment to a warm one, prior to installation, it is recommended that the machine be
allowed to sit in its packing material for at least an hour or more in order for it to warm
up to room temperature.
The steps for unpacking and installing this unit are outlined below.
A. Open the packaging and remove the packing materials.
B. Install the cartridge.
C. Load paper into the cassette.
D. Load paper into the multi-feeder.
E. Attach the tray and the power cord.
F. Check the copy image.
G. Set up the fax function (for those machines equipped with a fax function).
A. Opening the package and removing the packing materials

No. Work details Illustration/ remarks
1 Unpack the main unit, and take
out the accessory parts.
2 With at least two people, grasp
the handles on the left and right
side of the main unit, and lift the
unit out.
Handles
Handles
3 Unfasten the packing materials

around the main unit, and
remove the plastic, the cushion-
ing materials and the tape.
Don’t forget to remove the tie-
wrap which has been fixed to
the cassette’s paper lifting plate.
Tie-wrap
Paper lifting plate


4 Remove the mirror mount fixing
screw. Open the front cover of
the main unit and put the screw
in the storage compartment for
safekeeping.
Screw storage
Mirror mount fixing screw compartment
Screw
5 Open the automatic document One cause of document jams is the ADF is used
feeder, and remove the filament without the filament tape being removed. Thus, it is
tape which has a stamp. (Only very important to remember to remove the filament
for those machines which are fit- tape.
ted with an ADF).
B. Installing the cartridge

1 Lift the cartridge out of the box
while it is still in the original
packing material.
2 Open the front cover of the main
unit, and while pressing on the
Printer assembly
release lever, pull the printer
assembly to the right.
Front cover
Release lever

3 Remove the cartridge from the
pack. Be sure not to touch or
open the light-blocking shutter.
Light-blocking shutter
(Do not open)
4 Take the protective sheet off the

cartridge. Protective sheet
5 While keeping the cartridge in

the position depicted in the fig-
ure, using the center as an axis,
slowly shake the cartridge in
both directions seven or eight
times, as if rotating it.


6 While holding the knob, slowly
pull the tape out. When remov-
ing the tape, place it on a flat
level surface, and hold the car- Tape
tridge firmly.
Pull out slowly
7 Open the printer assembly

cover, and slowly push the car-
tridge towards the back of the Cartridge
main unit in the direction of the
guide arrows, till it can go no
further.
Cover
8 Close the printer assembly

cover, push it back into the main
unit, and close the front cover. Cover
Front cover
Printer portion
C. Loading paper into the cassette

1 Lift the cassette up a little, and
pull it out until it stops.
Cassette
Pull out
2 Gently push on the paper lifting

plate of the cassette, where it
says “PUSH DOWN”. This locks Push
the paper lifting plate into the
cassette.
Paper
lifting
plate
3 Turn the front paper width guide

knob to remove the lock, move
the guide to match the desired
paper width, and turn the knob
again to lock it.
Paper width guide


4 Following the ▲ mark on the
paper trailing edge position
plate, remove it by pushing it
down. Push down gently to
avoid damaging the paper trail-
ing edge position plate.
Paper trailing edge
position plate
(Push down gently)
5 Re-install the paper trailing edge

position plate to fit the desired
Paper trailing edge position plate
paper size, by reversing the
process outlined above.
Paper lifting plate
6 Adjust the position of the paper

size sensor lever to fit the
desired paper size. Paper size sensor lever

7 Remove the protective plastic
sheet from the paper size plate,
affix the correct paper size label
on the cassette.
Cassette size
label
8 Attach the Paper Set label to the Paper set label

cassette, making sure that the
face with the instructions in the
appropriate language is in view.
9 After making the edges of the

paper stack even, place the
paper in the cassette.
Reference:
When the cassette is inserted
into the main unit while the
paper lifting plate is in the
locked position, the lock is
automatically released.
If the lock is accidentally
released, once again, softly
push on the cassette’s paper
lifting plate, where it says
“PUSH DOWN”. When the
paper lifting plate is locked,
place the paper in the cas-
sette.
10 Confirm that the cassette tabs

are holding the edges of the
paper in place.


11 While holding the cassette by
the center handles, gently insert Hold the handle
the cassette into the main unit
until it goes no further. Do not
insert the cassette while holding
on to the cassette on one side
only.
D. Loading paper into the multi-feeder

1 Open the multi-feeder.
Multi-feeder
tray
2 Set the paper width guide and

the auxiliary guide to fit the Paper width guide
width and the length of the
desired paper.
Auxiliary tray
3 After making the edges of the

paper stack even, place the
paper in the multi-feeder.

4 Adjust the paper width guide to
the width of the paper.
Be sure to not press down on
the paper width guide.
E. Attaching the tray/Power cord

1 Install the delivery tray provided.
Document
stacking tray
Delivery tray
2 Attach the included power cord

to the AC inlet of the main unit.
Power cord

F. Checking the Copy image

1 Connect the power cord to an
AC power outlet, and turn on the
power switch.
2 Set the document on the glass
or in the automatic document
feeder, and make a copy, using
either the cassette feeder or the
multi-feeder. Confirm the copy
image is correct.
3 Clean the area surrounding the
machine.
G. Setting the Fax machine function

For those machines which have been equipped with the fax functions only.
1. Executing an all-clear

1 Press the Registration/Set Key Service mode screen
→ # key. This displays the ser-
vice mode screen.
SERVICE MODE
# 1 SSSW
2 Using the shift keys ▲ ▼, select #8 CLEAR screen

#8 CLEAR, and press the SET
key. This will display the #8
# 8 CLEAR
CLEAR screen. TEL
3 Using the shift keys ▲ ▼, select

ALL, and press the SET key.
This activates the all-clear func-
tion.
2. Setting the date and time (User mode operation)

1 Press the Data Registration Key User mode screen
to display the user mode screen. SELECT AN ITEM 01 DATA REGISTRATION
02 TEL# REGISTRATION
2 Confirm that 01 DATA REGIS-

TRATION has been selected,
and press the Set key.
3 Confirm that 01 USER SET-
TINGS has been selected, and
press the set key.
4 Confirm that 01 DATE/TIME
SETTING has been selected, DATE/TIME SETTING
and press the set key. The date
and time which had been previ- 19/04/98 19:02
ously set will be displayed.
5 Enter the current date and time.

Use the shift keys to move
the cursor to enter the desired
numbers.
6 Press the set key. This sets the
date and time.

3. Setting the dialing method

1 Press the Data Registration Key
to display the user mode screen.
2 Confirm that 01 DATA REGIS-

TRATION has been selected,
and press the set key.
3 Confirm that 01 USER SET-
TINGS has been selected, and
press the set key.
4 Use the shift keys ▲ ▼ to select
11 TEL LINE TYPE, and press SELECT AN ITEM
the set key.
01 ROTARY PULSE
02 TOUCH TONE
TEL LINE TYPE
5 Use the shift keys to select

either 01 ROTARY PULSE or 02
TOUCH TONE, and press the
set key.
4. Communications test

1 Press the fax key located on the
control panel to activate the fax
mode. If the fax mode is already
activated, this step may be
skipped.
2 Press the hook key located on If a dial tone cannot be heard, please check the line.
the control panel, and confirm
that a dial tone can be heard.
3 Send and receive documents, When there is a communications problem, please
and confirm the machine opera- follow the steps outlined below in the reference sec-
tion and document image. tion, and adjust the output level and the NL.
5. Adjusting the output level

vice mode screen.
2 Using the shift keys ▲ ▼, select
#2 MENU, and press the SET
MENU screen.
3 Using the shift keys ▲ ▼ select
007, and press the SET key.
# 2 MENU
007 15
4 Use the shift keys ▲ ▼ to

change the parameters, and
press the SET key.
6. Adjusting the NL

vice mode screen.
#2 MENU, and press the SET
MENU screen.
005, and press the SET key.
# 2 MENU
005 OFF
4 Use the shift keys ▲ ▼ to select

either OFF or ON, and press the
SET key.

CHAPTER 12
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
This chapter explains the maintenance parts and inspection procedures for this
machine.
I. PERIODIC REPLACEMENT PARTS.....12-1 A. Storage when the packing seal is

II. ESTIMATED LIFESPAN OF CONSUMABLE intact ................................................12-3
PARTS ...................................................12-1 B. Storage and handling when the
III. BASIC SERVICING PROCEDURES .....12-2 packing seal has been opened ........12-4
IV. CARTRIDGE STORAGE AND
HANDLING.............................................12-3

I. PERIODIC REPLACEMENT PARTS

There are no parts in the unit that need to be periodically replaced.
II. ESTIMATED LIFESPAN OF CONSUMABLE PARTS

It may be necessary to replace parts due to wear or damage more than once during
the warranty period. The expected life (number of pages) of parts that do not need to be
replaced until they fail is indicated below.
As of January, 1999
no. Part Name Part No. Number of Estimated Number Remarks
parts of Pages Copied
1 Fixing assembly FG6-1259-000 1 150,000
2 Transfer corona RG5-3527-000 1 150,000
assembly roller
3 Paper feed roller RB2-1821-000 2*1 200,000
4 Separation roller, RF5-2490-000 1 each *2 200,000
transport roller
5 Multi-feeder paper RB2-1820-000 1 200,000
feed roller
6 Multi-feeder separa- RF5-2400-000 1 200,000
tion pad
7 Exhaust fan RH7-1354-000 1 25,000 hours 25,000 hours
is 3 years of
24-hour con-
tinuous power
supply
*1 A total of 4, including the main unit and a single level cassette feeder
A total of 8, including the main unit and a three-level cassette feeder
*2 A total of 4, including the main unit and a single level cassette feeder (2 separa-
tion rollers and 2 transport rollers)
A total of 8, including the main unit and a three-level cassette feeder (4 separa-
tion rollers and 4 transport rollers)
Table 12-201
Caution:
The information in the table above is only an estimate, and may be revised in the light
of empirical data.
III. BASIC SERVICING PROCEDURES

This product has no areas which require periodic service. However, in order to
extend the life of the product and parts, we recommend the following procedures be car-
ried out when carrying out service to replace consumable parts.
No. Procedure Inspection Items Remarks

1 Greet the customer Consult about the
machine’s condition
2 Test copy a. Image density
b. Soiled background
c. Character clarity
d. Leading edge margin
e. Fixing, faulty synchro-
nization, soiled reverse
side
3 Clean the optical unit Clean with a blower brush.
When very soiled, use an
alcohol cleaner. Wipe the
white reference plate with a
dry cloth.
4 Clean the transfer guide Remove the cartridge before
servicing.
5 Clean the separation and
transport parts
• Separation static charge
eliminator
• Transport belt
6 Clean the fixing and deliv-
ery assemblies
• Fixing assembly inlet
guide
7 Clean the copy board
glass
8 Make a test copy
9 Tidy up around the unit
Table 12-301

IV. CARTRIDGE STORAGE AND HANDLING

Cartridges are constantly influenced by the surrounding environment whether the
packaging is sealed or opened, or the cartridge is installed in the main unit. The car-
tridge will deteriorate over time regardless of the number of pages copied. The pace of
this deterioration over time depends on the installed and storage environments. Please
take sufficient care when storing and handling the cartridge.
A. Storage when the packing seal is intact

When cartridges are stored in a warehouse or workshop, do not place them in loca-
tions other than those listed in Table 12-401. Also, take heed of the following points.
• Do not store in direct sunlight.
• Do not store in a location subject to strong vibrations.
• Do not handle roughly or drop.
Normal
Temperature
(90% of the total storage period) 0 to 35˚C

Maximum
Extreme temp. 35 to 40˚C
(10% of the total
storage period) Minimum
temp. -20 to 0˚C
Temperature variation 40˚C to 15˚C

(within a 3-minute span) -20˚C to 25˚C
Normal 35 to 85%
(90% of the total storage period) relative humidity (RH)
Humidity
Maximum
Extreme humidity 85 to 95% RH
(10% of the total
storage period) Minimum
humidity 10 to 35% RH
460 to760mmHg
Atmospheric pressure (0.1 to 1 atmospheric
pressure)
Total warranty period About 2.5 years
Table 12-401 Temperature and humidity conditions for storage
Caution:
The total warranty period is the period effective from the date of manufacture printed
on the cartridge packing box.
B. Storage and handling when the packing seal has been

opened
The photosensitive drum uses an organic photoconductor (OPC). The photosensitive
drum will deteriorate if exposed to strong light. Also, the cartridge contains toner, so
please provide customers with adequate explanations of storage and handling methods,
and advise them to always store the cartridge in a storage bag.
1. Storage environment after the packing seal has been opened
a. Always store in the storage bag.

b. Do not store in direct sunlight, near a window or other bright places. Do not store in
an automobile for long periods of time.
Even when the cartridge is in the storage bag, do not leave it for long periods in
direct sunlight or in an automobile.
c. Do not store in extremely high or low temperatures or humidity, or in a location which
experiences dramatic changes in temperature or humidity. (For example, next to a
heater or air conditioner.)
d. Do not store in a location exposed to corrosive gases (insecticides, etc.) or in a loca-
tion with air that has a high salt content.
e. Do not store in a location that is very dusty or filled with ammonia or organic solvent
fumes.
f. Do not store near computer monitors, disk drives or floppy disks. (The magnetism of
the cartridge may damage the data stored in these devices.)
g. Store out of reach of children and infants.
h. Store the cartridge between 0 to 35°C.
2. Cartridge shelf life
The shelf life of a cartridge is 2.5 years from the date of manufacture. The production
date is displayed in abbreviated form on the cartridge. Also, for customer use, the expi-
ration date , 2.5 years from the date of manufacture, is displayed on the cartridge pack-
ing box and on the main packing box. It is preferable to use up the cartridge before the
expiration date, because after that date the cartridge image quality deteriorates.

3. Handling
a. When setting the cartridge in the copier, or when blank areas occur in the copy
image because toner runs out during copying, hold the cartridge level, as shown in
figure 12-401, and shake it several times at about 90Þ in both directions. After the
toner inside the cartridge has been leveled evenly, set the cartridge in the copier. If
the cartridge is shaken in a manner other than that described above, there is the
danger that toner may leak from the developing assembly and cleaning assembly.
Figure 12-401
In order to completely prevent output image stains due to toner leakage, be sure to
make 3-5 test copies after setting the cartridge in the copier.
b. As shown in Figure 12-402, do not hold the cartridge vertically or upside down. Also,
do not wave it about.
Figure 12-402
c. Do not manually open the shutter of the photosensitive drum on the bottom of the
cartridge. Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum.
Caution:
If the surface of the photosensitive drum is accidentally soiled, wipe with a polishing
cloth dampened with toner. Do not wipe with a dry cloth or clean with solvents.
d. Do not disassemble the cartridge.

e. Do not subject to unnecessary vibration or shock.
Particularly, do not subject the photosensitive drum to pressure from the top of the
photosensitive drum cover shutter.
f. When transporting the copier, remove the cartridge from the main unit. Place the
cartridge in the protective bag or wrap in a thick cloth and keep out of direct light.
g. Do not store near computer monitors, disk drives or floppy disks. (The magnetism of
the cartridge may damage the data stored in these devices.)
h. Store out of reach of children and infants.
g. The photosensitive drum is sensitive to strong light, so the cartridge is equipped with
a light-blocking shutter. However, if subjected to strong light for an extended period
of time, white spots and vertical bands may appear on the images. In that case,
refraining from use of the machine for as long as possible will result in almost com-
plete recovery. However, in some cases the traces (white spots, vertical bands) may
not disappear.
Please note the following items.
Caution:
1. Perform jam removal and cartridge replacement promptly.
2. When the cartridge is removed from the copier and stored, or when using a color
cartridge, be sure to place the cartridge in a storage box or cover it with a cloth. Do
not leave the cartridge exposed, once removed from the main unit.
h. Instruct the user to return used cartridges to a designated collection center.

Caution:
Do not incinerate used cartridges as there is a risk of bursting or explosion.
When a used cartridge must be disposed of, dispose of it as nonflammable trash.
Reference:
The cartridge will perfectly fit for use for copying if placed in darkness for 5 minutes
after exposure to 1,500lux intensity light (normal light) for 5 minutes,. However, do not
expose the cartridge to direct sunlight. The sun’s rays have a light intensity ranging
from approximately 10,000lux to 30,000lux.
CHAPTER 13
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes the main unit’s maintenance servicing, standards and adjust-
ments, faulty image countermeasures, machine malfunction countermeasures, feeding
malfunction countermeasures, layout and functions of electrical components, the ser-
vice mode and self-diagnostic mechanisms.
This chapter contains illustrations of a copier with automatic document feeder (ADF)
attached.
For information regarding the ADF mechanism, refer to the appended ADF-H1 ser-
vice manual.
I. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS.....13-2 B. Motor, fan .......................................13-42

A. Machanical system ..........................13-2 C. Sensors ..........................................13-44
B. Electrical System .............................13-9 D. Switches, lamps, miscellaneous ....13-46
II. IMAGE AND MACHINE MALFUNCTION E. PCBs ..............................................13-48
COUNTERMEASURES .......................13-15 F. Variable resistor(VR)/LED/check
A. Initial check ....................................13-15 pin listed by PCB plate ...................13-50
B. Treatment procedures by faulty V. SERVICE MODE..................................13-55
image type .....................................13-17 A. Overview ........................................13-55
C. Operation malfunction B. Operating Procedures ....................13-56
countermeasures ...........................13-26 C. Service mode menu list..................13-57
III. FAULTY FEEDING D. SSSW Default Setting ....................13-63
COUNTERMEASURES .......................13-34 E. Parameter settings .........................13-78
A. Overview ........................................13-34 F. Test Mode (TEST MODE)............13-111
B. Copy paper jam..............................13-35 VI. REPORTS..........................................13-142
C. Faulty feeding ................................13-38 A. User reports .................................13-142
IV. ELECTRICAL PARTS POSITIONS/ B. Service report...............................13-145
FUNCTIONS ........................................13-39 VII. USER ERRORS.................................13-163
A. Clutches, solenoids ........................13-40 VIII. SERVICE ERRORS ...........................13-170

Reading the procedure chart

The procedure chart used in this chapter is a general flowchart that has been adapt-
ed to table form.
Below is an example and an explanation of how to use it.
Example: No AC power
Cause Steps Checks Yes/No Action

Power plug is 1 Is the power plug connected to the NO Plug the power plug
disconnected outlet? into the outlet.
A cover is not 2 Is the front cover completely closed? NO Close the cover.
completely
closed Is the prescribed voltage being sup-
There is no 3 plied to the outlet? NO Explain to the customer
original power that the trouble is not
source Is the prescribed voltage being sup- caused by the copier.
4 plied between J1-1 and J1-2? (J1 is YES Check from Item 6.
the power cord mount area.)
(The remainder of the table has been omitted.)
■ When you only want to know the cause of a malfunction (the name of the part
thought to be malfunctioning), refer to the table’s Cause column.
In the case of “AC power source is not being supplied” described above, problems
such as an unconnected power plug, incomplete closing of a cover, and no original
power source can be considered as causes.
■ When you want to repair or know the checking procedure for a malfunction, check
the items in the Action column. Answer yes or no to the items in the Items to Check
column. If your answer matches the answer in the Result column, then perform the
procedure described in the Action column.
If the answer does not match the Result column, proceed to the next item and check
in the same manner.
I. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Mechanical system
1. Right and left registration adjustment
Check that the front edge image margin of paper fed from each cassette is 2.5
± 2.0mm.
If the standards are off, adjust according to the procedure described below.
1) Remove the cassette from the cassette level that needs adjustment.
2) Loosen the hex screw and move the adjusting plate back and forth. Adjust by lining
up with the 1mm interval scale marks.
(–) (+)
2.5 ± 2.0mm
0
2
Scale
4
1mm
6
8
10
Hex wrench
Figure 13-101

2. Image leading edge margin adjustment
Adjustment when the leading edge of the printed image is out of alignment.
a) Use a precision screwdriver to press down on SW401 and output a test print.
b) Turn VR401 and adjust the leading edge margin of the test print to 4.0 ± 2.0mm.
SW401
VR401
4.0 ± 2.0mm
VR401
Precision screwdriver (3mm)
Figure 13-102
3. Attaching the scanner wire
Attach the wire, following steps 1 to 9. Then perform the mirror positioning adjust-
ment described on the next page.
Pulley clip
Put the steel
ball into the
pulley hole.
[4] Wrap the wire
[2] 2 times to the
[1] inner side and
7 times to the
outer side.
Then, attach
Attach the mirror the pulley clip.
positioning plate.
[3]
[2]
[5]
[6]
Figure 13-103
4. Mirror positioning adjustment
a) Adjusting position of No. 2 mirror mount

If the optical section wire pulley’s hexagonal fixing nut has been loosened, follow the
procedures described below to adjust the position of the No. 2 mirror mount, and then
tighten the hexagonal nut.
Optical section wire pulley
Hexagonal nut
Figure 13-104
The mirror positioning tool used in the positioning of the No. 2 mirror mount is illus-
trated below.
[C]
[A]
[B] [C]
[B]
[A]
[3] [3]
[2] [2]
[1] [1]
FY9-3009-040 (for rear use) When used to adjust the No. 2 mirror mount
(for rear use)
[C]
[B] [C]
[A] [B]
[3]
[2] [2]
[1] [1]
FY9-3009-040 (for front use) When used to adjust the No. 2 mirror mount
(for front use)
Figure 13-105

With the mirror positioning tool fitted in the holes shown below, tighten the optical
unit wire pulley’s hexagonal fixing nut.
for rear use for front use
Figure 13-106
b) Adjustment of distance between No. 1 and No. 2 mirror mounts

With the optical system wire fixing tool for No. 1 mirror mount loosened, follow the
procedures described below to adjust the distance between No. 1 and No. 2 mirror
mounts, and then tighten the fixing tool.
This adjustment should be performed after the operation to adjust the position of No.
2 mirror mount, as described above.
Screw
Screw
Fixing tool
Fixing tool
Figure 13-107
The mirror positioning tool used in the adjustment of the distance between No. 1 and
No. 2 mirror mounts is illustrated below.
[C]
[A]
[B] [C]
[B]
[A]
[3] [3]
[2] [2]
[1] [1]
FY9-3009-040 (for rear use) When used to adjust the distance between
No. 1 and No. 2 mirror mounts (for rear use)
[C]
[A]
[B]
[A] [B]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1] [1]
FY9-3009-040 (for front use) When used to adjust the distance between
No. 1 and No. 2 mirror mounts (for front use)
Figure 13-108
With the mirror positioning tool fitted in the holes shown below, attach the optical unit
wire hexagonal fixing tool.
for rear use for front use
Figure 13-109

5. Printer unit receptacle connector mount positioning adjustment
When the printer unit receptacle connector is removed or attached, adjust the mount
position, following the procedure described below.
1) Loosen the 3 receptacle connector screws.
2) Adjust so that the interval between the printer unit frame and the receptacle connec-
tor is 3.5 ± 0.5mm.
Printer unit
3.5 ± 0.5mm
Screws
Figure 13-110
6. Check the pressure (nip width) of the fixing pressure roller
This machine has no adjustment mechanism for the fixing assembly nip width.
However, if the nip width is not correct, faulty fixing may occur.
Therefore, check the fixing assembly nip width by following the procedures described
below. If the nip width is outside the standards, replace the fixing assembly.
1) Make one solid black copy on size A3 paper.
2) Place the black side of the paper face down and set the solid black copy in the multi-
feeder.
3) When the leading edge of the paper comes out into the copy tray, quickly switch off
the power source and leave it as is for about 10 seconds.
4) Remove the paper as you would to clear a paper jam from the printer unit.
5) Measure the width of the part of the removed paper that is wet and shiny with toner.
Check that the width is within the range displayed in Table 13-101.
c Dimensions
a 5.5 ± 1.0 (mm)
15mm
Direction of
|c-a| 1.0 (mm) or less
paper feed Center of A3
size printer |b-a| 1.0 (mm) or less
paper
|b-c| 1.0 (mm) or less
15mm
a Table 13-101
Figure 13-111

B. Electrical System
Adjustment items for the electrical system include automatic shading correction and
image positioning adjustment. When the main parts listed for each below are replaced,
perform adjustments.
• When the scanning lamp is replaced: automatic shading adjustment
• When the CCD unit is replaced: automatic shading adjustment
• When the image processor circuit board is replaced: image positioning adjustment,
automatic shading adjustment
1. Automatic shading adjustment
1) Open the 3 covers of the control panel’s one-touch panel. Set the slide switch ON
2) Enter the service mode and select TEST MODE. (See page 13-111)
3) Press 2 on the control panel’s numeric keypad. (TEST MODE”: CCD will be select-
ed.)
4) When you press 8 on the numeric keypad, automatic shading adjustment will start.
5) When OK is displayed on the display, the adjustment is finished.
6) After pressing the control panel stop key, press the clear key. (To exit TEST MODE.)
7) Turn the control panel slide switch OFF.
2. Image positioning adjustment
1) Make a test chart with marks every 1cm from the leading and left edges of the page,
as shown in the figure below.
Leading edge
10mm Left edge

10mm
Mark a line
A4 size copy paper
Figure 13-112
2) Select 9.BOOK from service mode #6 SCANNER. Set 1 in 018.

3) Set the test chart you made on the copyboard glass with the image facing down.
Leading edge
CARD A4
A5 B5 A5 B5 A4 B4 A3
Left edge 10mm
10mm
CARD
Document
(Image facing down)
A5
B5
A5
A4
B5
B4
A4
A3
Figure 13-113
4) Copy the image enlarged to 400%.

5) Measure the length of the leading and left edges of the copied image (see the figure
below).
Leading edge
Left edge
Output image (400% enlarged copy)
Figure 13-114
6) Refer to Table 13-102. Work out the input value that corresponds to the measure-
ment taken in step 5.
7) Select 8. CCD from service mode #6 SCANNER. Enter the value worked out from
the leading edge data, 007, and the left edge data, 010 in step 6).
8) Select 9.BOOK from service mode #6 SCANNER. Set 1 in 018.
9) Exit service mode. Copy the image at 100%. Check that the copied image and the
original document positioning matches.

Feed direction (leading edge) Main scanning direction (left edge)

Actual measurement Input measurement Actual measurement Input measurement Actual measurement Input measurement
30.0 41 30.0 118 40.2 158
31.0 40 30.3 119 40.4 159
32.0 39 30.5 120 40.7 160
33.0 38 30.8 121 40.9 161
34.0 37 31.0 122 41.2 162
35.0 36 31.3 123 41.4 163
36.0 35 31.5 124 41.7 164
37.0 34 31.8 125 41.9 165
38.0 33 32.0 126 42.2 166
39.0 32 32.3 127 42.4 167
40.0 31 32.5 128 42.7 168
41.0 30 32.8 129 43.0 169
42.0 29 33.0 130 43.2 170
43.0 28 33.3 131 43.5 171
44.0 27 33.6 132 43.7 172
45.0 26 33.8 133 44.0 173
46.0 25 34.1 134 44.2 174
47.0 24 34.3 135 44.5 175
48.0 23 34.6 136 44.7 176
49.0 22 34.8 137 45.0 177
50.0 21 35.1 138 45.2 178
35.3 139 45.5 179
35.6 140 45.7 180
35.8 141 46.0 181
36.1 142 46.3 182
36.4 143 46.5 183
36.6 144 46.8 184
36.9 145 47.0 185
37.1 146 47.3 186
37.4 147 47.5 187
37.6 148 47.8 188
37.9 149 48.0 189
38.1 150 48.3 190
38.4 151 48.5 191
38.6 152 48.8 192
38.9 153 49.1 193
39.1 154 49.3 194
39.4 155 49.6 195
39.7 156 49.8 196
39.9 157 50.0 197
Actual measurement: value of markings on image enlarged to 400%
Input measurement: value input in service mode.
Table 13-102
3. Sensor check
Assessment of the status of the photo-interrupter is performed by the SENSOR test

in the TEST MODE. The procedure is as described below.
1) On the control panel, press the Entry/Setting key, then the # key to enter the service
mode.
2) Press the shift keys (up arrow, down arrow) to select TEST MODE.
3) Press 6 on the numeric keypad to select FACULTY TEST.
4) Press 3 on the numeric keypad to enter sensor check mode. The image below will
be displayed.
6-3 : SENSOR
[ 1 ] --- [ 7 ]
Figure 13-115
5) When the display shown in Figure13-110 is displayed, push 1,2,3 and 4 on the
numeric keypad. The status of each sensor will be displayed. The following is an
example and explanation of what happens when you push 1 on the numeric keypad.
Sensor name
Sensor’s present status
DS of DES of DOC A4
CRG on DCVS on
Sensor’s present status
Sensor name
DS of means that the automatic document

feeder’s (ADF) document sensor (DS) is off.
Figure 13-116
6) Move each sensor’s flag and verify that the display shows of (OFF)/on (ON) repeat-
edly.
The following page shows the display and sensor name, and the status of each sen-
sor when the main unit is in stand-by when keys 1-4 of the numeric keypad are
pressed.

6-3:SENOR
[1] - - - [7]
Press 1 on the numeric keypad
DS of DES of DOC A4
CRG on DCVS on
DS: document sensor* (PS801) :on/document present, off/no document

DES: document edge sensor* (PS805):on/document present, off/no document
DOC: document width sensor* (PS851, PS852): displays document width by combination of
the 2 sensor’s ON/OFF status
CRG: toner cartridge sensor: on/of toner cartridge present/no toner cartridge
DCVS: paper feed sensor: on/ paper is not detected (in stand-by, with the lower right cover closed)
of/ paper is detected (in stand-by, with the lower right cover open)
*Displays the status of each ADF sensor
HPS on RES on BCVS of

NDFS of DLS0 of DLS1 of
HPS: scanner home position sensor: on/the scanner is in the home position
of/ the scanner is not in the home position
RES: Not used
BCVS: copyboard cover open/close sensor (PS102): on/cover open, of/cover closed
NDFS: document length sensor1* (PS802): on/document present, of/no document
DLS0: document length sensor2* (PS803): on/document present, of/no document
DLS1: Reserved
*Displays the status of each ADF sensor
CT1 on A4 CT2 of
CT3 on A4 CT4 on B4
CT1: main unit cassette paper sensor (PS305): on/paper present, of/no paper
main unit cassette paper size detection switch: displays paper size
CT2: level 1 cassette feeder paper sensor (PS651): on/paper present, of/no paper
level 1 cassette feeder paper size detection switch: displays paper size
MLT on A4 TN on
RS of JAM of
MLT: multi-feeder paper sensor (PS501): on/paper present, of/no paper

Displays A4/set paper size.
TN: toner sensor: on/toner remaining, of/no toner
RS: Reserved
JAM: jam detection status: on/jam detected, of/no jam detected
Figure 13-117
4. Image processor PCB replacement procedures
The procedures which must be performed when replacing the image processor PCB
are described below.
■ Procedures performed at the time of replacement

• For machines with a FAX function, output system data list, one-touch/speed
dial/group dialing list, user data list, activity management report and system dump
list.
• For machines with a FAX function, output all transmitted and received images.
• Turn off the power switch and remove jumper plug (JP3) before replacing the PCB.
• If additional memory has been added, remove the memory after removing jumper
plug JP1 from the image processor PCB.
• Remove the ROM DIMM.
Caution:
When the jumper plug (JP3) is removed, all the data recorded in the control memory
are erased. Accordingly, when the jumper plug (JP3) is to be removed, make sure the
control data have been printed out.
• User data: data that are set when the user presses the control panel's entry/setting
key
• Service mode data: setting data for the service mode
• Management data: activity management record (the previous 40 transactions), sys-
tem dump record
■ Procedures performed after replacement

• Install ROM DIMM.
• Install additional memory. When installing additional memory, do it when the
jumper plug (JP1) is removed from the image processor PCB, or when it is in the
OFF position.
• Set jumper plug JP1 to the ON position.
• Attach the jumper plug (JP3) that was removed prior to replacement of the PCB.
• Turn on the main unit power switch. If DATA ERROR is displayed, press the set key
on the control panel.
• Input the user data and service mode data.
• See page 13-9. Perform automatic shading correction and image positioning
adjustment.

II. IMAGE AND MACHINE MALFUNCTION COUNTER-

MEASURES
A. Initial check
1. Setting environment
a. Power voltage is maintained the rated voltage ± 10V. (The power cord should not be
disconnected at night.)
b. Do not place in a location subject to high temperature and humidity (near a water
faucet, hot water heater, or humidifier), a cold location, near naked flame or in a
dusty location.
c. Do not place in an area with ammonia fumes.
d. Do not place in direct sunlight. When it is not possible to avoid this, advise the user
to hang curtains on the window or take other measures to reduce the light.
e. Choose a well-ventilated location
f. Choose a location where the machine will sit level
g. The machine should be supplied with power 24 hours a day. Check that the
machine is placed in a location that fulfills the conditions cited above.
2. Check the document for symptoms of trouble
Check if the cause of trouble is with the document or with the machine.
a. Copy density correction is appropriate at a? graduation of 5+/-1.?
b. It is difficult to get satisfactory contrast on a red background.
Example; red sheet or accounting sheet
c. Check the document density
Example;
Document is a diazo copy
}
Document with transparency …Easily mistaken for fogging
Documents written in light pencil are easily mistaken as being too faint images.
3. Check if there is dirt or scratches on the copyboard cover, copyboard glass or

the white reference plate
If there is dirt, clean with a mild detergent or alcohol. If there are scratches, replace
the scratched part.
4. Check the cartridge
If the surface of the photosensitive drum is scratched, replace the cartridge.
5. Check the paper
a. Is Canon recommended paper being used?

b. Is the paper damp?
Load new packing paper and make a test copy.
6. Other
In winter, especially upon installation, sometimes moisture condensation occurs

within the machine and causes various problems when a machine is suddenly moved
from a cold warehouse and set in a warm room.
Example;
a. The image becomes faint due to moisture condensation in the scanning assembly
(glass, mirror, lens, etc.)
b. Leak current develop from condensation in the charging assembly.
c. Paper jams occur due to condensation of the pick-up and feeder guides.
When condensation occurs, wipe the parts dry and leave the machine supplied with
power for 60 minutes.

B. Treatment procedures by faulty image type

Before looking for the cause of printing failure, check that the user is using recom-
mended paper which is stored in a proper environment. When printing failure can be
resolved by use of the recommended paper which is stored in a proper environment,
advise that the user use the recommended paper or instruct the user in storage meth-
ods for recording paper.
too light too dark blank solid black
polka dots soiled back vertical lines
fuzzy black lines dirt blank areas
(NB)
white vertical line white horizontal line leading edge
(white line) (white line) displacement
paper
feed
direction
image distortion blurring partial image shrinkage/image stretching
Figure 13-201
1 Too Light

Copy paper 1 When new (unopened) copy paper is YES 1. The paper may be
used, does the density become damp. Advise the
darker? user on paper stor-
age methods.
2. If paper other than
the recommended
paper is being used,
explain to the user
that this may cause
an inferior image.
2 Make a test print following the direc- NO Check from Step 10.
tions on page 13-120. Is the output
image too light?
3 Interrupt and stop the machine while YES Check from Step 8.
the image is being printed onto pho-
tosensitive drum. Is the toner being
developed on the drum surface?
Cartridge 4 Remove the cartridge. Does the YES End
problem improve after the cartridge
has been lightly shaken 5 or 6
times?
Poor connector 5 Check the connection between con- NO Connect firmly.
connection nector J304 on the DC controller
PCB and the laser scanner unit. Is it
normal?
Cartridge 6 Is the trouble resolved when the car- YES End
(primary charg- tridge is replaced?
ing roller)
Laser scanner 7 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
unit laser scanner unit is replaced?
DC controller NO Replace the DC con-
PCB troller PCB
Transfer guide 8 When the transfer guide and other NO Check that no screws
metal parts are measured by a or other metal parts
tester, is the electrical resistance 0 have fallen near the
ohms? transfer guide.
Transfer charg- 9 Check the transfer charging roller YES Clean the contacts.
ing roller con- and the high voltage contact point.
tact Are they dirty?
Transfer charg- NO Replace the transfer
ing roller charging roller.
Dirty scanner 10 Does the image improve when the YES End
assembly mirror and lens dust proof glass are
cleaned?


Shading cor- 11 Is the trouble resolved when auto- YES End
rection matic shading correction is per-
formed? (see page 13-9)
Poor connector 12 Is the flat cable which connects J208 NO Connect the cable firm-
connection on the image processor PCB and ly.
(between the the CCD unit properly connected?
CCD unit and
the image
processor
PCB) Is the trouble resolved when the
CCD unit 13 CCD unit is replaced? YES End
Image proces- NO Replace the image
sor PCB processor PCB.
2 Too Dark

Dirty scanner 1 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
assembly scanning lamp, reflecting plate, mir-
ror and lens are cleaned?
Automatic 2 Is the trouble resolved when auto- YES End
shading correc- matic shading correction is per-
tion formed? (see page 13-9)
tridge is replaced?
High-voltage 4 Are problems occurring due to defor- YES Repair it. When this is
contact point mity of the high-voltage contact point not possible, replace
pin on the DC pin (JH402) on the DC controller the DC controller PCB.
controller PCB PCB?
Developing 5 Is the trouble resolved when the DC YES End
bias controller PCB is replaced?
Image proces- NO Replace the image
3 Blank

1 Make a test print following the direc- NO Check from Item 9.
tions on page 13-120. Is the output
image blank?
tridge is replaced?
High-voltage 3 Is there dirt on the contact point that YES Clean the contact
contact point supplies high-voltage to the car- point.
tridge? (Remove the cartridge and
check.)
Transfer charg- 4 Is the transfer charging roller proper- NO Reinstall the transfer
ing roller ly installed? charging roller.
Poor connector 5 Check the contact between connec- NO Reconnect the connec-
contact tor J304 on the DC controller PCB tor.
(between the and the laser scanner unit. Is it prop-
laser scanner erly connected?
unit and the DC
controller PCB)
Laser scanner 6 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
unit laser scanner unit is replaced?
High-voltage 7 Are troubles occurring due to defor- YES Repair it. When this is
contact point mity of the high-voltage contact point not possible, replace
pin on the DC pins (JH401, JH402, JH403) on the the DC controller PCB.
controller PCB DC controller PCB?
DC controller 8 Is the trouble resolved when the DC YES End
PCB controller PCB is replaced?
Poor connector 9 Check the connection of the flat NO Reconnect the cable.
contact cable between connector J208 on
(between the the image processor PCB and the
CCD unit and CCD unit. Is it properly connected?
image proces-
sor PCB)
CCD unit 10 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
Image proces- CCD unit is replaced? NO Replace the image

4 Solid black

Scanning lamp 1 Is the scanning lamp lit while copy- NO See the “Scanning lamp
ing? does not light” section.
Cartridge (pri- 2 Is there dirt on the contact point that YES Clean the contact
mary charging supplies high-voltage to the car- point.
roller bias fault) tridge?
tridge is replaced?
High-voltage 4 Are problems occurring due to defor- YES Repair it. When this is
contact point of mity of the high-voltage contact point not possible, replace
the DC con- pin JH401 on the DC controller the DC controller PCB.
troller PCB PCB?
Image proces- CCD unit is replaced? NO Replace the image
5 Polka dots

Cartridge (pho- 1 Is the surface of the photosensitive YES Replace the cartridge.
tosensitive drum scratched?
drum)
Transfer charg- 2 Is the transfer charging roller dirty? YES Clean the roller. If it is
ing roller scratched, replace it.
Static charge 3 Is the static charge eliminator dirty? YES Clean the static charge
eliminator eliminator.
Re-charging 4 Is the re-charging eliminator dirty? YES Clean the re-charging
eliminator eliminator.
DC controller 5 Are problems occurring due to defor- YES Repair it.
PCB mity of the high-voltage contact point NO Replace the DC con-
pin JH401 on the DC controller PCB? troller PCB.
6 Soiled back

Dirt in paper 1 Check the paper feed path. Is it YES Clean the paper feed
feed path dirty? path.
Transfer guide 2 Is there toner on the surface of the YES Clean the transfer
transfer guide? guide.
Static charge 3 Is there toner on the static charge YES Clean the static charge
eliminator eliminator? eliminator.
Re-charging 4 Is there toner on the re-charging YES Clean the re-charging
eliminator eliminator eliminator.
Transfer charg- 5 Is the dirt’s cycle at an approximately YES Clean the transfer
ing roller 54mm pitch? charging roller.
Registration 6 Is the dirt’s cycle at an approximately YES Clean the registration
roller 52mm pitch? roller.
Fixing assem- 7 Is the trouble resolved when the fix- YES End
bly inlet guide ing assembly inlet guide is cleaned? NO Replace the fixing
assembly.
7 Black Lines (thin vertical lines)

Scanner 1 Make a test print following the direc- YES Clean the copyboard
assembly tions on page 13-120. Is the output glass, mirrors 1 to 4
image normal? and the lens.
CCD unit is replaced?
Cartridge (pho- 3 Remove the cartridge and check the YES Replace the cartridge.
tosensitive surface of the photosensitive drum.
drum) Are there scratches in the drum’s
direction of rotation?
Primary charg- 4 Is the trouble resolved when the car- YES End
ing roller tridge is replaced?
Dirty fixing 5 Is the trouble resolved when the fix- YES End
assembly inlet ing assembly inlet guide is cleaned?
guide
Fixing NO Replace the fixing
assembly assembly.

8 Vertical Fogging

Exposure sys- 1 Make a test print following the direc- YES Clean the copyboard
tem tions on page 13-120. Is the output glass, mirrors 1 to 4
image normal? and the lens.
External light tridge is replaced? NO Check that no external
light is reaching the
photosensitive drum.
9 Fuzzy Horizontal Black Lines

Connection 1 Is the flat cable connecting the YES Replace the cable.
fault due to inverter PCB and the image proces-
poor contact of sor PCB almost broken?
the flat cable
Poor drum sen- 2 Is the trouble resolved when the car- YES End
sitivity of the tridge is replaced?
developer cylin-
der drum
Fixing NO Replace the fixing
assembly assembly.
10 Dirt

Copyboard 1 Make several copies consecutively. YES Clean the copyboard
glass Does the dirt always occur in the glass.
same place?
Toner spillage 2 Does the dirt occur at random? YES Check if toner is spilling
from the cartridge.
Fixing assem- 3 Does the dirt’s cycle occur at an YES Replace the fixing
bly approximately 75mm pitch? assembly.
Cartridge NO Replace the cartridge.
11 White Strips (vertical)

12 Thin White Lines (vertical)

Exposure sys- 1 Make a test print following the direc- YES Clean the white refer-
tem tions on page 13-120. Is the output ence plate, on the back
image normal? of the copyboard glass,
and mirrors 1-4.
Transfer charg- 2 Is there dirt on the transfer charging YES Clean the roller. If
ing roller roller? cleaning does not solve
the problem, replace
the roller.
Separation sta- 3 Is there dirt on the separation static YES Clean the separation
tic charge elim- charge eliminator? static charge eliminator.
inator
Fixing tridge is replaced? NO Replace the fixing
Assembly assembly.
13 Leading Edge Displacement

Document 1 Is the document set properly? NO Reset the document.
Paper curl 2 Is the paper very curled? YES Replace the paper.
Paper overload 3 Is the amount of paper set in the YES Explain to the user that
cassette over the limit? each cassette can hold
a maximum of 250
sheets of paper.
Pick-up roller 4 Are the rollers of the pick-up level on NO Check each roller. If
Feed roller which the displacement occurs nor- any are worn, replace
Separation mal? them.
roller
Registration 5 Is the registration roller normal? NO If the registration roller
roller is dirty, clean it. If it is
worn, replace it.
Faulty adjust- 6 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
ment of leading leading margin adjustment proce-
edge margin dures described on page 13-3 are
DC controller performed? NO Replace the DC con-
PCB troller PCB.

14 Blurring

Scanner wire 1 Is trouble occurring due to twisting or YES 1. Reattach the wire.
fraying of the wire that is wound onto 2. Replace the wire.
the wire pulley while the scanner is
moving?
Scanner rail 2 Gently move mirror1 mount manual- NO Clean the scanner rail
ly. Does it move smoothly? with alcohol. Then
apply a small amount of
lubricant.
tridge is replaced?
Printer unit 4 Is slipping or fracturing occurring YES Replace the gear.
main drive due to gear wear of the printer unit
assembly main drive assembly?
Check connec- 5 Check the connection of connector NO Reconnect the connec-
tor connection J304 on the DC controller PCB and tor.
(between the the laser scanner unit. Is the connec-
laser scanner tor firmly connected?
unit and the DC
controller PCB)
Laser scanner
unit 6 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
DC controller laser scanner unit is replaced?
PCB NO Replace the DC con-
troller PCB.
C. Operation malfunction countermeasures
1 No power

Power plug 1 Is the power plug connected? NO Connect the power
plug.
No power sup- 2 Is the prescribed voltage being sup- NO Explain to the customer
plied from out- plied to the outlet? that the trouble is not
let caused by the
machine.
Fuse 3 Are fuses F3, F4 or F5 on the DC YES Investigate why the
power supply PCB blown? fuse blew.
DC power sup- Replace the DC power
ply PCB supply PCB.
2 No LCD display on the control panel

Monitor/Display 1 Is the control panel display contrast NO Reset the contrast vol-
contrast adjustment volume properly set? ume.
Poor connector 2 Are connectors J41 and J42 on the NO Reconnect the connec-
contact control panel PCB and connector tors.
J203 on the image processor PCB
properly connected?
Control panel 3 Is the trouble resolved when the con- YES End
Image proces- trol panel is replaced? NO Replace the image

3 Paper does not pick up (Main unit cassette)

1 Is the “No paper message” lit? YES Refer to the “No paper
message does not go
out” section.
2 Is the pick-up roller rotating? NO Check from Item 6.
Cassette 3 Is the cassette set properly? NO Reset the cassette.
attachment
Paper set con- 4 Has too much paper been set in the NO Reset the paper.
dition cassette? Has the paper been set
properly?
Pick-up roller 5 Is the trouble caused by wear, abra- YES Replace the pick-up
sion or cracking on the pick-up roller roller.
surface?
Pick-up drive 6 Is the trouble caused by cracking or YES Replace damaged
assembly damage to the gears in the pick-up gears.
gears drive assembly?
Faulty connec- 7 Is connector J306 on the DC con- NO Reconnect the connec-
tor connection troller PCB properly connected? tor.
Pick-up sole- 8 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
noid pick-up solenoid is replaced?
PCB troller PCB.
4 Paper does not pick-up (multifeeder)

1 Is the “Supply REC. paper” indicator YES Refer to the “Supply
lit? REC. paper indicator
does not go out” section.
2 Is the multifeeder pick-up roller rotat- NO Check from Item 6.
ing?
dition multifeeder? Has the paper been set
properly?
Lifting plate 4 Does the lifting plate rise with the NO Check if the spring that
raising mecha- pick-up timing? lifts the lifting plate is
nism properly set.
Multifeeder 5 Make a copy with the multifeeder YES Check the multifeeder
pick-up roller pick-up. Is the pick-up roller rotating? pick-up roller. Clean the
surface of the roller. If
that does not resolve
the problem, replace
the pick-up roller.
Connector con- 6 Check the wiring between connector NO If the connectors are
nection J307 and the multifeeder pick-up making poor contact,
solenoid (SL302). reconnect them.
Multifeeder 7 Are the multifeeder pick-up drive YES Replace damaged
pick-up drive assembly gears damaged? gears.
assembly
PCB troller PCB.

5 Paper does not pick-up (cassette feeder)

1 Is the “Supply REC. paper” message YES Refer to the “Supply
lit? REC. paper message
does not go out” section.
2 Is the pick-up roller rotating? NO Check from Item 6.
Cassette 3 Is the cassette set properly? NO Reset the cassette.
attachment
dition cassette? Has the paper been set
properly?
Pick-up roller 5 Is the cassette feeder pick-up roller YES Clean the roller sur-
rotating? face. If the trouble is not
resolved, replace the
pick-up roller.
Fuse on the 6 Is the fuse on the feeder control YES Find the reason why
feeder con- PCB (FU601) blown? the fuse blew.
troller PCB
Connector con- 7 Are connectors J652 and J653 on NO Reconnect the connec-
nection the feeder controller PCB properly tors.
connected?
Pick-up sole- 8 Place the tester’s lead pin between YES Replace the pick-up
noid (SL651) connectors J653-2 (+) and J653-1 solenoid of the corre-
(-) on the feeder control PCB. Set sponding pick-up level.
the appropriate pick-up level. Press
the start key. Does the voltage go
from 0V to about 24V?
Feeder motor 9 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
(M651) feeder motor (M651) is replaced?
Feeder con- NO Replace the feeder
troller PCB control PCB.
6 Registration roller does not rotate

Connector con- 1 Check the wiring from connector NO If the trouble is a faulty
nection J307 to the registration clutch connection, reconnect
(CL302) the connector.
Registration 2 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
clutch (CL302) registration clutch (CL302) is
DC controller 3 replaced? NO Replace the DC con-
PCB troller PCB.
7 Scanner does not move forward

Scanner drive 1 Is the scanner drive wire properly NO Attach the wire proper-
wire attached? ly.
Foreign object 2 Is there any dirt on the scanner rail? NO Check that there is no
in the scanner Does it operate smoothly? dirt or debris on the
drive path scanner rail surface
and that nothing is
touching the scanner.
Poor connector 3 Check the wiring from connector NO If the trouble is caused
contact J214 on the image processor PCB to by a faulty connection,
the scanner motor. Is it normal? reconnect the connec-
tor.
Scanner motor 4 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
Image proces- scanner motor is replaced? NO Replace the image
8 Scanning lamp does not illuminate

Scanning lamp 1 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
scanning lamp is replaced?
Inverter PCB 2 Are the connections of CN1 and NO Connect firmly.
connector CN2 on the image processor PCB
secure?
Image proces- 3 Is connector J207 on the image NO Connect firmly.
sor PCB con- processor PCB properly connected?
nector
Inverter PCB 4 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
Image proces- inverter PCB is replaced? NO Replace the image

9 Speaker does not operate

Volume setting 1 Is the speaker volume in the user NO Reset the volume.
mode set appropriately?
Faulty connec- 2 Is connector J211 on the image NO Connect it properly.
tor connection processor PCB properly connected?
Speaker 3 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
Image proces- speaker is replaced? NO Replace the image
10 The “Set cartridge” indicator does not go out

tridge is replaced?
High-voltage 2 Is there any dirt, such as toner, on YES Clean the Main unit or
contact point the Main unit or cartridge high-volt- cartridge high-voltage
pin (Main unit age contact point pins? contact point pin.
and cartridge)
High-voltage 3 Is the DC controller PCB high-volt- YES Repair it.
contact point age contact point pin deformed?
pin (DC con-
troller PCB)
PCB troller PCB.
The “Supply REC. paper” indicator does not go out (Main unit and cassette
11
feeder)

Cassette 1 Is the cassette properly mounted? NO Reset the cassette.
attachment
Paper size 2 Is the cassette’s paper size lever out YES Repair the paper size
lever of alignment or damaged? lever.
Cassette lifting 3 Does the lifting plate rise when the NO Turn the cassette over
plate raising cassette is set into the Main unit? and check if the lifting
mechanism plate retaining roller is
damaged.
Paper supply 4 Is the paper supply sensor out of YES Replace the flag.
sensor flag alignment or damaged?
Connector con- 5 Check the following connector con- NO Reconnect the connec-
nection nections tors.
• When the problem cassette is the
Main unit cassette, check connec-
tors J302, J306 on the DC con-
troller PCB.
• When the problem cassette is a
cassette feeder cassette, check
connectors J654, J655 on the
feeder controller PCB
Are the connectors properly con-
nected?
Paper supply 6 Is the trouble resolved when the YES End
sensor paper supply sensor is replaced?
Cassette size 7 Is the trouble resolved when the cas- YES End
sensing switch sette size sensing switch is
DC controller replaced? NO If the problem cassette
PCB (feed con- is the Main unit cas-
troller PCB) sette, replace the DC
controller PCB. If the
problem cassette is a
cassette feeder cas-
sette, replace the corre-
sponding feeder con-
troller PCB.

12 The “Add paper” indicator does not go out (multifeeder)

Multifeeder 1 Is the multifeeder paper supply sen- NO Repair the multifeeder
paper supply sor flag operating properly? paper supply sensor
sensor flag flag.
Faulty connec- 2 Is the cable between connector J309 NO Reconnect the connec-
tor contact on the DC controller PCB and con- tors properly.
nector J501 on the sensor PCB
properly connected?
Sensor PCB 3 Is the trouble resolved when the sen- YES End
DC controller sor PCB is replaced? NO Replace the DC con-
PCB troller PCB.
13 JAM indicator does not go out

Sensor flag 1 Are the jam detection sensors below YES Repair the sensor. If it
out of alignment or damaged? is damaged, replace it.
• Pick-up sensor (PS303)
• Registration sensor (PS302)
• Leading edge sensor (PS301)
• Delivery sensor (PS304)
Sensor check 2 Check each sensor according to the NO Replace the faulty sen-
directions on page 13-127. Are they sor.
DC controller normal? YES Replace the DC con-
PCB (feeder troller PCB or the feed-
controller PCB) er controller PCB.
III. FAULTY FEEDING COUNTERMEASURES
A. Overview
The primary locations where paper jams occur in this machine are as shown below.
[1] Pick-up assembly [3] Fixing/Delivery area
[2] Feeder assembly
[3] [2]
[1]
Figure 13-301
Reference:
The figure above depicts a machine with a 3-level cassette feeder. The feeder con-
struction is the same on all levels. Accordingly, when only one cassette feeder level is
attached, the structure will be like the figure above with the bottom two levels
removed.

B. Copy paper jam
1 Pick-up assembly

1 Does the trouble occur at cassette NO Check from Item 13.
pick-up?
2 Is the pick-up roller of the selected NO Check from Item 11.
pick-up level rotating?
Cassette 3 Is the cassette set properly? NO Reset the cassette
properly.
4 Is the trouble resolved when a differ- NO Check from Item 7.
ent cassette is used?
5 Is the paper size lever set to the NO Reset the lever.
proper position?
6 Does the cassette’s lifting plate rise NO Check if the lifting plate
when the cassette is set into the retaining roller is dam-
Main unit? aged.
Paper 7 Has too much paper (limit 250 YES Advise the user to use
sheets) been set in the cassette? the proper amount of
paper.
8 Is the paper curled, wavy or other- YES Replace the paper.
wise altered? Advise the user of stor-
age methods.
9 Is the trouble resolved when paper YES Advise the user to use
recommended by Canon is used? the recommended
paper.
Roller wear 10 Check the surfaces of the pick-up, NO Clean the roller. If the
feeder and separation rollers of the trouble is not resolved,
selected pick-up level. Are they nor- replace the roller.
mal?
Connector con- 11 Check the status connection status NO Reconnect properly.
nection of the following. YES Replace the pick-up
Pick-up sole- Main unit pick-up cassette: solenoid.
noid (SL301) Cable between connector J306 on
the DC controller PCB and the pick-
up solenoid (SL301)
Cassette feeder:
Cable between connector J653 on
the feeder controller PCB and the
pick-up solenoid (SL651)
Connector con- 12 Check the cable connection between NO Repair the cable con-
nection connector J307 on the DC controller nection.
Pick-up/feeding PCB and the pick-up/feeding clutch YES Replace the pick-
clutch (CL301) (CL301). Is it normal? up/feeding clutch
(CL301).

13 Is the multifeeder pick-up roller rotat- NO Check from Item 16.
ing?
Multifeeder 14 Check the surface of the multifeeder NO Clean the roller. If it is
pick-up roller pick-up roller. Is it normal? worn or misshapen,
replace it.
Lifting plate 15 Does the multifeeder lifting plate rise NO Check that the lifting
retaining cam as the multifeeder pick-up roller plate retaining cam isn’t
rotates? out of alignment.
Multifeeder 16 Are the multifeeder pick-up drive YES Replace damaged
pick-up drive assembly gears damaged? gears.
assembly gear
Connector con- 17 Check the wiring from connector NO Reconnect the connec-
nection J307 on the DC controller PCB to tors.
the multifeeder pick-up solenoid
(SL302). Is it normal?
Multifeeder 18 Is the trouble resolved when the mul- YES End
pick-up sole- tifeeder pick-up solenoid (SL302) is
noid (SL302) replaced?
PCB troller PCB.

2 Feeder assembly

1 Is the registration roller rotating? NO Check from Item 7.
Copy paper 2 Is the trouble resolved when paper YES Explain to the user to
recommended by Canon is used? use the recommended
paper.
Registration 3 Check the surface of the registration NO Clean the dirt. If the
roller roller. Is it normal? roller is worn or mis-
shapen, replace it.
Registration 4 Is the nip width between the registra- NO Check if the engage-
roller engage- tion roller and the registration ment spring is
ment mecha- engagement roller normal? stretched out.
nism
Feeder belt 5 Is the feeder belt rotating? NO Check if the feeder belt
drive mecha- drive gear is damaged.
nism
Feeder belt 6 Check that no dirt is stuck to the NO Clean the belt surface.
feeder belt. Is it normal? If it is stretched out or
cracked, replace the
feeder unit.
Connector con- 7 Check the wiring from connector NO Reconnect the connec-
nection J307 on the DC controller PCB to tors.
the registration clutch (CL302). Is it
normal?
Registration 8 Is the trouble resolved when the reg- YES End
clutch (CL301) istration clutch (CL301) is replaced?
PCB troller PCB.
3 Fixing/Delivery Area

Fixing assem- 1 Check that there are no toner stains YES Clean the inlet guide.
bly inlet guide on the fixing assembly inlet guide. Is
it normal?
Connector con- 2 Check the connection of connector NO Reconnect the connec-
nection J308 on the DC controller PCB. Is it tor properly.
normal?
Fixing assem- 3 Is the trouble resolved when the fix- YES End
bly ing assembly is replaced?
PCB troller PCB.
C. Faulty feeding
1 Double feeding

Paper amount 1 Is the cassette overloaded with YES Explain the cassette
paper (over 250 sheets)? paper capacity to the
user.
Paper condition 2 Is the trouble resolved when new YES The paper may be
paper is used? damp. Instruct the user
on storage methods.
3 Does double feeding occur at cas- NO Check from Item 6.
sette pick-up?
Cassette claw 4 Is the cassette separation claw mis- YES Repair the claw. If the
shapen? problem is not
resolved, replace the
cassette.
Separation 5 Check the surface of the separation NO Clean the roller. If the
roller roller. Is it normal? trouble is not resolved,
replace the separation
roller.
Torque limiter YES Replace the torque lim-
iter.
Multifeeder 6 Is the surface of the multifeeder sep- YES Replace the pad.
separation pad aration pad or the separation sub-
Separation pad pad worn? NO Check if the separation
pressure spring pad pressure spring is
misshapen.
2. Creases

Pick-up assem- 1 Turn off the power source as the YES Check the feeding
bly paper is passing through the feeder assembly rollers and
assembly. Are there any creases or registration rollers.
skewing on the copy paper at this
time?
Paper condition 2 Is the trouble resolved when new YES The paper may be
paper is used? damp. Instruct the user
on storage methods.
3 Is the trouble resolved when paper YES Request that the user
recommended by Canon is used? use the recommended
paper.
Fixing unit inlet 4 Is there any toner or debris on the YES Clean the inlet guide.
guide fixing unit inlet guide?
Fixing unit NO Replace the fixing unit.

IV. ELECTRICAL PARTS POSITIONS/FUNCTIONS
A. Clutches, solenoids
SL303
SL301
CL302
CL301
SL302
SL651
Figure 13-401

Clutch, solenoid types

Symbol Name Code Function
Clutch CL301 Pick-up/feeder roller drive
CL
CL302 Registration roller drive
Solenoid SL301 Main unit pick-up roller drive
SL SL302 Multifeeder pick-up roller drive
SL303 Completion stamp drive
SL651 Cassette feeder pick-up roller drive
Table 13-401
B. Motor, fan
M701
M801
FM301
M601
M651
Figure 13-402

Motors, fans
Motor M601 Main motor
M
M701 Scanner motor
M651 Feeder motor (cassette feeder)
M801 Laser scanner motor
Fan FM301 Exhaust fan
Table 13-402
C. Sensors
PS101
PS102
PS306
PS305
PS501 PS302
PS303
PS301
PS304
PS652
PS651
Figure 13-403

Sensors
Photo- PS101 Scanner home position sensor
interuppter PS102 Copyboard cover open/close sensor
PS301 Paper leading edge sensor
PS302 Registration paper sensor
PS303 Pick-up sensor
PS304 Paper width sensor
PS305 Cassette paper supply sensor
PS306 Delivery sensor
PS501 Multifeeder paper supply sensor
PS651 Cassette feeder pick-up sensor
PS652 Cassette paper supply sensor (cassette feeder)
Table 13-403
D. Switches, lamps, miscellaneous
Speaker
H2
H1
SW301 LA20
TH1 SW101
SW201
SW651
Figure 13-404

Switches, lamps, miscellaneous

Switch SW101 Power supply switch
SW201 Cassette size sensor switch (Main unit)
SW301 Front cover open/close sensor switch
SW651 Cassette size sensor switch (cassette feeder)
Lamp LA20 Scanning lamp
Heater H1 Heater 1
H2 Heater2
Thermistor TH1 Thermistor
Speaker Speaker
Table 13-404
E. PCBs
[12] [14]
[13]
[15]
[2]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[8]
[1]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Figure 13-405

PCBs
Symbol Name Function
[1] Image processor PCB Image processing
[2] DC controller PCB DC load control
[3] Analog processor PCB CCD drive/analog image processing
[4] Control panel PCB Control panel control
[5] Control panel sub-PCB Control panel control
[6] Inverter PCB Scanning lamp illumination control
[7] Sensor PCB Test print switch/leading edge margin adjustment VR
[8] DC power supply PCB DC power source
[9] NCU PCB* Fax transmission control
[10] Modem PCB* Fax transmission signal modulation/demodulation
[11] Modular PCB* Telephone line connection
[12] Laser scanner motor driver Laser scanner motor drive
[13] Laser driver PCB Laser drive
[14] BD PCB Laser beam sensor
[15] Main motor driver Main motor drive
* Mounted only in machines with fax function installed.
Table 13-405
F. Variable resistor (VR)/LED/check pin listed by PCB plate

Only the varistors, LEDs and check pins that need to be checked during field service
are listed below.
Note:
1. Some LEDs leak a small amount of current even when normal, and therefore glow
faintly even when they are off. Do not mistake this phenomenon for their being ON.
2. VRs which may be adjusted in the field:
VRs which must not be adjusted in the field:
Note:
Check pins not listed below are only for factory use, and their adjustment and check
requires special tools and measurement instruments. Their adjustments require a
greater degree of accuracy and must not be touched during field service.

1. Image processor PCB
ON OFF
J208
JP1 J217
J205 J203
BAT1
J207 J212
J219
J216 J211
J214
J210 J204
J213
JP3
J209
BAT2
J201
J202
J215
Figure 13-406
• JP1 : Image memory backup battery (BAT1) electrification jumper plug

• JP3 : Data control (user data, service mode data) memory backup battery (BAT2)
electrification jumper plug
• BAT1 : Fax transmission image memory backup battery
• BAT2 : Control data (service mode data, user mode data) memory backup battery
2. DC controller PCB/ Sensor PCB
■ DC controller PCB
VR402 J311 J301 J305

J302 J310
J309
J308
J304
J307
J306
J303
JH401
T406
JH402 JH406 JH407

T403
Figure 13-407
VR402: For factory adjustment
■ Sensor PCB
VR401 J401
SW401
Figure 13-408
VR401 : VR for image leading edge margin adjustment
SW401 : Push switch for test print output

■ DC power supply PCB
J109
J106
J108
J111
J104
J107
Power switch
PN1
J105
AC inlet J103
Figure 13-409
3. Feeder controller PCB (Cassette feeder)
J652
J653
J655
J651
J654
J656
Figure 13-410

V. SERVICE MODE
A. Overview
The items which may be checked or set in the service mode are described below.
The service mode in this machine is structured along the lines of the conventional
facsimile service mode, and its contents and operation methods comply with that mode.
The service mode is divided into the following 13 blocks.
The service mode is divided into the 10 items (#1-#10) cited below. The test mode
(TEST MODE) is also included as a service mode item.
#1 SSSW: service software switch
Registration and settings for basic fax service functions such as error manage-
ment, echo countermeasures, communications trouble countermeasures, etc.
#2 MENU: menu switch settings
Registration and settings for functions required at installation, such as NL equaliz-
er and output levels.
#3 NUMERIC Param: numeric parameter settings
Numeric Parameters for various conditions for the T1 Timer setting function, etc.,
can be input.
#4A SPECIAL: special settings (some settings can be adjusted at the time of servic-
ing)
#4B NCU: special settings (Do not change the settings)
#4C ISDN: Not adjustable
#5 TYPE: Country version settings
When the country version settings are programmed, the standard values for each
country are entered in the parameters for #1 SSSW-#4 NCU at one time.
#6 SCANNER: (some settings can be adjusted at the time of servicing)
When setting this item in the field, do not change the settings for items other than
8: CCD, when adjusting image positioning, as this may result in a deterioration of
scanned image quality.
#7 PRINTER: printer function settings
Registration and setting items for basic service functions, such as conditions for
reducing reception images.
#8 CLEAR: data initialization mode settings
Initializes data to initial setting values.
#9 ROM: ROM management
Displays the version number of ROM DIMM on the image processor PCB.
#10 CS SET: mirror 1 mount initial setting
Moves the mirror 1 mount to the position set at the time of shipping from the facto-
ry.
TEST MODE: Runs tests. (See page 13-111 for details)
B. Operating Procedures
The service mode operates according to the flow displayed in the chart below.
MANUAL RX READY TO SEND 13/01 ’99
WED 09:04
=
STANDARD STANDARD TEXT SHEET
RESOLUTION DENSITY IMAGEQUALITY BOOK SENDING
1) Select user mode

Press the data registration key.
SELECT AN ITEM 01 DATA REGISTRATION

02 TEL# REGISTRATION
1) Select service mode

Press the # key on the user mode screen.
SERVICE MODE
#1 SSSW
3) Select menu item

Press the up ▲ or down ▼ shift key.
SERVICE MODE
# 3 NUMERIC Param.
Press the set key.
#3 NUMERIC Param.
001: 0
4) Enter or set data

Input data and press the set key.
#3 NUMERIC Param.
001: 0
#3 NUMERIC Param.
002: 10
When the stop key is pressed, the service mode is exited.
Figure 13-501

C. Service mode menu list

Characters in bold face show initial setting values.
Service data
#1 SSSW SW01 Error/copy management

(service software switch settings)
SW02 Network connection condition setting
SW03 Echo countermeasure setting
SW04 Communication trouble countermeasure setting
SW05 Standard function (DIS signal) setting
SW06 Scanning condition setting
SW07 Closed network connection function setting
SW08 Closed network connection ID setting
SW09 Display indicator setting
SW10 Reserved
SW11 Reserved
SW12 1 page timer setting
SW13 Reserved
SW14 Standard paper size classification
SW15 Reserved
SW16 No recording paper indicator setting
SW17 Reserved
SW18 Reserved
SW19 Reserved
SW20 Reserved
SW21 Reserved
SW22 Reserved
SW23 Reserved
SW24 Reserved
SW25 Report display function setting
SW26 Transmission function setting
SW27 Reserved
SW28 V.8, v.34 procedure setting
SW29 Reserved
SW50 Reserved
Figure 13-502
Note:
SW10, 11, 13, 15, 17-23, 27 and 29-50 are Reserved. Do not change these settings.
#2 MENU 001: Reserved

(menu switch settings) 002: Reserved
003: Reserved
004: Reserved
005: ON NL equalizer setting
OFF
006: DIAL Phone line monitor setting

SERVICEMAN [1]
SERVICEMAN [2]
OFF
007: 8dBm Output level setting

9dBm
10dBm
14dBm
15dBm
008: 3429 V.34 modulation speed upper limit

3200
3000
2800
2743
2400
009: 33.6 V.34 data speed upper limit

31.2
28.8
26.4
24.0
21.6
19.2
16.8
14.4
12.0
9.6
7.2
4.8
2.4
010:
020: Items 10-20: Reserved
Figure 13-503
Note:
No. 01-04, 10-20 are Reserved. Do not change these settings.

Range setting
#3 NUMERIC Param. 001: Reserved
(numeric parameter settings) 002: 1 to 99 RTN signal output condition (1) setting
003: 2 to 9 RTN signal output condition (2) setting
004: 1 to 99 RTN signal output condition (3) setting
005: 1 to 60 NCC pause time setting (before ID code)
006: 1 to 60 NCC pause time setting (after ID code)
007: Reserved
008: Reserved
009: 0 to 20 Direct mail prevention function: set number of digits of
telephone number to be checked
010: 0 to 9999 T0 timer
011: 0 to 9999 T1 timer
012: Reserved
013: 500 to 3000 T30 EOL timer
014: Reserved
015: 0 to 999 Hooking Detection time setting
016: Reserved
026: Reserved
027: (15 to 25) x 10 V.21 low-speed command preamble detection time
028: Reserved
080: Reserved
Figure 13-504
Caution:
No. 001, 007, 008, 012, 014, 016-026 and 028-080 are Reserved. Do not change the
settings.
#4A SPECIAL SW01 Data encoding method/ Canon original speed protocol setting
SW04 Completion tone setting
#4B NCU 1. TONE / PULSE

(NCU settings) 2. DIAL TONE
3. 2nd DIAL TONE
4. BUSY TONE 0
5. BUSY TONE 1
6. REORDER TONE
7. MULTI
8. AUTO RX
9. CNG DETECT
10. RKEY
11. PBX DIAL TONE
12. PBX BUSY TONE
#4C ISDN
#5 TYPE EUROPE, UK, SWEDEN, SWISS, AUSTRIA, DENMARK,

(type setting)
NORWAY, HOLLAND, BELGIUM, AUSTRALIA, FINLAND,
N.Z., ITALY, SPAIN, PORTUGAL, IRELAND, HONG KONG,
MALAYSIA, HUNGARY, SAF, CHINA, GERMAN, FRANCE,
SINGAPORE, CZECH, SLOVENIA
Figure 13-505
#4A SPECIAL
Do not change settings for items other than SW01 and SW04.
#4B NCU (NCU setting)

Do not change the settings.
#4C ISDN
Do not change the settings.
#5 TYPE
When the country version settings are programmed, the standard values for each
country are entered in the parameters for #1 SSSW – #4 NCU at one time.

#6 SCANNER 1. Bit SW
(scanner function settings)
2. SLICE
3. GAMMA
4. Numeric
5. Output Adjust
6. LUT 1 fno
7. LUT 2 adj
8. CCD
9. BOOK
10. MODEL
#7 PRINTER #1 SSSW SW01 Reserved

(printer function settings) SW02 Reserved
SW03 Reserved
SW04 Reserved
SW05 Reduction. Cassette selection setting
SW06 Reduction setting
SW07
SW 07 to 20; Reserved
SW20
#2 NUMERIC Param 01: Printed image deletion range when

reception a long document image
02: Reserved
03: Reserved
04: Leading edge margin
05: Trailing edge margin
Items 06 to 30; Reserved
30:
#3 PRINT COUNT
#4 PRINTER RESET YES= (*)

NO= (#)
Figure 13-506
Note:
#6 SCANNER (Scanner function settings)
The quality of scanned images may be adversely affected, depending on this setting.
8.CCDmay be changed when adjusting the image position, but do not adjust any
other item settings.
#7 PRINTER (Printer function settings)
SW01-04, 07-20, No. 02, 03, and 06-30 are Reserved. Do not change the settings.
#8 CLEAR TEL Dial registration mode, user data memory

(data initialization mode settings) management initialization
USER SW User data (other than memory management), #1-#3
initialization
SERVICE SW User data #6, #7 initialization
NCU #4A, #4B initialization

ISDN #4C initialization
SERVICE DATA System dump list initialization
COUNTER 001: Number of printed pages input
002: Number of scanned pages input
REPORT Activity management report initialization
ALL All data initialization
#9 ROM MAIN : image processor Version number display

(ROM management) PCB ROM
#10 CS SET Initializes mirror mount to position

(mirror mount initialization setting)
set at time of shipping
TEST MODE [1] to [7], [9]
Figure 13-507

D. SSSW Default Setting
SSSW Default Setting
TYPE EUROPE U.K. SWEDEN SWISS AUSTRIA DENMARK
#1 SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000
SW02 00000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 10000000 10000000 10000010 10000010 10000010 10000000
SW05 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000010 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW21 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW22 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW26 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW27 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
~
SW50 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ~

00000000
#2 MENU
005: OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
006: DIAL DIAL DIAL DIAL DIAL DIAL
007: 10 10 10 10 6 10
008: 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429
009: 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6
010: 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz
TYPE NORWAY HOLLAND BELGIUM AUSTRALIA FINLAND N.Z.
#1 SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000
SW02 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 10000010 10000010 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW05 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW21 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW22 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW26 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW27 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
~
SW50 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
#2 MENU
007: 10 10 10 12 10 13
008: 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429
009: 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6
010: 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz

TYPE ITALY SPAIN PORTUGAL IRELAND HONG KONG MALAYSIA
#1 SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000
SW02 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 10000010 10000010 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW05 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000010 00000010
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000
SW21 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW22 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW26 10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW27 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
~
~
SW50 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
#2 MENU
007: 6 10 10 10 10 10
008: 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429
009: 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6
010: 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz
TYPE HUNGARY SAF CHINA GERMAN FRANCE SINGAPORE
#1 SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000
SW02 10000000 10000000 00000000 10000000 10000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 10000000 10000000 10000000 00000010 00000010 10000000
SW05 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000001 00000001 00000000 00000001 00000001 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000100 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000000 00000000 00000010 00000000 00000000 00000010
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW21 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW22 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000001 00000000
SW26 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW27 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
~
~
SW50 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
#2 MENU
007: 10 10 13 10 10 12
008: 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429 3429
009: 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6
010: 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz 25Hz

TYPE CZECH SLOVENIA
#1 SSSW
SW01 00010000 00010000
SW02 10000000 10000000
SW03 00000000 00000000
SW04 10000000 10000000
SW05 00000000 00000000
SW06 10000000 10000000
SW07 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000001 00000001
SW09 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000010 00000010
SW13 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000000 00000000
SW15 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000011 00000011
SW17 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000
SW21 00000000 00000000
SW22 00000000 00000000
SW23 00000000 00000000
SW24 00000000 00000000
SW25 00000000 00000000
SW26 00000000 00000000
SW27 00000000 00000000
SW28 00000000 00000000
SW29 00000000 00000000
~
SW50 00000000 00000000
#2 MENU
005: OFF OFF
006: DIAL DIAL
007: 10 10
008: 3429 3429
009: 33.6 33.6
010: 25Hz 25Hz
#3 NUMERIC
Param
002: 10 10 10 10 10 10
003: 15 15 15 15 15 15
004: 12 12 12 12 12 12
005: 4 4 4 4 4 4
006: 4 1 4 4 4 4
009: 6 6 6 6 6 6
010: 5500 5500 6000 8500 5500 5500
011: 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
015: 120 120 120 120 120 120
016: 4 2 4 2 4 4
017: 100 40 100 100 100 75
018: 0 20 0 0 0 0
019: 400 200 400 400 400 250
020: 100 40 100 100 100 100
021: 0 20 0 0 0 0
022: 400 200 400 400 400 400
023: 4 4 4 4 4 4
024: 10 10 10 10 10 10
025: 60 60 60 60 60 60
026: 4 4 4 4 4 4
030: 20 20 20 20 20 20
051: 0 0 0 0 0 0
052: 0 0 0 0 0 0
053: 0 0 0 0 0 0
054: 0 0 0 0 0 0
055: 0 0 0 0 0 0
#4A SPECIAL
SW01 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
#5 TYPE EUROPE U.K. SWEDEN SWISS AUSTRIA DENMARK

TYPE NORWAY HOLLAND BELGIUM AUSTRALIA FINLAND N.Z.
#3 NUMERIC
Param
002: 10 10 10 10 10 10
003: 15 15 15 15 15 15
004: 12 12 12 12 12 12
005: 4 4 4 4 4 4
006: 4 4 4 4 4 4
009: 6 6 6 6 6 6
010: 5500 6000 5500 5500 5500 5500
011: 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
015: 120 120 120 120 120 120
016: 2 4 2 4 4 2
017: 30 100 100 100 100 40
018: 30 0 0 0 0 20
019: 400 400 300 400 400 200
020: 30 100 100 100 100 40
021: 30 0 0 0 0 20
022: 400 400 300 400 400 200
023: 4 4 4 4 4 4
024: 10 10 10 10 12 10
025: 60 60 60 60 60 60
026: 4 4 4 4 4 4
030: 20 20 20 20 20 20
#4A SPECIAL
SW01 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
#5 TYPE NORWAY HOLLAND BELGIUM AUSTRALIA FINLAND N.Z.
TYPE ITALY SPAIN PORTUGAL IRELAND HONG KONG MALAYSIA
#3 NUMERIC
Param
002: 10 10 10 10 10 10
003: 15 15 15 15 15 15
004: 12 12 12 12 12 12
005: 4 15 4 4 4 4
006: 4 3 4 4 1 4
009: 6 6 6 6 6 6
010: 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500
011: 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
015: 120 120 120 120 120 120
016: 4 4 4 4 4 4
017: 30 150 40 40 40 100
018: 30 0 20 20 20 0
019: 400 300 200 200 200 400
020: 30 40 40 40 40 100
021: 30 10 20 20 20 0
022: 400 400 200 200 200 400
023: 4 4 4 4 4 4
024: 10 10 10 10 10 10
025: 60 60 60 60 60 60
026: 4 4 4 4 4 4
030: 20 20 20 20 20 20
#4A SPECIAL
SW01 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
#5 TYPE ITALY SPAIN PORTUGAL IRELAND HONG KONG MALAYSIA

#3 NUMERIC
Param
002: 10 10 10 8 8 10
003: 15 15 15 15 15 15
004: 12 12 12 6 12 12
005: 4 4 4 4 4 4
006: 4 4 4 4 4 4
009: 6 6 6 6 6 6
010: 5500 3500 4500 5500 4000 5500
011: 3500 3500 3500 3500 3800 3500
015: 120 120 120 120 120 120
016: 4 4 4 4 4 4
017: 100 40 100 40 30 100
018: 0 20 0 20 30 0
019: 400 200 400 200 400 400
020: 100 40 100 100 150 100
021: 0 20 0 0 0 0
022: 400 200 400 200 300 400
023: 4 4 4 9 6 4
024: 10 10 10 10 10 10
025: 60 60 60 60 60 60
026: 5 5 5 5 5 5
030: 20 20 20 20 20 20
#4A SPECIAL
SW01 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
#5 TYPE HUNGARY SAF CHINA GERMAN FRANCE SINGAPORE
TYPE CZECH SLOVENIA
#3 NUMERIC
Param
002: 10 10
003: 15 15
004: 12 12
005: 4 4
006: 4 4
009: 6 6
010: 5500 5500
011: 3500 3500
015: 120 120
016: 4 4
017: 100 100
018: 0 0
019: 400 400
020: 100 100
021: 0 0
022: 400 400
023: 4 4
024: 10 10
025: 60 60
026: 4 4
030: 20 20
#4A SPECIAL
SW01 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000
#5 TYPE CZECH SLOVENIA

#7 PRINTER
SW01 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW02 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000101 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW05 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW06 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
001: 15 15 15 15 15 15
002: 0 0 0 0 0 0
003: 0 0 0 0 0 0
004: 4 4 4 4 4 4
005: 7 7 7 7 7 7
006: 0 0 0 0 0 0
007: 0 0 0 0 0 0
008: 0 0 0 0 0 0
009: 0 0 0 0 0 0
010: 0 0 0 0 0 0
011: 0 0 0 0 0 0
012: 0 0 0 0 0 0
013: 0 0 0 0 0 0
014: 0 0 0 0 0 0
015: 11 11 11 11 11 11
016: 10 10 10 10 10 10
017: 10 10 10 10 10 10
018: 1 1 1 1 1 1
019: 1 1 1 1 1 1
020: 0 0 0 0 0 0
021: 0 0 0 0 0 0
022: 0 0 0 0 0 0
023: 0 0 0 0 0 0
024: 0 0 0 0 0 0
025: 0 0 0 0 0 0
026: 0 0 0 0 0 0
027: 0 0 0 0 0 0
028: 0 0 0 0 0 0
029: 0 0 0 0 0 0
030: 0 0 0 0 0 0
TYPE NORWAY HOLLAND BELGIN AUSTRALIA FINLAND N.Z.
#7 PRINTER
SW01 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW02 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW05 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW06 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
001: 15 15 15 15 15 15
002: 0 0 0 0 0 0
003: 0 0 0 0 0 0
004: 4 4 4 4 4 4
005: 7 7 7 7 7 7
006: 0 0 0 0 0 0
007: 0 0 0 0 0 0
008: 0 0 0 0 0 0
009: 0 0 0 0 0 0
010: 0 0 0 0 0 0
011: 0 0 0 0 0 0
012: 0 0 0 0 0 0
013: 0 0 0 0 0 0
014: 0 0 0 0 0 0
015: 11 11 11 11 11 11
016: 10 10 10 10 10 10
017: 10 10 10 10 10 10
018: 1 1 1 1 1 1
019: 1 1 1 1 1 1
020: 0 0 0 0 0 0
021: 0 0 0 0 0 0
022: 0 0 0 0 0 0
023: 0 0 0 0 0 0
024: 0 0 0 0 0 0
025: 0 0 0 0 0 0
026: 0 0 0 0 0 0
027: 0 0 0 0 0 0
028: 0 0 0 0 0 0
029: 0 0 0 0 0 0
030: 0 0 0 0 0 0

TYPE ITALY SPAIN PORTUGAL IRELAND HONGKONG MALAYSIA
#7 PRINTER
SW01 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW02 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000101 00000101
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW05 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW06 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
001: 15 15 15 15 15 15
002: 0 0 0 0 0 0
003: 0 0 0 0 0 0
004: 4 4 4 4 4 4
005: 7 7 7 7 7 7
006: 0 0 0 0 0 0
007: 0 0 0 0 0 0
008: 0 0 0 0 0 0
009: 0 0 0 0 0 0
010: 0 0 0 0 0 0
011: 0 0 0 0 0 0
012: 0 0 0 0 0 0
013: 0 0 0 0 0 0
014: 0 0 0 0 0 0
015: 11 11 11 11 11 11
016: 10 10 10 10 10 10
017: 10 10 10 10 10 10
018: 1 1 1 1 1 1
019: 1 1 1 1 1 1
020: 0 0 0 0 0 0
021: 0 0 0 0 0 0
022: 0 0 0 0 0 0
023: 0 0 0 0 0 0
024: 0 0 0 0 0 0
025: 0 0 0 0 0 0
026: 0 0 0 0 0 0
027: 0 0 0 0 0 0
028: 0 0 0 0 0 0
029: 0 0 0 0 0 0
030: 0 0 0 0 0 0
#7 PRINTER
SW01 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW02 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000 00000101 00000000 00000000 00000101
SW04 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW05 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000 10000000
SW06 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100
SW07 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW13 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW15 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW17 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
001: 15 15 15 15 15 15
002: 0 0 0 0 0 0
003: 0 0 0 0 0 0
004: 4 4 4 4 4 4
005: 7 7 7 7 7 7
006: 0 0 0 0 0 0
007: 0 0 0 0 0 0
008: 0 0 0 0 0 0
009: 0 0 0 0 0 0
010: 0 0 0 0 0 0
011: 0 0 0 0 0 0
012: 0 0 0 0 0 0
013: 0 0 0 0 0 0
014: 0 0 0 0 0 0
015: 11 11 11 11 11 11
016: 10 10 10 10 10 10
017: 10 10 10 10 10 10
018: 1 1 1 1 1 1
019: 1 1 1 1 1 1
020: 0 0 0 0 0 0
021: 0 0 0 0 0 0
022: 0 0 0 0 0 0
023: 0 0 0 0 0 0
024: 0 0 0 0 0 0
025: 0 0 0 0 0 0
026: 0 0 0 0 0 0
027: 0 0 0 0 0 0
028: 0 0 0 0 0 0
029: 0 0 0 0 0 0
030: 0 0 0 0 0 0

TYPE CZECH SLOVENIA
#7 PRINTER
SW01 00000000 00000000
SW02 00000000 00000000
SW03 00000000 00000000
SW04 00000000 00000000
SW05 10000000 10000000
SW06 00000100 00000100
SW07 00000000 00000000
SW08 00000000 00000000
SW09 00000000 00000000
SW10 00000000 00000000
SW11 00000000 00000000
SW12 00000000 00000000
SW13 00000000 00000000
SW14 00000000 00000000
SW15 00000000 00000000
SW16 00000000 00000000
SW17 00000000 00000000
SW18 00000000 00000000
SW19 00000000 00000000
SW20 00000000 00000000
001: 15 15
002: 0 0
003: 0 0
004: 4 4
005: 7 7
006: 0 0
007: 0 0
008: 0 0
009: 0 0
010: 0 0
011: 0 0
012: 0 0
013: 0 0
014: 0 0
015: 11 11
016: 10 10
017: 10 10
018: 1 1
019: 1 1
020: 0 0
021: 0 0
022: 0 0
023: 0 0
024: 0 0
025: 0 0
026: 0 0
027: 0 0
028: 0 0
029: 0 0
030: 0 0
E. Parameter settings
1. SSSW settings
The registration and setting items on this switch are composed of 8 bit switches.
The bit switches indicated on the display are as shown below. Each bit is set to 0 or 1.
t2
t1
t7
t6
t5
t4
t3
t0
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
SW01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Figure 13-508
Information about the bit switches is displayed in the table below.
Indicates setting is 0.
Indicates setting is 1.
Indicates that this is

the initial value.
Bit Function 1 0
0 Service error code Output Not output
1 Error dump list Output Not output
2 Secret ID number when confidential Do not input Input
reception image is forwarded
according to confirmation of memory
contents
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Date & Time setting restriction Setting restricted Setting possible
7 Restrict user settings Setting possible Setting restricted
Table 13-501

#1 SSSW-SW01: Error, copy management
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 Error code for service engineer Output Do not output
1 Error dump list Output Do not output
Secret code function when confidential recep-
2 tion image is forwarded by to the memory man- Do not input Input
agement function
01 3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Date & Time setting restriction Setting restricted Setting possible
7 Restrict user settings Setting possible Setting restricted
Table 13-502
[Bit 0]
Service error code output selection. When “output” is selected, the service error code is
indicated on the display and in the report.
[Bit 1]
Error dump list output selection. When “output” is selected, an error dump list is
attached to the error transmission report and the reception results report at the time of
the error, and output.
[Bit 2]
Selects whether or not to input the secret code when confidential reception images are
forwarded by using the memory reference button, or when the images are deleted or
printed. When “do not input” is selected, the confidential reception image will be for-
warded, deleted or printed, without the secret code being input.
[Bit 6]
When “Setting restricted” is selected, certain items can not be set by the user, depend-
ing on the country setting.
When “Setting possible” is selected, all items are user selectable, regardless of the
country type setting.
[Bit 7]
When “setting restricted” is selected, certain items can not be set by the user, depend-
ing on the country setting.
When “setting possible” is selected, all items are user selectable, regardless of the
country type setting.
#1 SSSW-SW02: Network connection condition settings
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
Startup when there is faulty memory clear

0 Restrict Do not restrict
report output
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
02 3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
Table 13-503
[Bit 0]
Selects whether or not to go into standby when the memory clear list is not output when
the machine is powered on, after an error occurs. After the screen data are cleared by
selecting “Prohibit”, turn on the power and clear the error. Then the machine will go into
standby after the memory clear report is output.
Reference:
Actions when “Prohibit” is selected
a) Error occurrence: will not receive at this time even if a transmission arrives.
b) After error clearing: memory clear report is output automatically. When an error
occurs during output, return to action a).

#1 SSSW-SW03: Echo correction settings
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 Reserved
1 High-speed transmission echo protect tone Send Do not send
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Transmission mode: international transmission (1) Yes No
03
Transmission mode: international transmission (2),
5 Yes No
or international transmission (3)
International International
6 Transmission mode
transmission (3) transmission (2)
7 Tonal signal before CED signal transmission Send Do not respond
Table 13-504
[Bit 1]
Selects whether or not to transmit a echo protect tone with the high-speed V.29 (baud
rate is 9600bps or 7200 bps) modem signal.
When errors occur frequently during transmission due to telephone line conditions,
select echo protect tone “send”. When “send” is selected, an unmodulated carrier is
transmitted as a synchronising signal before sending the image at 200ms intervals.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur at transmission due to telephone line conditions:
##100, ##104, ##281, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##760, ##765
[Bit 4,5,6]
Selects transmission mode; international transmission (1), international transmission (2)
or international transmission (3).
When errors occur frequently due to echo when sending transmissions overseas, set
the transmission mode by dial registration or service software switch.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur at transmission due to echo
##005, ##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##210, ##280, ##281, ##283, ##284, ##750,
##760, ##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##794
Settings at dial registration (user level):

When registering the 1-touch dial or coded speed dial transmission mode, set to
international transmission (1). If the error is not resolved, set to international transmis-
sion (2) and international transmission (3), in that order. Transmission modes set for 1-
touch dial or coded speed dial override service software switch settings.
When transmission modes are selected by these switches, international transmis-
sion mode can also be set using transmission via the numeric key pad. Refer to the
chart below for settings for transmission modes.
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Transmission mode
International transmission (1) * 0 0 1 0 0 * 0
International transmission (1): ignores the first DIS signal sent by the reception
machine.
International transmission (2): Sends a 1850Hz tonal signal at the time of DIS signal
transmission.
International transmission (2): Sends a 1650Hz tonal signal at the time of DIS signal
transmission.
Table 13-505
[Bit 7]
Selects whether or not to send a 1080Hz tonal signal before sending the CED signal.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur at reception
#005, ##101, ##106, ##107, ##114, ##200, ##201, ##790

#1 SSSW-SW04 communications trouble remedy setting
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 Reserved
1 CI signal frequency check Check Do not check
2 Number of protocol signal’s final flag sequences 2 1
High-speed
3 Reception mode after CFR signal transmission High-speed
/ low-speed
04
Time for which low-speed signal is ignored after
4 1500ms 700ms
CFR signal transmission
5 CI signal frequency check when PBX is set Check Do not check

6 CNG signal at manual transmission Do not send Send
7 CED signal at manual reception Do not send Send
Table 13-506
[Bit 1]
Select whether or not to check the CI signal frequency upon automatic reception.
If “check” is selected, the upper and lower limits of the CI signal frequency will be
checked when a transmission arrives. The fax will switch to automatic reception only
when both signals are within the standard range.
[Bit2]
You can select the number of final flag sequences for the protocol signal (transmission
speed is 300 bps).
When the procedure signal sent out by this unit is not properly received by the destina-
tion machine, set the number to 2.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur upon transmission
##100, ##280, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##754, ##755, ##758, ##759, ##760,
##763, ##764, ##765, ##768, ##769, ##770, ##773, ##775, ##778, ##780, ##783,
##785, ##788
[Bit 3]
Selects the reception mode after CFR signal transmission.
When errors due to the telephone line condition occur frequently in reception, select
“high-speed” reception mode and set the user data ECM reception setting off.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur in reception due to telephone line trouble
##107, ##114, ##201
Change Bit 4 before changing this bit. If errors continue to occur, change this bit.
When “high-speed” is selected, only high-speed (image) signals will be received after
CFR signal transmission.
[Bit 4]
Selects the length of time to ignore a low-speed signals after CFR signal transmission.
When the condition of the telephone line is not good and it is difficult to receive image
signals, set to 1500 ms.
[Bit 5]
Selects whether or not to perform CI signal frequency check during PSTN/PBX in user
data set to PBX. (This switch is only compatible with 230V machines.)
[Bit 6]
Selects whether or not to transmit a CNG signal in manual transmission.
When errors occur frequently, check whether “send” CNG signal is selected.
[Bit7]
Selects whether or not to transmit a CED signal in manual reception.
When the other party’s machine does not start transmission when manual reception is
being performed, select “send”.

#1 SSSW-SW05 Standard function (DIS signal) setting
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 Reserved
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Bit transmission of DIS signal bit 33 and later Prohibit Do not prohibit
05
4 Cut paper declaration by DIS signal A4/B4 size Any size
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
Table 13-507
[Bit 3]
Bit transmission of DIS signal bit 33 and later.
Note:
When “prohibit” is selected, it becomes impossible to use superfine reception and the
memory box function of other companies' machines.
[Bit 4]
Selects that the paper declared by the DIS signal is cut paper. When receiving long doc-
uments, select A4/B4 size to have the document divided by the transmitting machine.
MEMO:
There are cases in which long documents are not divided, depending on the type of
machine which is transmitting.
#1 SSSW-SW06: Reading condition settings
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 Reserved
1 Reserved
2 Document length restriction Do not restriction 1 meter or less
3 Reserved
06
4 Document scanning width Letter A4 Prohibit
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Halftone and superfine Allow Prohibit
Table 13-508
[Bit 2]
Selects the document length limit.
[Bit 4]
Selects the document scanning width. When “letter” is selected, letter size documents
are read at letter width (214 mm).
[Bit 7]
Selects whether or not superfine mode can be set when an image quality mode other
than TEXT mode is selected.

#1 SSSW-SW07: closed connection function setting
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 Setting prohibited
07
6 Closed network connection reception Yes No
7 Closed network connection transmission Õ No
Table 13-509
The closed network connection function is a function for communication only with
specified faxes. This function is only available for specified faxes with machines that
have the closed network connection function.
[Bit 6]
Selects whether or not to use closed network connection reception function reception.
When you wish to receive a fax only from a specified machine, select “yes” and set the
same ID as the transmitting machine. The ID setting is set by the SW08 bit switch 8.
[Bit 7]
Selects whether or not to use closed network connection transmission function trans-
mission.
When you wish to send a fax only to a specified machine, select “yes” and set the same
ID as the reception machine.
The ID setting is set by the SW08 bit switch 8.
If the ID does not match that of the reception machine, an error code (#039) will be dis-
played.
#1 SSSW-SW08: closed connection ID settingClosed network connection ID bit 7
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 Closed network connection ID bit 0
08
Table 13-510
When using closed network connection function, set these switches to the same ID
as the other party’s machine.

#1 SSSW-SW09: Display indicator settings
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 Reserved
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
09
4 Reserved
5 Consecutive polling reception Yes No
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
Table 13-511
[Bit 5]
Selects whether or not to perform consecutive polling reception.
Yes: calls until the stop key is pressed.
No: consecutive polling reception is not performed.
#1 SSSW-SW12: Page timer settings
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 Page time out interval when transmitting (none 1 0
1 when set to image mode) 1 0
2 Page time out interval when transmitting (when 1 0
3 set to image mode and A4 document mode) 1 0
12 4 1 0
Page time out interval when receiving
5 1 0
6 Reserved
Separate transmission and reception page timer

7 Set Do not set
settings
Table 13-512
These switches can set the page timer. When transmission or reception takes more
than 32 minutes on this machine, communications are stopped. When the timer is set to
other than 32 minutes, refer to the following page and set the appropriate time.
When “do not set” is selected for Bit 7, the one page time out interval is controlled by
Bit 0 and Bit 0, regardless of the communication mode.

Transmission/reception time out interval

Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Time out interval
8 minutes 0 * * * * * 0 0
16 minutes 0 * * * * * 0 0
32 minutes 0 * * * * * 1 0
64 minutes 0 * * * * * 1 1
Time out interval when transmitting (no image mode setting)

Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Time out interval
8 minutes 1 * * * * * 0 0
16 minutes 1 * * * * * 0 1
32 minutes 1 * * * * * 1 0
64 minutes 1 * * * * * 1 1
Time out interval when transmitting (image mode AA)

Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Time out interval
8 minutes 1 * * * 0 0 * *
16 minutes 1 * * * 0 1 * *
32 minutes 1 * * * 1 0 * *
64 minutes 1 * * * 1 1 * *
Time out interval when receiving

Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Time out interval
8 minutes 1 * 0 0 * * * *
16 minutes 1 * 0 1 * * * *
32 minutes 1 * 1 0 * * * *
64 minutes 1 * 1 1 * * * *
Table 13-513
#1 SSSW-SW14: Standard paper size classification
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 1 0
Standard paper size classification
1 1 0
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
14
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
Table 13-514
[Bit0. Bit1]
The combination of Bit0 and Bit1 allows the standard paper size classification to be
changed.
Bit0 Bit1 Standard paper size classification

0 0 AB series
1 1
0 1 INCH series
1 0 A series
By setting this switch, the document paper size display and setting, and automatic iden-
tification, etc., are used to judge the standard paper size.

#1 SSSW-SW16: Add paper indicator setting
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
No paper in No paper of
0 Add paper indicator judgment conditions
one location the same size
Do not include Include in
1 Multi-feeder at time of add paper judgment in judgment judgment
conditions conditions
2 Reserved
25
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
Table 13-515
[Bit 0]
Selects add paper judgment conditions.
No paper in one location: all cassettes are subject to judgment
No paper of same size: When there is paper remaining of the same size as the paper
that was used up, the add paper indicator does not display.
[Bit 1]
Selects user mode>01 data registration>05 printer settings>06 name stack size>02 on.
Selects whether or not to include the multi-feeder in the add paper judgment conditions
when set to the size of paper used in the multi-feeder.
Effective when SW16 Bit 0 is 0.
#1 SSSW-SW25: Report display function settings
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
Transmission telephone numbers displayed in Other party’s Calling party’s

0
the report number number
1 Other party abbreviations displayed in the report Leave Clear

2 Reserved
25 3 Message language switch Display Do not display
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
Table 13-516
[Bit 0]
Selects transmitting telephone numbers displayed in the report after transmission has
ended.
Calling party’s number: displays the Calling side’s telephone number in
the report.
Destination party’s telephone number: displays the telephone number (CSI signal data)
sent from the destination party’s machine in the
report.
MEMO:
Even if calling party’s number is selected, when the call is not dialed by one-touch
dialling or speed dialling, the telephone number (CSI data signal) sent by the other
party’s machine is displayed in the report.
[Bit 1]
Selects other party’s abbreviation displayed in the report after transmission has ended.
Registration abbreviation: displays the other party’s abbreviation entered in 1-
touch dialling and coded speed dialling in the report.
Other party’s machine’s abbreviation: displays the abbreviation (NSF signal data) sent
from the other party’s machine in the report.
MEMO:
Even if “Registration abbreviation” is selected, when the other party’s abbreviation is
not entered in the Calling side’s 1-touch or coded speed dialling, the abbreviation
(NSF signal data) sent from the other party’s machine is displayed in the report.
[Bit 3]
When “display” is selected, “06 message language” is displayed in the user mode’s sys-
tem settings.

#1 SSSW-SW26: Transmission function settings
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 Forced direct transmission function Set Do not set
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
26 4 Reserved
5 Reserved
Destination at the time broadcast transmission is

6 One destination All destinations
interrupted
7 Error report for time of transmission interruption Do not output Output
Table 13-517
[Bit 0]
Selects whether or not to set the forced direct transmission function.
Set: All transmissions other than broadcast transmissions are sent directly.
[Bit 6]
Selects whether or not to interrupt communications to all destinations when broadcast
transmission is interrupted.
[Bit 7]
Selects whether or not to output an error report when the stop key is pressed to inter-
rupt transmission.
#1 SSSW-SW28: V.8/V.34 protocol settings
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 Calling side’s V.8 protocol No Yes
1 Called side’s V.8 protocol No Yes
2 Calling side’s V.8 late start No Yes
3 Called side’s V.8 late start No Yes
28
4 Fall back from V.34 receiving side Prohibit Do not prohibit
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
Table 13-518
[Bit 0]
Selects whether or not to use V.8 protocol.
“No”: Even when V.8 protocol is received from receiving side, V.8 protocol is disabled,
protocol starts from V.21.
[Bit 1]
Selects whether or not to use V.8 protocol in reception.
“No”: V.8 protocol is disabled. Starts from V.21 protocol.
[Bit 2]
Selects whether or not to use V.8 protocol when an ANSam signal cannot be recognized
from the reception side and V.8 protocol is declared by the reception side in the DIS sig-
nal.
“Yes”: sends a CI signal in response to the called side’s DIS signal, then uses V.8 proto-
col.
“No”: does not send a CI signal in response to the called side’s DIS signal. Uses V.21
protocol.
When sending a manual transmission, V.8 late start is disabled regardless of this set-
ting.
[Bit 3]
Selects whether or not to declare V.8 in the DIS signal when the ANSam signal can not
be detected by the transmitting machine.
“Yes”: declares V.8 protocol in the DIS signal. Uses V.8 protocol after a CI signal is sent
by the transmitting machine.
“No”: does not declare V.8 protocol in the DIS signal. Uses V.21 protocol.
When sending a manual transmission, V.8 late start is disabled regardless of this set-
ting.
[Bit 4]
Selects whether or not to prohibit fall back from a V.34 reception machine.
Prohibit: Do not fall back from the receiving side.

2. Menu switch settings (#2 MENU)

No. Function Selection range
005 NL equalizer ON/OFF
006 Telephone line monitor DIAL/
SERVICEMAN
[1],[2]/OFF
007 Transmission level (ATT) 8 to 15
008 V.43 modulation speed upper limit 2400 to 3429baud
009 V.34 data speed upper limit 2.4 to 33.6Kbps
Table 13-519
[Bit 005]
Selects NL equalizer ON/OFF.
Select NL equalizer ON when errors occur frequently due to telephone line conditions
during communications.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur during transmission due to telephone line condi-
tions
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##281 ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##760,
##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##789
Error codes for errors which occur during reception due to telephone line conditions
##103, ##107, ##114, ##201, ##790, ##793
[Bit 006]
Selects telephone line monitor setting.
DIAL: telephone line monitoring sound is output from the speaker from
initiation of communications until DIS signal.
SERVICEMAN [1]/[2]: telephone line monitoring sound is output from the speaker from
initiation of communications until end of communications.
OFF: Monitor sound is not output.
[Bit 007]
Sets the transmission level (ATT).
When errors occur frequently due to telephone line conditions during communications,
raise the transmission level.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur during transmission,due to telephone line condi-
tions
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##280, ##281 ##282, ##283, ## 284, ##750,
##752, ##754, ##755, ##757, ##759, ##760, ##762, ##764, ##765, ##767, ##769,
##770, ##772, ##774, ##775, ##777, ##779, ##780, ##782, ##784, ##785, ##787,
##789
Error codes for errors which occur during receiving, due to telephone line conditions
##103, ##106, ##107, ##201, ##793
[Bit 008]
Selects the modulation speed (baud rate) occurring in the V.34 primary channel.
[Bit 009]
Selects the data transmission speed upper limit occurring in the V.34 primary channel
from the 2.4K-33.6Kbps range, at 2400bps intervals.

3. Numeric settings by type (#3 NUMERIC Param.)

002 RTN signal transmission condition (1) 1 to 99 (%)
003 RTN signal transmission condition (2) 2 to 99 (times)
004 RTN signal transmission condition (3) 1 to 99 (lines)
005 NCC pause time setting (before ID CODE) 1 to 60 seconds
006 NCC pause time setting (after ID CODE) 1 to 60 seconds
009 Compare number of digits in transmitter telephone number
and receiver telephone number 1 to 20 (digits)
010 T0 timer 1 to 9999 (10ms)
011 T1 timer 1 to 9999 (10ms)
015 Hooking detection interval 1 to 999 (× 10ms)
027 V.21 low-speed/command preamble detection time 15 × 25 (× 10ms)
Table 13-520
[No.02, 03, 04]

Sets RTN signal transmission conditions. When errors occur frequently in receiving due
to RTN signal output errors, raise these parameters and ease the RTN signal transmis-
sion conditions.
MEMO:
Error codes for errors which occur in reception due to RTN signal output error:
##104, ##107, ##114, ##201
RTN signal output condition (1) : the proportion of number of error lines compared to
the total number of lines per one page of received
images.
RTN signal output condition (2) : the burst error* reference value**
RTN signal output condition (3) : the number of errors not meeting the burst error
reference value
* burst error : transmission error occurring over consecutive lines
** Reference value : When set to 15, this will recognize a burst error
when a transmission error occurs for 15 consecutive
lines.
When one of these conditions are detected during
receiving of an image signal, a RTN signal is sent
out after the transmitting machine’s procedure sig-
nal has been received. When these parameters are
raised, the RTN signal becomes difficult to send
out.
[No. 05]
Sets the pause time that is automatically entered between the access code and ID code
when dialing on a NCC (New Common Carrier) line.
[No. 06]
Sets the pause time that is automatically entered between the ID code and other party’s
telephone number when dialing on a NCC (New Common Carrier) line.
[No. 09]
Selects the number of digits to compare when comparing telephone numbers entered
into this machine’s one-touch and speed dialing functions and the other party’s TSI,
when the designated telephone number is restricted by the memory box function, or
direct mail prevention function setting.
Change this parameter before entering telephone numbers.

[No. 10]
Sets the line connection identifier time. When errors occur frequently during communica-
tions due to telephone line conditions, raise this parameter.
MEMO:
“The waiting time from the end of transmission of the selection signal to detection of
a significant signal at time of transmission” which was previously set by parameter 10
as T1 timer, has, by the recommendation of ITU-T, become T0 timer. Therefore for
this machine, parameter 10 has been changed to T0 timer and the default time out
interval has been changed from 35 seconds to 55 seconds.
Furthermore, the transmitting party’s T1 timer (the waiting time from when CED, V21
flag or ANSam’s significant signal is detected until the next significant signal is
detected) is fixed at 35 seconds.
[No. 11]
Sets the receiver’s T1 timer (the waiting time from the start of DIS transmission to the
receipt of a significant signal).
When errors occur frequently during receiving due to telephone line connection condi-
tions, raise this parameter.
[No. 13]
Sets the maximum time allowed for receiving per one line of image data when receiving
image data. When the image data receiving time per line is long, increase this parame-
ter’s setting and increase the maximum time allowed for receiving.
[No. 15]
Sets hooking detection time. When changing the hooking timing, adjust this parameter.
When it is set to 50, it recognizes hooking longer than 500ms as being “on hook”.
[No. 27]
Use it to change the period of time spent to detect the header flag of a V.21 low-speed
command. Decrease it so that it is as close to 15 (150ms) as possible if detection fails
because of such effects (as echoes as when communicating with an overseas party).
On the other hand, increase it so that it is as close to 25 (250ms) as possible is a tone
signal or the like is wrongly identified as the header flag of a low-speed command.
4. Special settings (#4A SPECIAL)
#4A SPECIAL-SW01: Data encoding methods/Canon original abbreviated protocol

settings
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 MR, MMR encoding methods Prohibit Do not prohibit
1 MMR encoding method Prohibit Do not prohibit
2 Hyper control No Yes
01
Table 13-521
[Bit 0]
Sets the data encoding method for communication. When “prohibit” is selected, encod-
ing is limited to MH encoding.
[Bit 1]
Sets the data encoding method for communication. When “prohibit” is selected, encod-
ing is limited to MH or MR encoding. When faulty images result from MMR encoding,
select “prohibit.” This bit is effective when Bit 0 is set to “do not prohibit.”
MEMO:
The encoding methods are as shown below, depending on the combination of Bit 0
and Bit 1 settings.
Bit1 Bit0 Selected encoding method
0 0 MMR, MR or MH
0 1 MR or MH
1 0 MH
1 1 MH
Table 13-522
[Bit 2]
Selects whether or not to perform hyper control at time of communications.

#4A SPECIAL-SW04: Completion tone settings
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
1 Completion tone when receiving from memory Ring Do not ring
2 Receiving print completion tone Ring Do not ring
04
Table 13-523
[Bit 1]
Sets whether or not to ring the completion tone when receiving is finished when receiv-
ing from memory.
[Bit 2]
Sets whether or not to ring the completion tone when received image printing is fin-
ished.
5. Country type setting (#5 TYPE)
When country type setting is performed, the standard values for each item’s parame-
ters in #1 SSSW to #4 NCU are entered at one time.
6. Document scanning function setting ( #6 SCANNER)
When this item’s setting is changed, the quality of scanned images may deteriorate.
Do not change this setting other than to adjust “8 CCD” when adjusting image position-
ing.

7. Printer parameter settings (#7 PRINTER)
a. #1 SSSW setting
#7 PRINTER- #1 SSSW-SW05 (reduction, cassette selection setting)
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 Priority on LTR Yes No
1 Priority on LGL Yes No
Cassette output
2 Report output when report paper has run out Do not output from other than the
specified cassette
05 3 Reserved
4 Reserved No Yes
5 Reduction and printing on LTR
6 Cassette when report cassette is specified Set Do not set
7 Sub-scanning priority record Set Do not set
Table 13-524
[Bit 0]
Use it to specify whether to give priority to LTRR over LTRR or LGL when data which
may be printed on either by division is received
[Bit 1]
Use it to specify whether to give priority to LGL over A4R or LTRR when data which may
be printed on either by division is received
The order of priority will be as follows according to the bit 0 and 1 settings:
Bit 1 Bit 0 Order of priority

0 0 A4R → LTRR → LGL
0 1 LTRR → A4R → LGL
1 0 LGL → LTRR → A4R
1 1 LTRR → LGL → A4R
If sub scanning is given priority, the order will be LTRR → A4R → LGL even when bit 1
and 0 are set to 0.
[Bit 2]
Selects whether or not to output a report in a cassette other than the one selected when
a cassette is specified for report output by user data but there is no paper in the speci-
fied cassette.
[Bit 5]
Use it to specify whether to reduce and print on LTRR paper.
If printing on non-LTRR paper without reduction is desired for a long-size page, be sure
to select “No.”
[Bit 6]
When a report cassette has been specified, a report can only be output from the speci-
fied cassette.
[Bit 7]
Selects whether or not to set sub-scanning priority record.
“Set”: When B4 and A4R size paper are set and an A4 length* image is
received, use B4 paper to print.
“Do not set”: When B5 horizontal and A4R paper are set and a B4 sized image is
received, divide the image to B5 horizontal paper size and print.
* An image whose length is less than B4 size, an image which cannot be reduced and
printed on A4R paper.

#7 PRINTER-#1 SSSW-SW06 (reduction setting)
SW Bit Bit setting

Function
No. No. 1 0
0 Reduction when image is divided Prohibit Do not prohibit
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
06
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
Table 13-525
[Bit 0]
Selects whether or not to reduce the received image when it is possible to make a divid-
ed print when the length of the document received has been reduced to the maximum
reduction rate (70%).
Prohibit: Divide the document and print on the following page. (original size)
For example, when a document the length of 2.5 A4R pages is
received, the document will be divided onto three A4R pages and print-
ed. At that time, the image will be output at the original size.
Do not prohibit: Reduce the image and print within the page when a divided print is
made.
For example, when a document the length of 2.5 A4R pages is
received, the image is reduced 70% and the document is printed out on
two A4R size pages.
b. #2 NUMERIC Param. (Numeric parameter settings)

01 Deletion range of printed image when a long length image is
received 0 to 9999
04 Leading edge margin 0 to 9999
05 Trailing edge margin 1 0 to 9999
14 Trailing edge margin 2 0 to 9999
Table 13-526
[No. 1]
Sets the deleted image range when a long length image is received.
When you wish to keep the received image’s trailing edge even when receiving images
of a length that is over the effective record length, lower this parameter and reduce the
deletion range.
MEMO:
When a document whose length exceeds the effective recording length is received, if
the image length is within a range of 14 mm* of the effective recording length, this
range will be deleted and the image printed. When the image length is more the
14mm beyond the effective recording length, the received image will be reduced to a
maximum of 75%** and printed on one page. However, when the document exceeds
the effective recording length even after reduction, the image will not be reduced, but
will be divided and printed.
* Initial setting value
** When the user mode’s image reduction mode is set to automatic.
[No. 4]
Sets the effective recording length’s leading edge margin.
[No. 5]
Sets the effective recording length’s trailing edge margin.
[No. 14]
Sets the trailing edge margin. The length of the margin changes according to the paper
length.
A5 Setting value × (148.5/297)
A3 Setting value × (420/297)
A4R Setting value × (297/210)
The combined value of Bit 5 and Bit 14’s settings become the trailing edge margin.
c. #3 PRINT COUNT
Displays the number of pages printed.
d. #4 PRINT RESET
Resets the printer.

8. Initialization of setting values (#8 CLEAR)
Selecting the setting items below initializes the data by each item..
Clearing setting items and numeric for the parameters will set the items to values set
at factory shipping.
Item Data that are initialized

TEL Data entered by TEL Entry. One-touch dial, speed dial, group dial entries.
Data in user data memory management.
USER SW Data entered in user data and in SSSW#1-#3. Data in the user data mem-
ory management will not be cleared. Accumulated image data in the mem-
ory are cleared.
SERVICE SW User data and data in SSSW#1-#3, #6, #7
NCU SSSW#4 data
SERVICE DATA System dump list data
COUNTER Number of pages read/activity management numbers
REPORT Activity management report data
ALL All setting and registration data
Table 13-527
Warning:
When replacing the image processor PCB, check the counter before replacing. Input
the counter value after replacing.
Control memory data are deleted or initialized according to the items listed below by
using Service Mode #8 CLEAR.
Before performing this procedure, be sure to print a backup data list.
Operation name Contents

TEL Data entered in User data 2. TEL # REGISTRATION
USER SW Data that are entered in User data 1. DATA REGISTRATION and data
entered in Service mode settings #1-#3. However, the data in the
FILE SETTINGS of User data 1. DATA REGISTRATION are not delet-
ed or initialized.
SERVICE SW User data, data in service mode items #6, #7
NCU Data in service mode settings #4A, #4B
ISDN Data in service mode setting #4C
SERVICE DATA Management data system dump list data
REPORT Management data activity management report data
COUNTER Print counter data from management data system dump
ALL All user data, service mode setting items, management data and
image data except service mode setting #5 and the print counter
from management data system dump
Table 13-528
9. ROM information display (#9 ROM)
Shows the image processor PCB’s ROM DIMM management information (version
no., checksum, etc.) on the display.
10. CS SET (mirror mount initialization setting)
When this item is set, the mirror mount moves to the position set when shipped.

F. Test Mode (TEST MODE)
1. Overview
The test mode runs according to the menu items shown on the display.
The test mode items are divided into 8 blocks.
D-RAM test <1:DRAM>

Checks if data reading and writing to the D-RAM is operating normally.
CCD test <2: CCD TEST>

Used when correcting the variations in sensitivity of the CCD’s photosensitive cells.
PRINT test <3:PRINT>

Prints 8 patterns within the printing area.
MODEM NCU test <4:MODEM NCU>

Performs relay operations test, modem DTMF, tonal signal transmission and receiv-
ing tests.
AGING test <5:AGING TEST>

Illuminates the scanning lamp and drives the ADF document transport motor in fine
mode. The printer continuously prints a diagonal line pattern in fine mode and charac-
ters in normal density.
FACULTY test <6:FACULTY TEST>

Used when checking operations of the microswitcher, sensor, speaker and ADF
functions.
DATA SET <7:DATA SET>

Do not touch. This mode is for factory use only.
BOOK test <8:BOOK TEST>

Operates at the speed for the scanning transmission image quality LED.
Warning:
Do not use the DATA SET mode. If you enter the DATA SET mode, the registration
data will be changed automatically.
2. Test Mode menu
To operate the test mode, press the enter/set key then the # key and select the SER-
VICE MODE. Then use the up/down shift keys to select TEST MODE and depress the
set key.
After finishing the TEST MODE, press the stop key, then the clear key.
TEST MODE [1] - [7], [9]

E40 :
1: D-RAM 1: D-RAM 7168K

[1] - - - [2] ******
1: D-RAM 7168K
2: CCD TEST ******
[1] - - - [8]
3: PRINT 3: PRINT
[0] - - - [9] , [*] , [#] 3-0: AMI PATERN
3: PRINT 3-
1: WHITE
3: PRINT
3-2: BLACK
3: PRINT
3-3: STRIPES
3: PRINT
3-4: CHECKERS
3: PRINT
3-5: CHECKERS-2
3: PRINT
3-6: ENDURANCE
3: PRINT
3-7: BLACK/WHITE
3: PRINT
3-8: BIAS
3: PRINT
3-9: CHECKERS-3
3: PRINT
3-*: PRINTING AREA
3: PRINT
3-#: CRG TEST
Figure 13-509

4: MODEM NCU 4-1. RELAY RELAY 1 RELAY 1 100000

[1] - - - [8] [1] - - - [2] [0] - - - [5] 1-0: CML ON
RELAY 1 010000
1-1: P ON
RELAY 1 001000
1-2: S ON
RELAY 1 000100
1-3: H ON
RELAY 1 000010
1-4: D ON
RELAY 1 000001
1-5: R ON
RELAY 2 RELAY 2 100000000

[0] - - - [8] 2-0: CMP ON
RELAY 2 010000000
2-1: NZ ON
RELAY 2 001000000
2-2: CI1 ON
RELAY 2 000100000
2-3: CI2 ON
RELAY 2 000010000
2-4: AST ON
RELAY 2 000001000
2-5: C1 ON
RELAY 2 000000100
2-6: C2 ON
RELAY 2 000000010
2-7: NOR ON
RELAY 2 000000001
2-8: DC ON
Figure 13-510
4-4: G3 Tx
12000 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
14400 bps
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST 4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

[0] - - - [9] , [*] , [#] 0:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

1:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

2:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

3:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

4:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

5:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

6:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

7:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

8:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

9:
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

* :
4-5: DTMF Tx TEST

#:
Figure 13-511

4-2: FREQ 4-2: FREQ

[1] - - - [7] 462 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1100 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1300 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1500 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1650 Hz
4-2: FREQ
1850 Hz
4-2: FREQ
2100 Hz
4-4: G3 Tx 4-4: G3 Tx
[0] - - - [8] 300 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
2400 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
4800 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
7200 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
9600 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
TC7200 bps
4-4: G3 Tx
TC9600 bps
Figure 13-512
4-6. TONE Rx 000
4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST 4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST

[0] --- [5] UP-DOWN Baud: 3429 Speed: 33.6
4-8: V.34 G3 Tx TEST

Baud: 3200 Speed: 33.6




Figure 13-513

5: AGING TEST
6 : FACUL T Y TEST 6-1: G3 4800 bps Tx

[1] - - - [9], [#] 4800 bps
6-2: REGISTRA TION

REGISTRA TION SW OFF
6 -3 : SENSOR DS of DES on DOC A4

[1] - - - [8] CRG on DCVS on

CT1 on A4 CT2 of B4
CT3 on A4 CT4 on B4
ML T on A4 TN on
RS of JAM of
0:01 2:01 3:01 5:01

8:01 10:07 11:0B
12:01 13:70 15:31

16:01 17:01 18:20
21:38 22:04 33:01

35:01 39:01 100:01
BSCT of BBOC [NONE]
6-4: ADF
P.0001/0234
6 -5 : ST AMP 6 -5 : ST AMP
[1] - - - [2] 5 point
6 -5 : ST AMP
endless
6-6: SPEAKER 6 -6 : SPEAKER

FRE Q : [1 ] VO L : [2] FREQ TEST
6-6: SPEAKER
VOL [ * ]:MI N [#]:MAX
6 -7 : OPERA TIO N PANEL
6-9: LINE DETECT C1=OFF 0 Hz

[1] - - - [3] HOOK=ON FC=OFF
6-#: ESS TEST CNG DETECT

CNG=OFF OFF
Figure 13-514
7: DA TA SET
SET=[0 ] NO=[STOP]
8: BOOK TEST 8 -1 : BOO K FEE D TEST

[1] - - - [6] P.0000/0000
8-2: BOOK POS ADJ

P.0000/0000
8-3: HP ADJ
P.0000/0000
8-4: BOOK POS RST
8 -5 : BOO K STE P SET

00: 01
01:
10:
Figure 13-515

3. D-RAM test <1: DRAM>
Performs a write/read check on data in all areas of the D-RAM. When 8MB expan-
sion memory has been installed, also checks the expansion memory area.
When an error occurs during checking, the test will be aborted and an error mes-
sage will be indicated on the display.
Caution:
When a D-RAM test is performed, the image data saved in the image memory are
cleared. Therefore, output the images before performing the test when there are
saved images.
Running
7168K: D-RAM’s total memory volume (in bytes)
1:D-RAM 7168K * : indicates write test completed bank.
......******* . : indicates read test completed bank.
When an error occurs
Normal completion Error display
1:D-RAM 15360K WRT= 33CC RD= 33EC

complete (no error) ADR= BF840201
Reopens when
start key is
pressed
Error completion
WRT: Written data
RD: Read data
ADR: Address 1:D-RAM 15360K
complete (error)
Figure 13-516
4. CCD test <2: CCD TEST>
When you press 2 on the numeric key pad in the TEST MODE menu, the CCD TEST
is selected. When 8 on the numeric key pad is pressed during the running of this test,
shading adjustment is performed.
(See page 13-9.)
5. PRINT test <3: PRINT>
a) Test pattern printing mode

When you press 3 on the numeric key pad, the PRINT TEST is selected.
There are two service-use print patterns. They are shown below. Do not use the
other print patterns, as they are for factory and development use.
• 3-2: BLACK: output when 2 on the numeric key pad is pressed.
• 3-6: ENDURANCE: output when 6 on the numeric key pad is pressed.
To cancel the test print, press the stop key.
Check the print pattern to make sure Check the print pattern to make sure
there is no image reduction, stretching, there are no white stripes or unevenness.
soiling or black stripes.
Figure 13-517

Remarks:
When the test print switch (SW401) on the sensor PCB is pressed, the print patterns
shown below are output.
By outputting these test prints, you can conduct a print check with the scanning
assembly Operation panel assembly installed.
Precision screwdriver
Print pattern
5. MODEM NCU test <4: MODEM NCU>
Runs transmission and reception tests for the MODEM and NCU. For the modem
test, checks whether the modem’s transmission signal is being properly transmitted by
checking the signal sound from the speaker. Also checks whether the received tonal sig-
nal and DTMF signal were properly detected by the modem. The test ends when the
stop key is pressed.
Type Outline
Relay test Turn the selected relay on and off using the numeric
key pad.
Frequency test Output the tonal signal from the modem through the
telephone line connection terminal and the speaker.
G3 signal transmission test Output the G3 signal from the modem through the
DTMF signal reception test Output the DTMF signal from the modem through the
Tonal signal reception test Put the specific frequency received from the tele-
phone line connection terminal and the DTMF signal
through the modem and display whether or not they
are detected. The received signal is output from the
speaker.
V.34 G3 signal transmission test Output the V.34G3 signal from the modem through
the telephone line connection terminal and the
speaker.
a) Relay test
When 1 on the numeric key pad in the MODEM NCU TEST menu is pressed, the
relay test is selected.
The NCU relays are operated by the numeric key pad.
Caution:
ON/OFF on the display indicator is displayed for the relay operation signal transmis-
sion by operation of the numeric key pad. Therefore, it is not possible the verify that a
single relay unit is damaged by looking at the display.
RELAY 1 010000 1: RELAY ON

1-1 : P ON 2: RELAY OFF
0 1 0 0 0 0
RELAY CML P S H D R
Numeric key 0 1 2 3 4 5
Figure 13-520

b) Frequency test
frequency test is selected.
This test uses the telephone line connection terminal and the speaker to output the
frequency signals shown below from the modem. Changes in frequency are made using
the numeric key pad.
Numeric key pad Frequency

1 462Hz
2 1100Hz
3 1300Hz
4 1500Hz
5 1650Hz
6 1850Hz
7 2100Hz
Remarks:
Frequency and each frequency’s output level conform to the service mode’s output
level setting.
c) G3 signal transmission test

When 4 on the numeric key pad in the MODEM NCU TEST menu is pressed, the G3
signal transmission test is selected. This test uses the telephone line connection termi-
nal and the speaker to output the G3 signals shown below from the modem. Change the
output speed using the numeric key pad and then check the signals.
Numeric key pad Output speed

0 300bps
1 2400bps
2 4800bps
3 7200bps
4 9600bps
5 TC7200bps
6 TC9600bps
7 12000bps
8 14400bps
Remarks:
The output level of each signal conforms to the service mode settings.
d) DTMF signal output test

DTMF signal transmission test is selected. This test uses the telephone line connection
terminal and the speaker to output the DTMF signals from the modem shown below.
The DTMF signal corresponds to the key pressed on the numeric key pad.
Remarks:
The output level of each signal conforms to the service mode settings.
e) Tonal, DTMF signal reception test

tonal signal and DTMF signal reception 0 test is selected. This test checks whether the
tonal signal and DTMF signal received from the telephone line connection terminal was
detected.
Tonal signal reception test
4-6 : TONE Rx 000
0 0 0
Changes from 0 to 1 when a 462 ± 25Hz signal is detected
Tonal signal reception test
4-6 : TONE Rx 000

1234567890
The DTMF signals received on the display’s second line are displayed in order from the right.
Figure 13-521

f) V.34 G3 signal transmission test

v.34 G3 transmission test is selected. In this test, when the start key is pressed, the V.24
G3 transmission signal from the modem, shown below, is output using the telephone
line connection terminal and the speaker. The modulation rate (baud rate) is changed
using the numeric key pad and the output speed is changed using the shift keys (up and
down arrows?).
Numeric key pad Modulation rate

0 3429baud
1 3200baud
2 3000baud
3 2800baud
4 2743baud
5 2400baud
Shift key Output speed

2400bps
4800bps
7200bps
9600bps
12000bps
14400bps
16800bps
19200bps
21600bps
24000bps
26400bps
28800bps
31200bps
33600bps
6. AGING test <5: AGING TEST>
When 5 on the numeric key pad in the TEST MODE menu is pressed, the AGING
TEST is selected.
This test illuminates the scanning lamp and drives the ADF’s document feed motor
at the speed used for fine mode. Also, the printer prints out a vertical stripe pattern in
fine mode.
The AGING TEST stops when the stop key is pressed.
7. FACULTY test <6: FACULTY TEST>
When 6 on the numeric key pad in the TEST MODE menu is pressed, the FACULTY
TEST is selected.
This test tests the following functions.
a) G3 signal transmission test: Outputs a 4800bps G3 signal to the telephone line
and speaker.
b) Slide switch test: Tests operation of the Operation panel’s slide switches.
c) Sensor test: Tests operation of each sensor.
d) ADF test: Tests ADF operation
e) Stamp test: Completion stamp operation test
f) Speaker test: Speaker operation test
g) Operation panel test: Operation panel key operation test
h) Line signal reception test: NCU board’s signal sensor and frequency counter opera-
tion test
i) ESS test: ESS (energy saver function) operation verification test
a) G3 signal transmission test <6-1: G3 4800 bps Tx>

When 1 on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the G3 sig-
nal transmission test is selected.
This test outputs a 4800bps G3 signal to the telephone line connection terminal and
the speaker.
b) Slide switch test <6-2: REGISTRATION>

When 2 on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the slide
switch test is selected.
When the slide switches on the Operation panel are turned on and off, ON and OFF
are displayed on the display.
The slide switches are shown as REGISTRATION SW on the display.

c) Sensor test <6-3: SENSOR>

c-1) Sensor test
This is a mode which uses the display to check the condition of this machine’s sen-
sors.
When 3 on the numeric key pad is pressed in the FACULTY TEST menu, the sensor
test is selected.
The display indicator indicates when the sensor being tested is turned on and off.
Also, the LBP status is shown on the display to check printer error information.
Refer to page 13-12 for details concerning the sensor test.
6-3:SENOR
[1] - - - [7]
Press 1 on the numeric key pad.
DS of DES of DOC A4
CRG on DCVS on
DS: document sensor (PS801): on/document, of/no document

DES: document leading edge sensor (PS805): on/document, of/no document
DOC: document width sensor (PS851, PS852): displays the width of the
document depending on the combination of the two sensors ON/OFF status
CRG: toner cartridge message: on/toner cartridge, of/no toner cartridge
DCVS: pick-up sensor: on/no paper detected (at stand-by means the lower right
cover is closed)
of/paper is detected (at stand-by means the lower right
cover is open)
Press 2 on the numeric key pad

HPS: scanner home position sensor: on/scanner is in the home position

of/scanner is not in the home position
RES: reserved
BCVS: copyboard cover open/close sensor: on/cover is open, of/cover is closed
NDFS: document length sensor 1 (PS801): on/document, of/no document
DLS0: document length sensor 2 (PS803); on/document, of/no document
DLS1: Reserved
Figure 13-522
CT1 on A4 CT2 of
CT3 on A4 CT4 on B4
CT1: main body cassette add paper sensor (PS305); on/paper available, of/add paper
main body cassette paper size detection switch
CT2: first level cassette feeder add paper sensor (PS651); on/paper available, of/add paper
first level cassette feeder paper size detection switch: displays paper size
CT3: second level cassette feeder add paper sensor (PS651); on/paper available, of/add paper
second level cassette feeder paper size detection switch: displays paper size
CT4: third level cassette feeder add paper sensor (PS651); on/paper available, of/add paper
third level cassette feeder paper size detection switch: displays paper size
MLT on A4 TN on
RS of JAM of
MLT: multifeeder add paper sensor (PS501): on/paper available, of/add paper
TN: add toner sensor: on/toner available, of/add toner
RS: reserved
JAM: jam detection status: on/jam detected, of/no jam detected
0:01 2:01 3:01 5:01

8:01 10:07 11:0B
12:01 13:70 15:31

16:01 17:01 18:10 Displays printer status.
(see page 13-129)
21:38 22:07 33:01

35:01 39:01 100:01
Figure 13-523

c-2) Printer status

This mode is used to identify the area which is out of order when a printer malfunc-
tion indicator is displayed.
To display the status, press 5,6,7 on the numeric key pad when the sensor test
screen displays shown below are displayed. An example of the screen display is shown
below and the meaning of the display is described.
6-3 : SENSOR
[1] - - - [7]
0:01 2:01 3:01 5:01

8:01 10:04 11:04
12:01 13:70 15:31

16:01 17:01 18:10 Status display screen
(example)
21:38 22:07 33:01

35:01 39:01 100:01
The status used by this machine are status no. 8, 35, and 39, only.
(Displayed in the shaded boxes above.)
Figure 13-524
How to read the printer status screen

Printer status is displayed as a hexadecimal number.
This is converted to a binary number and then the area which is out of order is
detected.
Below is an explanation of how to read the screen.
Status Number
3: Misprint status in detail
8: Call service man status
35: Feeder assembly trouble status in detail
39: Fixing assembly trouble status in detail
Status information (upper 4 bits)

Upper 4 bits display 0000.
Status information (lower 4 bits)

Lower four bits display 0010.
0:01 2:01 3:01 5:01

8:02 10:07 11:0B
When status 8’s status information (upper four bits) displays 0 and (lower 4 bits) 2,
as shown above, if the bit pattern is fixed according to the conversion chart below,
at 0000 0010, bit 1 becomes 1.
Status 8’s bit 1 is a status which indicates a fixing assembly problem, and indicates
the cause of the printer’s poor condition is the fixing assembly.
(Upper 4 bits) (Lower 4 bits)
Display Display
indicator Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 indicator
0 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = 0
1 = 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 = 1
2 = 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 = 2
3 = 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 = 3
4 = 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 = 4
5 = 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 = 5
6 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 = 6
7 = 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 = 7
1 0 0 0 = 8
1 0 0 1 = 9
1 0 1 0 = A
1 0 1 1 = B
1 1 0 0 = C
1 1 0 1 = D
1 1 1 0 = E
1 1 1 1 = F
Figure 13-525

Printer status information list

The details of each status number (3,8,25,29) are displayed in charts from the next
page. Read the charts as shown below.
Shows the status when

each status bit is 0.
Shows the status when
each status bit is 1.
Bit Meaning 1 0
0 Parity bit (odd number)
1 Fixing assembly trouble Out of order Normal
2 Scanner unit trouble Out of order Normal
3 Fan motor trouble Out of order Normal
4 Reserved
5 Feeder assembly trouble Out of order Normal
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
Figure 13-526
Status 3 (misprint status in detail)
Bit Meaning 1 0
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Paper size error Abnormal Normal
4 Paper feeding fault Abnormal Normal
5 Reserved
6 BD signal trouble Out of order Normal
7 Reserved
Table 13-529
[Bit 3]
When the registration clutch is turned off then on again and the recording paper leading
edge sensor is ON, this becomes 1.
[Bit 4]
When the set or specified paper size is judged to be different from the paper feeding
into the printer, this becomes 1.
[Bit 6]
When there is a fault in the laser scanning mechanism and the BD signal is not output
at the prescribed timing (cycle and signal width), this becomes 1.

Status 8 (call service man status)
Bit Meaning 1 0
0 Parity bit (odd size)
1 Fixing assembly trouble Out of order Normal
2 Scanner unit trouble Out of order Normal
3 Fan motor trouble Out of order Normal
4 Reserved
5 Feeder assembly trouble Out of order Normal
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
Table 13-530
[Bit 1]
When trouble is detected in the fixing assembly’s fixing heater and temperature control
thermistor, this becomes 1.
[Bit2]
When trouble is detected in the laser scanner motor, laser unit or BD, this becomes 1.
[Bit 3]
When a fan trouble signal is detected more than 60 times within 200ms, this becomes 1.
[Bit 5]
When the main motor is out of order, this becomes 1.
Status 35 (feeding assembly trouble status in detail)
Bit Meaning 1 0
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Main motor trouble Out of order Normal
7 0
Table 13-531
[Bit 6]
When the ready signal does not come continuously at 0.1 seconds after the main motor
drive starts, this becomes 1.
When the ready signal is continuous at 0.1 seconds after the main motor drive has
stopped, this becomes 1.

Status 39 (fixing assembly trouble status in detail)
Bit Meaning 1 0
1 Reserved
2 Drive circuit trouble Out of order Normal
3 0
4 Abnormally high temperature detected Abnormal Normal
5 Abnormally low temperature detected Abnormal Normal
6 Faulty startup detected Abnormal Normal
7 0
Table 13-532
[Bit 2]
When power is not supplied to the fixing assembly, this becomes 1.
[Bit 4]
When the temperature of the fixing assembly is more than 20(C higher than the stan-
dard temperature for more than 30 seconds continuously, this becomes 1.
[Bit 5]
When the temperature of the fixing assembly is more than 10(C lower than the standard
temperature for more than 30 seconds continuously, this becomes 1.
[Bit 6]
When the thermistor is down, this becomes 1.
d) ADF test <6-4: ADF>

This is the ADF operation checking mode.
When 4 on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the ADF
test is selected.
When the document is set in the document inlet guide and the start key is pressed,
the document is fed at a speed matching the selected resolution. The number on the
display counter advances with each page.
It is possible to set up to 50 sheets of A4 paper, 20 sheets of A3/B4 paper.
6-4 : ADF
P.0001/0025
P.0001/0025
Total number of pages during test
Number of documents fed
Figure 13-527
e) Stamp test <6-5: STAMP>

This is the stamp operation checking mode.
When 5 on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the stamp
test is selected.
The stamp test has the following two menus.
• Test menu 1
When 1 on the numeric key pad in the Stamp TEST menu is pressed, test menu 1 is
selected. When a document is set in the ADF is this condition, the document is fed
20mm past the scanning position and is stamped 5 times at 10mm intervals from that
position, then delivered.
• Test menu 2
When 2 on the numeric key pad in the Stamp TEST menu is pressed, test menu 2 is
selected. When a document is set in the ADF is this condition, the document is fed
20mm past the scanning position and is stamped continuously at 10mm intervals from
that position until the document edge sensor (DES) goes off.

6-5 : STAMP
[1] - - - [2]
6-5 :
STAMP
6-5 :
STAMP
Figure 13-528
f) Speaker test <6-6: SPEAKER>

This mode is for checking the speaker operation.
When 6 on the numeric keypad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the speaker
test is selected. In this test, a tonal signal is output from the speaker from 200Hz to
5kHz at 100Hz intervals. The sound volume is also switched. Check that the signal
sound is coming out of the speaker.
6-6: SPEAKER
FREQ:[1] VOL:[2]
Press 1 on the Press 2 on the

numeric key pad numeric key pad
6-6: SPEAKER 6-6: SPEAKER

FREQ TEST VOL[*]:MIN [#]:MAX
Press the start key to change It is possible to adjust the

the output frequency volume of the signal sound to
the minimum by pressing *, to
the maximum by pressing #
and one level at a time by
pressing the start key
Figure 13-529
g) Operation panel test <6-7: OPERATION PANEL>

This is a mode for checking the Operation panel operation.
When 7 on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the OPER-
ATION PANEL test menu is selected. The functions that can be checked in this mode
are described below.
• Display test
When the start key on the OPERATION PANEL test menu is pressed, the display
test is selected. In this test, “Perform LCD density adjustment” is shown on the display.
When the start key is pressed again, all black, all white, border and checker patterns
are displayed in order.
• LED lamp test
When the start key is pressed after the display test has finished, the LED lamp test
is selected.
When the start key is pressed, all the lamps on the Operation panel are illuminated.
Operation button test
When the start key is pressed after the LED lamp test has finished, the key test is
selected.
Press the keys for the characters shown on the display, if the display goes out they
are normal. The correspondence between the characters and buttons are shown in the
table below.
When all the LEDs of both the completion stamp key and the direct transmission key
characters have been illuminated, the display will go out.
Characters Operation key Characters Operation key

1 to # Numeric key pad u Data registration key
R Redial key % Direct Tx key
C Copy key S Stamp key
O Hook key c Return key
D Coded dial key U Screen selection key F1
E (Right) PRINT/SCAN key V Screen selection key F2
E (Left) Set key W Screen selection key F3
L Clear key X Screen selection key F4
M Fax monitor key s Collate key
/ Program key r Reset key
F FAX key P Pause key
a Copy special features key ! Energy saver key
Table 13-533

When all the characters displayed have disappeared, then the one-touch dial key
test starts. Characters from a-z and A-Z are displayed. The display from characters a-B
corresponds to the one-touch dial keys 01-28. When the one-touch dial keys are
pressed, the characters corresponding to them disappear from the display.
6-7:OPERATION PANEL
Display test Press Start key
ADJUST LCD CONTRAST

Character display
Press start key
All black display
Press start key
All white display
Press start key
Border display
Press start key
Checker pattern display
Press start key
6-7:OPERATION PANEL All LED lamps illuminate

LED TEST
LED lamp test Press start key
123456789*0# UVWX When the key corresponding to a character

cEL %SM/DTRO !CEFsaru is pressed, that character goes out.
Operation
Press start key
key pad test
abcdefghijklmnopqrst When a one-touch dial key is pressed,

uvwxyzAB the corresponding letter disappears.
The test ends when the stop key is pressed.
Figure 13-530
h) Line signal reception test <6-9: LINE DETECT>

When 9 on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the LINE
DETECT test is selected. In test menu 1, the C1, FC and external telephone’s fax are
detected, and if signals are being properly detected by the NCU board, that is also
detected.
h-1) Test menu 1

When 1 on the numeric key pad in the LINE DETECT menu is pressed, the Test
menu 1 is selected. In this test the display will go from ON to OFF when C1, FC and
external telephone OFF HOOK are detected from the telephone line connection termi-
nal.
h-2) Test menu 3

When 3 on the numeric key pad in the LINE DETECT menu is pressed, test menu 3
is selected. In this test the display will go from OFF to ON when CNG is detected from
the telephone line connection terminal.
h-3) Test menu 4

When 4 on the numeric key pad in the LINE DETECT menu is pressed, test menu 4
is selected. In this test the outgoing message can be checked. By selecting 0 or 1 on the
numeric key pad, 2 types of outgoing messages are output from the telephone line and
the speaker.
i)ESS test <6-#: ESS TEST>

When the # key on the numeric key pad in the FACULTY TEST menu is pressed, the
ESS (energy saver function) test is run. Running this test puts this machine into the ESS
mode and turns off all the LEDs except for the ESS key on the operation panel. The
ESS mode is canceled by the following operations.
• When the ESS key is pressed
• When a document is set in the ADF
• When a fax arrives
• When the machine is off the hook
• When it is time to output a report
• When it becomes time to send a delayed call

8. BOOK scanning test <8: BOOK TEST>
When 8 on the numeric key pad in the TEST MODE menu is pressed, the BOOK
test is selected.
In this test the scanning lamp is illuminated and it is checked whether the scanning
lamp moves at the speed corresponding to the scanning transmission image quality set-
ting.
Caution:
This test is for factory use.
VI. REPORTS
A. User reports
1. Reports output manually
The reports shown below are types output by user operation.
Report types Operation

1-touch list 1 To output the reports, after pressing the Report key,
Coded dial list 1 use the up and down arrow shift keys ▲▼ to select
Group dial list the desired report, and then press Set.
1-touch (Detail) To output the telephone number list, after pressing
the
Coded (Detail) Report key, select SPEED DIAL LIST, and press Set.
User data Then, select the desired telephone number list, and
Confidential mail box list press Set once more.
Document memory list
RX Memory box list
Activity report
Table 13-601

2. Reports output automatically
The reports shown below are output automatically according to user mode settings.
Report types Setting

Tx report Automatically output according to the output settings
Rx report in the user data’s report settings menu.
Confidential Rx report
Memory box report
Activity report
a) Memory clear list
Figure 13-601
TX/RX NO.: 4 digit display

MODE: transmission, polling transmission, timer transmission,
relay reception, confidential reception, memory reception,
memory box transmission, memory box reception
DESTINATION TEL/ID: one-touch dial, speed dial numbers
PGS.: total number of pages
SET. TIME: date and time displayed in 24 hour mode
ST. TIME: total starting time (displayed in 24 hour units)
SENDER NAME: Name of sender attached at time of transmission depart-
ment code 4 digits (only when DAC SET up to ON).

B. Service report
Service mode setting status and previous communications history reports and
reports of detailed error information are output in the service mode setting. The types of
service reports are shown below.
Report types Operation

Sistem data list Press the report key when in the service mode. Select
(error codes and dump lists the lists you would like to output and press the set
included) key.
Error transmission report Set the output in the user mode’s report settings
(error codes and dump lists menu (it is possible to set whether error codes and
included) dump lists are included by selection of service data #1
SSSW-SW01 Bit 0 and Bit 1)
Reception results report Set the output in the user mode’s report settings
menu (it is possible to set whether error codes and
dump lists are included by selection of service data #1
SSSW-SW01 Bit 0 and Bit 1)
a) System data list

Displays the service software switch and service parameter settings status.
Figure 13-602

Figure 13-603
Figure 13-604

Figure 13-605
Figure 13-606

Figure 13-607
Figure 13-608

Figure 13-609
Figure 13-610

Figure 13-611
Figure 13-612

Figure 13-613
b) System dump list

Displays previous communications status and error communications history.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
Figure 13-614
*1: TX: Total number of pages transmitted

*2: RX: Total number of pages received
*3: Number of pages sent and received by document size
*4: Number of pages sent and received by modem speed
*5: Number of pages sent and received by mode (standard/fine/superfine/ultra fine)
*6: Number of pages sent and received by encoding method
*7: Times sent and received by mode
*8: Pages printed/total number of pages printed. pages read/total number of pages
read
*9: Number of errors by error code
[Display example]
##280 1 7 3 0 0
Number of Number of Number of
##0280 errors ##0281 errors ##0282 errors

Displays information about the three most recent communication errors.
✽1
✽2
✽3
✽4
✽5
✽6
✽7
✽8
✽9
✽10
✽11
✽12
✽13
✽14
✽15
Figure 13-615
*1: Service error code

*2: START TIME: Date and time (displays in 24 hour mode)
*3: OTHER PARTY: Telephone number sent from the other party
*4: MAKER CODE: Manufacturer code
*5: MACHINE CODE: Code by machine type
*6: V.8 signal code contents received from the other party’s machine
*7: Symbol speed used by primary channel
*8: Data speed used by primary channel
*9: 0 (fixed)
*10: Code output by modem when transaction ends in error (do not use in service)
*11: Modem transmission status when transaction ends in error (do not use in service)
*12: Modem reception status when transaction ends in error (do not use in service)
*13: Received DIS, DCS or DTC bit1-48
*14: Transmitted DIS, DCS or DTC bit1-48
*15: RX= Received protocol signal
TX= Transmitted protocol signal

c) Error transmission report (for service use)

Includes service error codes and error dump lists to the error transmission report.
To include service error codes and error dump lists, set service mode SSSW-SW01.
When the transmission results report is set to include transmitted images in the user
mode’s report setting, a part of the first page of the transmitted image is appended
when the document is received into memory.
✽1
✽2
✽3
✽4
✽5
✽6
✽7
✽8
✽9
✽10
✽11
✽12
✽13
✽14
✽15
Figure 13-616
*1: Service error code

*2: START TIME: Date and time (displays in 24 hour mode)
*3: OTHER PARTY: Telephone number sent from the other party
*4: MAKER CODE: Manufacturer code
*5: MACHINE CODE: Code by machine type
*6: V.8 signal code contents received from the other party’s machine
*7: Symbol speed used by primary channel
*8: Data speed used by primary channel
*9: 0 (fixed)
*10: Code output by modem when transaction ends in error (do not use in service)
*11: Modem transmission status when transaction ends in error (do not use in service)
*12: Modem reception status when transaction ends in error (do not use in service)
*13: Received DIS, DCS or DTC bit1-48
*14: Transmitted DIS, DCS or DTC bit1-48
*15: RX= Received protocol signal
TX= Transmitted protocol signal

VII. USER ERRORS

#0001 [TX] Document jam
Cause Countermeasure
• Document became jammed. • Remove the document and try sending
again.
• Document’s size or thickness is outside the (1) Send after making a copy by book
standards. scanning or use book scanning trans-
mission?
(2) Send thin documents by book scanning
• Internal mechanism fault. transmission.
Refer to “Document jam detection” in the ADF
service manual.
#0003 [TX/RX] 1 page copy/send receive time over

• 1 page document length is more than 1 m (1) Make a copy by book scanning. Divide
or takes more than the prescribed time (32 the document and send/copy.
minutes) to send/copy. (2) Increase the page timer value using #1
SSSW-SW12 Bit 0 and Bit 1.
• Takes more than the prescribed time (32 (1) Have the sender divide the document
minutes) to receive. and send in parts.
(2) Contact the sender and have the cause
investigated.
(3) Increase the page timer value using #1
SSSW-SW12 Bit 0 and Bit 1.
• Internal mechanism fault. See “Document jam detection” in the ADF
service manual.
#0005 [TX/RX] Initial identifier (T0/T1) time over

• TEL LINE TYPE setting mistake. • Set TEL LINE TYPE correctly.
• Time until connection with the other party’s (1) Add a long pause when registering an
machine is long. autodial entry and delay the timer start.
(2) Increase the T0 timer by #3 NUMERIC
Param. 010 so it won’t time out.
• Other party’s machine does not respond. • Contact the other party and have the cause
investigated.
• A significant signal cannot be detected after • Increase the T1 timer by #3 NUMERIC
DIS signal transmission is completed. Param. 011 so it won’t time out.
• Other party’s machine’s communication • No countermeasure possible because the
mode does not match. communications mode is a specification of
the machine.
(1) Other party’s machine mis-operates due • See #1 SSSW SW03 for echo countermea-
to echo at transmission. sures.
(2) Mis-operation due to echo at reception.
#0008 [TX] Password rejected at polling transmission

• Other party’s password and your machine’s (1) Contact the other party and synchronize
password do not match. the passwords.
(2) Make a DAT recording of the communi-
cation protocol and analyze it.
#0009 [RX] Jam/Add paper

• Paper is jammed. • Remove the paper jam.
• Paper has run out. • Set more paper.
• Internal mechanism fault. (1) Check the Add paper sensor, pick-up
sensor, registration sensor, leading edge
sensor and delivery sensor flags.
(2) Check by TEST MODE/FACULTY
TEST/[3]SENSOR TEST.
(3) Check according to this manual’s
Feeding fault countermeasures.
(4) Replace the DC controller circuit.

#0011 [RX] Polling reception error

• No document is set in the other party’s • Have the other party set the document
machine. properly.
• The document was not set properly at the • Set the document properly and send it.
time of transmission, so polling reception
occurred.
#0012 [TX] Other party’s machine is out of paper

• Other party’s machine is out of paper. • Have the other party set paper.
#0018 [TX/RX] Automatic calling error

• TEL LINE TYPE set incorrectly. • Set TEL LINE TYPE correctly.
• Telephone line connection time is long. (1) Add a long pause when registering an
autodial entry and delay the timer start.
(2) Increase the T0 timer by #3 NUMERIC
Param. 010 so it won’t time out.
• Time limit expires due to other party’s • Call again.
machine’s busy signal.
• Time limit expires due to other party’s • Contact the operator of the other party’s
machine’s not being connected or not hav- machine and have the cause investigated.
ing power.
• Time limit expires due to other party’s • Have the other party set recording paper in
machine having no recording paper. the machine.
#0021 [RX] DCN received at time of reception

• Password does not match. • Contact the other party and synchronize the
passwords.
#0022 [TX] Can not call

• The other party’s machine’s telephone • Enter the other party’s telephone number in
number is not registered in autodial at the autodial.
time of broadcast transmission or multi-
polling reception.
#0025 [TX/RX] Autodial is set incorrectly

• At the time of autodialing, confidential and • Set autodial correctly.
relay directives are set.
#0033 [TX] Confidential transmission not possible

• The other party’s machine does not have a • Perform regular transmission since confi-
confidential mailbox function. dential transmission is not possible.
#0034 [TX] Cannot transmit to other party’s machine’s confidential box

• The designated confidential mail box does • Confirm the other party’s machine’s confi-
not exist in the other party’s machine. dential box number and send a confidential
transmission.
• The other party’s machine’s memory is full. • Check the amount of free memory in the
other party’s machine and have them output
any memory reception documents.

#0035 [TX] Relay originating transmission not possible

• No relay function in the other party’s • Transmit direct by sequential broadcast
machine. transmission since relay transmission is not
possible.
#0036 [TX] Relay directive transmission not possible

• The specified relay box does not exist in the • Confirm the other party’s machine’s relay
other party’s machine. box and send a relay originating transmis-
sion.
• The relay originating user’s telephone num- • Have the relay originating user’s telephone
ber is not entered in the relaying machine’s number entered in the relaying machine’s
one-touch dial or speed dial. one-touch dial or coded dial.
• The relaying machine’s memory is full. • Contact the relay station and have them
clear unnecessary image data.
#0037 [RX] Image memory exceeded at time of reception

• Excessive document information at time of • Have the other party clear unnecessary
reception. image data, and resend.
#0059 [TX] The number dialed and the number connected to (CSI) do not match
• The user’s telephone number on the receiv- • Contact the other party and have them reg-
ing side is not registered. ister the user’s telephone number.
• Set so that the user data’s destination is not
checked.
#0080 [TX] The other party’s machine has no ITU-T recommended sub-address reception
function
• DIS bit 49 received from the other party’s • Send to another fax machine which has that
machine becomes 0. function.
• When the other party’s machine is of a dif-
ferent type, use normal G3 transmission.
#0081 [TX] Other party’s machine has no ITU-T recommended password reception function
ferent type, use normal G3 transmission.
#0082 [TX] Other party’s machine has no ITU-T recommended selective polling reception
function
ferent type, have the destination set their
machine so it can send polling transmis-
sions, then perform polling reception.
#0102 [TX] Password/sub-address sent at time of transmission, but DCN received

• Password/sub-address not set in the other • Contact the other party and have them set
party’s machine. the password/sub-address.
• The other party’s machine’s memory is full. • Contact the other party and have them
clear some memory.

#0995 [TX] Memory transmission reservation canceled

• The user intentionally canceled the memory • Resend.
transmission reservation.
[TX] DATA ERROR displayed

• Checksum error. Displayed upon image • Press the set key.
processor PCB replacement, SRAM fault,
and back up battery replacement.
Caution:
When DATA ERROR is displayed, the set key must be pressed for recovery to take
place.
However, when the set key is pressed, the user data will be erased. Therefore, before
pressing the set key, check with the user.
VIII. SERVICE ERRORS

• G3 mode error codes
## 0100 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded at time of
transmission
• (After Q signal is output after the image sig- • (After Q signal is output after the image sig-
nal) nal)
The line condition is poor and the other (1) Raise the modem output level in #2
party’s machine can not properly receive MENU parameter 007, so the other
the image signal or Q signal. party’s machine can properly receive the
image signal or Q signal.
(2) Lower the Tx start speed in user mode
system settings.
(3) Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU
parameter 005 ,so the other party’s
machine can properly receive the image
signal or Q signal.
(4) Add an echo protect tone to the V29
modem signal using #1 SSSW-SW03 Bit
1.
• (After TCF is before after the image signal) • (After TCF is output before the image sig-
The output level is low and the other party’s nal)
machine can not properly receive the sig- Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
nal. parameter 007, so the other party’s
signal or Q signal.
• (After TCF is output before the image sig- • (After TCF is output before the image sig-
nal) nal)
The other party’s machine malfunctions due (1) Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo coun-
to echo. termeasures.
(2) When registering in autodial, add a long
pause after the telephone number so
there will be no response to the other
party’s first DIS.
(3) When calling manually, press the start
button after you have heard the other

##0101 [TX/RX] Modem speed does not match other party’s machine
• (At time of transmission) • (At time of transmission)
Modem speed does not match that of the No countermeasure is possible because
other party’s machine. modem speed is a specification of the
machine.
• (At time of transmission) • (At time of transmission)
Speed does not the other party’s machine (1) Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
in fall back. parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive TCF.
parameter 005, so the other party’s
• (At time of reception) • (At time of reception)
Modem speed does not match that of the No countermeasure is possible because
other party’s machine. modem speed is a specification of the
machine.
##0102 [TX] Fall back not possible at time of transmission

• The line condition is poor and TCF is not (1) Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
properly transmitted. parameter 007, so the other party’s
• The other party’s machine malfunctions due (1) Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo coun-
(4) Have the other party lower the output
level so the other party's machine will not
receive echoes.
##0103 [RX] EOL can not be detected for 5 seconds during reception
• The line condition is poor and the image (1) Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
signal can not be properly received. parameter 007, so the other party’s machine
can properly receive the image signal.
(2) Have the other party lower the other
machine’s transmission start speed.
signal.
• Malfunction due to CFR echo. (1) Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo coun-
termeasures.
(2) Lower the modem output level in #2
MENU parameter 007, so the transmitted
CFR echo is not received.
##0104 [TX] RTN or PIN received at time of transmission

• The line condition is poor and the image (1) Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
signal can not be properly received by the parameter 007, so the other party’s machine
other party’s machine. can properly receive the image signal.
system settings.
modem signal in #1 SSSW-SW03 Bit 1.
(4) Have the other party ease the RTN trans-
mission conditions for their machine so
that RTN will not be transmitted by the
other party’s machine.
(5) Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU para-
meter 005, so the other party’s machine
to echo. termeasures
level so the other party’s machine will not
receive echoes.

##0106 [RX] Protocol signal can not be received for 6 seconds in protocol signal standby dur-
ing reception
• The line condition is poor and the protocol • Have the other party raise the output level
signal can not be properly received by other so the protocol signal can be properly
party’s machine. received.
• The line condition is poor and the image • Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
signal can not be properly received by the parameter 007, so the other party’s
other party’s machine. machine can properly receive the signal.
• Malfunction due to echo. (1) Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo coun-
termeasures
##0107 [RX] Fall back not possible for the transmitting machine during reception
• The line condition is poor. After a 2400 bit/s (1) Have the other party’s machine’s output
signal is received, the signal from the other level raised so the other party’s
party’s machine is not properly received. machine’s signal is properly received.
machine can properly receive the TCF.
(3) Ease the RTN transmission conditions by
#3 NUMERIC Param. 002-004, so RTN
is not output.
termeasures.
signal’s echo is not received.
##0109 [TX] Signals other than DIS, DTC, FTT, CFR and CRP are received and the limit for
the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after DCS output during transmis-
sion
• Protocol signal abnormality. • Record the Communication protocol on DAT
and request it to be analyzed by the
Technical Center.
##0111 [TX/RX] Memory error

• Data error occurs due to noise during print- • Output all data, then clear all data and
ing output of data stored in image memory. reregister the data.
• Mis-dialing was attempted due to noise. • Replace the modem board.
(The telephone number pointer for print-
ing/display does not match the pointer for
dialing.)
##0114 [RX] RTN is output at time of reception

• The line condition is poor and the image (1) Have the other party’s machine’s output
signal can not be properly received from the level raised so the image signal can be
other party’s machine. properly received.
(2) Have the other party’s machine’s trans-
mission start speed lowered.
(4) Ease the RTN transmission conditions by
#3 NUMERIC Param. 002-004, so RTN
is not output.
• Malfunction due to CFR echo. (1) Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo coun-
termeasures.
MENU parameter 007, so the output
##0200 [RX] Carrier can not be detected for 5 seconds during image reception during recep-
tion
• The line condition is poor and the image (1) Have the other party’s machine’s output
signal can not be properly received. level raised so the image signal can be
properly received.
• Time limit is exceeded because the training (1) Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo coun-
signal can not be received due to CFR termeasures.
echo. (2) Lower the modem output level in #2

##0201 [TX/RX] DCN reception by other than normal binary protocol

• The other party’s machine is not capable of • Have the other party’s machine set so that it
reception. (No paper) can receive. (Set paper)
• User’s telephone number is not registered. • Register the user’s telephone number.
(When the other party’s machine is a Ricoh
3000L)
• Password does not match for polling recep- • When the other party’s machine is the
tion. same model, contact the other party and
synchronize the passwords. When the other
party’s machine is made by another manu-
facturer, contact the other party and have
them set the machine so that is can perform
polling transmission.
• Document is not set for polling transmis- • Set the document and have the other
sion. party’s machine call again.
• Reception was attempted but there is no paper. • Set paper.
• The line condition is poor and the other • Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
party’s machine can not properly receive parameter 007, so the other party’s machine
the protocol signal. can properly receive the protocol signal.
termeasures
echo is not received.
• Image signal or Q signal can not be (1) Have the other party’s machine’s output
received. The other party’s machine has level raised so the other party’s
exceeded the limit for number of protocol machine’s signal is properly received.
signal re-transmissions. (2) Adjust the NL equalizer in #2 MENU para-
can properly receive the signal.
• The line condition is poor and the other (1) Ease the RTN transmission conditions by
party’s transmitting machine can not fall #3 NUMERIC Param. 002-004, so RTN
back. is not output.
parameter 005, so the signal is properly
received.
##0224 [TX/RX] Trouble occurs in the protocol signal during G3 communications

• Protocol signal fault. • Record the communication protocol on DAT
and analyze it.
##226 [TX/RX] System error (main program error)

• CPU malfunctioned due to noise. • Turn the power off then on.
##229 [RX] Memory reception due to recording system lock

• Unknown. • Press the start key and print the image.
##0232 [TX] ENCODE control unit malfunction

• ENCODE control’s UPI operation did not • Replace the image processor PCB.
end normally.
##0237 [RX] DECODE control unit malfunction

• DECODE control’s UPI operation did not • Replace image processor PCB.
end normally.
##0238 [RX] PRINT control unit malfunction

• PRINT control’s UPI operation did not end • Replace the DC controller PCB.
normally.

##0261 [TX/RX] System error occurred between modem and gate array
• Internal unit fault (When RS became 1, CS • Replace the modem PCB.
did not become 1.)
##0280 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded during trans-
mission
• Output level is low. After TCF output the • Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
other party’s machine can not properly parameter 007, so the other party’s
receive the appropriate signal. machine can properly receive the appropri-
ate signal.
• Other party’s machine malfunctioned due to (1) Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo coun-
echo. termeasures.
receive echoes.
mission
• The line condition is poor. After EOP output (1) Raise the modem output level in #2
the appropriate signal can not be received MENU parameter 007, so the other
because the image signal or EOP signal is party’s machine can properly receive the
not being properly transmitted. image signal or EOP signal.
system settings.
signal or EOP signal.
## 0282 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded during
transmission
• The line condition is poor. After EOM output (1) Raise the modem output level in #2
because the image signal or EOM signal is party’s machine can properly receive the
not being properly transmitted. image signal or EOM signal.
system settings.
signal or EOM signal.
mission
• The line condition is poor. After MPS output (1) Raise the modem output level in #2
because the image signal or MPS signal is party’s machine can properly receive the
not being properly transmitted. image signal or MPS signal.
system settings.
signal or MPS signal.

##0284 [TX] TCF output malfunction, DCN received during transmission

• The other party’s machine can not receive. • Contact the other party and have the
(no paper) machine set so it can receive.
• User’s telephone number is not registered. • Register the user’s telephone number.
(When the other party’s machine is a Ricoh
3000L)
• The other party’s machine can not receive. • Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
machine can receive.
(3) When calling from the numeric key pad,
press the start button after you have
heard the other party’s first DIS.
(4) Have the other party raise the output
receive echoes.
• A relay origination was issued to the other • Wait and resend at another time.
party’s machine, but the other party’s
machine is in the midst of a relay broadcast.
##0285 [TX] DCN received after EOP output at time of transmission

• Stop key is pressed during communications. • Resend.
##0286 [TX] DCN received after EOM output at time of transmission

##0287 [TX] DCN received after MPS output at time of transmission

##0288 [TX] Signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, RTN received after EOP output at time of
transmission
• Protocol signal abnormality. • Record the communication procedure
sound on DAT and analyze it.
##0289 [TX] Signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, RTN received after EOM output at time of
transmission
##0290 [TX] Signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, RTN received after MPS output at time of
transmission
##0322 [RX] Fixing assembly failure

• Internal unit fault. (1) Check if the fixing assembly is properly
installed in the printer unit.
(2) Remove the fixing assembly and check
the resistance values in the fixing assem-
bly connector terminals.
When room temperature is 20°C
J161 (AC side)
between 1P and 3P: 18Ω ± 7%
between 2P and 3P: 18Ω ± 7%
J161 (DC side)
between 1P and 2P: approx. 1755Ω
When the resistance values are off,
replace the fixing assembly.
(3) Replace the DC controller PCB.

##0323 [RX] Abnormal nBD signal output in the laser scanner unit
• Internal unit fault. (laser light intensity does (1) Check the connection of the cable
not meet the specification) between the laser scanner unit and the
DC controller PCB.
(2) Replace the laser scanner unit.
• Internal unit fault. (abnormal nBD signal (1) Check the connection of the cable
timing) between the laser scanner unit and the
DC controller PCB.
##0324 [RX] Abnormal number of laser scanner motor revolutions

• Internal unit fault. (1) Check the connection of the cable
between the laser scanner unit and the
DC controller PCB.
##0325 [RX] Main motor/exhaust fan trouble

• Internal unit fault. (main motor does not (1) Check the connection between the main
turn) motor and the DC controller PCB.
(2) Check that the main motor is not over-
loaded.
(3) Replace the main motor.
• Internal unit fault. (exhaust fan does not (1) Check the connection between the fan
turn) and the DC controller PCB.
(2) Replace the fan
##0671 [RX] Line is released due to T1 time-out when the procedure does not proceed
beyond phase 2 after detection of CM signal on the calling side at the time a V.8 call is
received
• The caller’s line is cut at phase 1 or the • Prohibit the caller’s V.8/V.34 protocol with
caller’s signal is not detected. #1 SSSW-SW28 Bit 1.
Adjust the output level to a range of -8 to
-15dBm.
##0672 [TX] Line is released due to T1 time-out when the procedure does not proceed from
phase 2 to beyond phase 3 during V.34 transmission
• The recipient’s line is cut at phase 1 or the • Prohibit the caller’s V.8/V.34 protocol with
recipient’s signal is not detected. #1 SSSW-SW28 Bit 0.
-15dBm.
##0673 [RX] Line is released due to T1 time-out when the procedure does not proceed from
phase 2 to beyond phase 3 during V.34 reception
• The transmitter’s line is cut at phase 2 or • Prohibit the caller’s V.8/V.34 protocol with
the transmitter’s signal is not detected. #1 SSSW-SW28 Bit 1.
-15dBm.
##0674 [TX] Line is released due to T1 time-out when the procedure does not proceed from
phase 3 and phase 4 to beyond the control channel during V.34 transmission
phase 4, or the recipient’s signal is not #1 SSSW-SW28 Bit 0.
detected. Adjust the output level to a range of -8 to
-15dBm.

##0675 [RX] Line is released due to T1 time-out when the procedure does not proceed from
phase 3 and phase 4 to beyond the control channel during V.34 transmission
phase 4, or the transmitter’s signal is not #1 SSSW-SW28 Bit 1.
detected Adjust the output level to a range of -8 to
-15dBm.
##0750 [TX] A significant signal is not received and the number of protocol signal re-transmis-
sions is exceeded after PPS-NULL output
• The line condition is poor and PPS-NULL is (1) Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
not properly transmitted. parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive PPS-NULL.
can properly receive PPS-NULL.
• The line is poor and the signal can not be • Have the other party’s machine’s output
received properly. level raised so the signal can be received
properly.
##0752 [TX] DCN received after PPS-NULL transmission

• The line condition is poor and PPS-NULL • Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
can not be properly received. parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive PPS-NULL.
• The stop button was pressed during com- • Resend.
munications.
##0753 [TX] Limit for the number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded or T5 time
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after PPS-NULL output
• The other party’s machine’s page buffer is (1) Set ECM Tx to “OFF” in the user mode
full, or RNR was received after output of data entry’s Tx settings function settings
PPS-NULL because the machine was in (2) Lower the Tx speed setting in the user
use, and after RR output a significant signal mode.
could not be properly received.
##0754 [TX] Limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-NULL
output
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-NULL • Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
output, PPR was received 4 times and CTC parameter 007, so the other party’s
was output, but the other party’s machine machine can properly receive CTC.
can not receive properly.
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-NULL • Have the other party raise the output level
output, PPR was received 4 times and CTC so the signal can be received properly.
was output, but a significant signal can not
be properly received.
##0755 [TX] A significant signal can not be detected and the limit for number of protocol sig-
nal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-MPS output
• The line condition is poor and PPS-MPS is (1) Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
not transmitted properly. parameter 007, so the other party’s
machine can properly receive PPS-MPS.
can properly receive PPS-MPS.
• The line condition is poor and the signal • Have the other party’s machine’s output
can not be received properly. level raised so the signal can be received
properly.

##0757 [TX] DCN received after PPS-MPS output

• The line condition is poor and PPS-MPS • Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
machine can properly receive PPS-MPS.
munications.
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after PPS-MPS output
full, or RNR was received after output of data entry’s Tx settings.
PPS-MPS because the machine was in (2) After registering one-touch or coded dial-
use, and after RR output a significant signal ing in the user mode, lower Tx speed set-
could not be properly received. ting using detailed settings.
##0759 [TX] Limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-MPS
output
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-MPS • Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-MPS • Have the other party raise the output level
nal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-EOM output
• The line condition is poor and the other (1) Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
party’s machine can not receive PPS-EOM parameter 007, so the other party’s
properly. machine can properly receive PPS-EOM.
machine can properly receive PPS-EOM.
properly.
##0762 [TX] DCN received after PPS-EOM output

• The line condition is poor and PPS-EOM • Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
machine can properly receive PPS-EOM.
munications.
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after PPS-EOM output
PPS-EOM because the machine was in (2) After registering one-touch or coded dial-

##0764 [TX] Limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-EOM
output
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-EOM • Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-EOM • Have the other party raise the output level
nal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-EOP output
• The line condition is poor and the other (1) Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
party’s machine can not receive PPS-EOP parameter 007, so the other party’s
properly. machine can properly receive PPS-EOP.
can properly receive PPS-EOP.
properly.
##0767 [TX] DCN received after PPS-EOP output

• The line condition is poor and PPS-EOP • Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
machine can properly receive PPS-EOP.
munications.
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after PPS-EOP output
PPS-EOP because the machine was in (2) After registering one-touch or coded dial-
##0769 [TX] Limit for number of protocol signal re-transmissions is exceeded after PPS-EOP
output
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-EOP • Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
• The line condition is poor. After PPS-EOP • Have the other party raise the output level
nal re-transmissions is exceeded after EOR-NULL output
party’s machine can not receive EOR-NULL parameter 007, so the other party’s
properly. machine can properly receive EOR-NULL.
properly.

##0772 [TX] DCN received after EOR-NULL output

• The line condition is poor and EOR-NULL • Raise the modem output level in #2 MENU
machine can properly receive EOR-NULL.
• The line condition is poor and the signal • Resend.
can not be properly received.
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after EOR-NULL output
EOR-NULL because the machine was in (2) After registering one-touch or coded dial-
could. ting using detailed settings.
##0774 [TX] ERR received after EOR-NULL output

• The line condition is poor and frequently the (1) Raise the modem output level in #2
other party’s machine can not properly MENU parameter 007, so the other
receive the image signal. party’s machine can properly receive the
image signal.
signal.
(3) When calling using the dial button, man-
ually press the start button after you have
heard the other party’s first DIS.
receive echoes.
nal re-transmissions is exceeded after EOR-MPS output
party’s machine can not properly receive parameter 007, so the other party’s
EOR-MPS. machine can properly receive EOR-MPS.
properly.
##0777 [TX] DCN received after EOR-MPS output

EOR-MPS. machine can properly receive EOR-MPS.
munications.
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after PPS-MPS output
full, or RNR was received after output of data registration’s Tx settings.
PPS-MPS because the machine was in (2) After registering one-touch or coded dial-

##0779 [TX] ERR received after EOR-MPS output

image signal.
signal.
receive echoes.
nal re-transmissions is exceeded after EOR-EOM output
EOR-EOM. machine can properly receive EOR-EOM.
properly.
##0782 [TX] DCN received after EOR-EOM output

EOR-EOM. machine can properly receive EOR-EOM.
munications.
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after PPS-EOM output
PPS-EOM because the machine was in (2) After registering one-touch or coded dial-
##0784 [TX] ERR received after EOR-EOM output

image signal.
signal.
receive echoes.
nal re-transmissions is exceeded after EOR-EOP output
EOR-EOP. machine can properly receive EOR-EOP.
properly.

##0787 [TX] DCN received after EOR-EOP output

EOR-EOP. machine can properly receive EOR-EOP.
munications.
limit (60 seconds) is exceeded after EOR-EOP output
EOR-EOP because the machine was in (2) After registering one-touch or coded dial-
##0789 [TX] ERR received after EOR-EOP output

image signal.
signal.
receive echoes.
##0790 [RX] ERR output after EOR-Q reception

• The line condition is poor and frequently the (1) Have the other party’s machine’s output
other party’s machine can not properly level raised so the signal can be received
receive the image signal. properly.
signal.
• The other party’s machine malfunctions due • Refer to #1 SSSW-SW03 for echo counter-
to echo. measures.
##0791 [TX/RX] Signal other than a significant signal received during ECM mode procedure
• Protocol signal abnormality (1) Record the communication signal on DAT
and analyze it.
##0793 [RX] Valid frame can not be detected and the time limit is exceeded during high-
speed signal reception
• The line condition is poor and the other (1) Raise the modem output level in #2
party’s machine can not receive the signal MENU parameter 007, so the other
properly. party’s machine can properly receive the
signal.
can properly receive the signal.
• The line condition is poor and the signal (1) Have the other party’s machine’s status
can not be received properly. speed lowered.
(2) Have the other party’s machine’s output
level raised so the signal can be received
properly.
• The communication codec is busy. (1) Turn the power off then on.
(2) Replace the FAX PCB.

##0795 [TX/RX] Problem occurred in the ?communications? decoding processing

• The communication codec is busy. (1) Turn the power off then on.
(2) Replace the FAX PCB.
##0799 [TX] System error

• EOR output attempted during speed dial (1) Turn the power off then on.
procedure. (2) Replace the FAX PCB.
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART.....................A-1 D. LIST OF SPECIAL TOOLS....................A-11

B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS...........A-3 E. SOLVENTS AND OILS..........................A-12
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ..............A-5

APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART
• Conditions: Copy / A4 paper / main unit cassette pick-up / 3 sheets
Power ON Start ON
INTR1 STBY INTR2 SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY ESS

Main motor (M601)
150°C control 160°C control
Fixing heater
Document scanner motor (M701) Forward Reverse
Scanning lamp
Shading measurement

Paper leading edge sensor
(PS301)
Primary charging roller bias DC
Primary charging roller bias AC

Negative bias Paper interval bias Negative bias
Separation static charge
eliminator bias
Re-charge eliminator bias
Laser scanner motor (M801)
Laser exposure
Paper interval bias
Developing bias DC
Developing bias AC
Exhaust fan (FM301)
90 sec.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-1
A-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS

600 LASER INTENSITY SWITCH signal
1200DPI BIAS SWITCH signal
ACC LASER SCANNER MOTOR ACCELERATE command
BDI BEAM DETECTION INPUT signal
CVROPN FRONT COVER OPEN signal
CL301D VERTICAL PATH ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command
CL302D REGISTRATION CLUTCH DRIVE command
DCPWM PRIMARY BIAS DC CONTROL signal
DCSON STATIC ELIMINATOR BIAS DRIVE signal
DEC LASER SCANNER MOTOR DECELERATE command
DVACON DEVELOPING BIAS AC ON command
DVDUP DEVELOPING BIAS DC ON command
ENBL IMAGE FORMATION ACKNOWLEDGE signal
FSRDRV1 FIXING HEATER 1 DRIVE command
FSRDRV2 FIXING HEATER 2 DRIVE command
LMPON SCANNING LAMP DRIVE command
LON LASER ON command
MMD MAIN MOTOR DRIVE command
MRDY MAIN MOTOR READY signal
PRACON PRIMARY BIAS AC CONTROL signal
PS101S SCANNER HOME POSITION signal
PS102S COPYBOARD COVER OPEN signal
PS301S PAPER LEADING EDGE DETECTION signal
PS302S REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal
PS303S PICK-UP PAPER DETECTION signal
PS304S PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal
PS305S CASSETTE PAPER DETECTION signal
PS306S DELIVERY DETECTION signal
PS501S MULTIFEEDER PAPER signal
PSIZ0 CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal 0
STMP STAMP SOLENOID DRIVE command
TNRCHKD CARTRIDGE CHECK DEVELOPING BIAS AC signal
TNRCHKT CARTRIDGE ANTENNA OUTPUT signal
TRNFOT TRANSFER NEGATIVE BIAS DRIVE command
TRPWM TRANSFER POSITIVE BIAS DRIVE command
TSTON
VDO VIDEO signal
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
I. Image processor PCB
Image processor PCB (1/3)
TP204
J54 Control panel sub-PCB
ESSKEY*
COVERM
KO0/KO3
KO5/KO6
COVERH

COVERL
ESSLED
RMDSW
LCDFG
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
VOL0
VOL1
VOL2
VOL3
KO7
KO5
KO2
KO3
KO4
KO6
OP0
SE1
+5U
+5U
K10
K14
K11
K12
K13
K15
K17
K16
J52 J53
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15 16 17
J45 J46
ESSKEY*
COVERM
KO0/KO3
KO5/KO6
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
COVERH
COVERL
ESSLED
RMDSW
LCDFG
KO7
KO5
KO2
KO3
KO4
KO6
+5U
+5U
K10
K14
K11
K12
K13
K15
VOL0
VOL1
VOL2
VOL3
OP0
SE1
K17
K16
Scanning lamp
LCD
LCDFG
D-GND
TP201 TP202
D.OFF
Control panel PCB
-24V
SCP
FLM
DB3
DB2
DB1
DB0
+5U
VD
LA20
LP
M
J44 TP203
14 13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
J22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314
Analog processor PCB 4
3
GND
ADIN J43
J21
ESSKEY*
J34 J35
ESSLED
2 CCD-OUT-EVEN
Inverter
RESET*
PNLCK
PRTCT
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
PRST*
CCD-OUT- ODD
DOFF
J33 1
ABC-HOLD*
+12V
RXD
SCP
TXD
FLM
PCB
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
+5U
+5U
ABC-OFF*
LP
M
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
LMPON
ECLK*
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
R-GND
R-GND
J41 J42
RCLK
SCLK
SHG*
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
+24U
+24U
N.C
N.C
CL*
SIN
+5U
LD
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
+12
J49 J51
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 171819 20 2122232425 26
J32 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 J20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 171819 20 212223242526 J39 1 2 3 4 5 J23
Thermoswitch
Scanner moter Speaker
M701 M TP61
6 5 4 3 2 1
J60
6 5 4 3 2 1
J61
26 2524 2322 212019 18 1716 15 1413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 1312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 11312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1
J38 J24 J48 J50 J62 J63
26 25 24 2322 212019 18 1716 15 1413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J208 J207 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1
J203 J214 J213 J211
LMPON
ABC-HOLD*
R-GND
R-GND
COM-B
COM-A
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
SPKOH
SPKOL
ABC-OFF*
+24U
+24U
+24V
COM
E-CLK*
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
AD-IN0
AD-IN1
AD-IN2
AD-IN3
D-GND
AD-IN4
AD-IN5
AD-IN6
AD-IN7
D-GND
B*
A*
R-CLK
S-CLK
B
A
SHG*
RXD from PNL

S-IN
CL*
Image processor PCB

LD
TXD to PNL
PROTECT
ESSKEY*
DSP-OFF
ESSLED
RESET*
+24U PNLCK
D-GND
D-GND
STMP D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
PRST*
+12V
SCP
FLM
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
+5U
+5U
LP
M
BK-SZS0
BK-SZS1
BK-SZS2
BK-SZS3
PS101S
PS102S
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
OFF5V
OFF5V
OFF5V
OFF5V
D-GND
OFF5V
SEN5V
D-GND
1 2 3 J212 1 2 3 J216 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 J217 2 1 J219

J64 J66
1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 J68
Reserved
3 2 1 3 2 1
J65 J67
3 2 1 3 2 1
SL
PS101 PS102 SL301
Scanner home Copyboard cover Stamp solenoid

position sensor open/close sensor
A-6
A11 +24U
A10 R-GND N.C A1
A9 R-GND N.C B1
A8 A-GND N.C A2
A7 +5U N.C B2
A6 +5U -12V A3
A5 +5U -12V B3
A4 D-GND A-GND A4
A3 D-GND A-GND B4
A2 D-GND +12V A5
A1 XPON +12V B5
B11 XPCI MDMMNT A6
B10 D-GND F-IOWR* B6
B9 D-GND N.C A7
B8 +5U F-IORD* B7
B7 +5U N.C A8
B6 -12V IOCS3* B8
B5 +12V N.C A9
B4 A-GND IOCS46* B9
B3 R-GND D-GND A10
for DC power supply PCB

B2 +24U IOCS2* B10
B1 +24U D-GND A11
ABUS5 B11
N.C A12
J209
ABUS4 B12
N.C A13
ABUS3 B13
A1 REG-TOP* ESS-OUT* A14
B12 N.C ABUS2 B14
A2 D-GND ESS-HOOK* A15
B11 D-GND ABUS1 B15
A3 D-GND ESS-CI* A16
for G3FAX MODEM
B10 PPRDY* DBUS7 B16

A4 CCRT* ESS-FC* A17
B9 SBSY* DBUS6 B17
A5 PCLK* INTMDM A18
B8 STS* DBUS5 B18
A6 RDY* RST-NOP* A19
B7 TOP* DBUS4 B19
A7 CBSY* OGMSTR* A20
B6 CCLK* DBUS3 B20
A8 CMD* RSTMDM* A21
B5 PRNT* DBUS2 B21
A9 PRFD* +5U A22
B4 CPRDY* DBUS1 B22
for DC controller PCB

A10 ESS +5U A23
B3 N.C DBUS0 B23
A11 D-GND D-GND A24
B2 BD* D-GND B24
A12 VDO* +5U A25
B1 VDO +5U B25
J202
J201
1
ABUS5 N.C A1
31
ABUS0 MOT-I2 B16

2
ABUS3 MOT-I0 A2
32
ABUS4 MOT-I1 B15

3
ABUS1 PS851S A3
33
ABUS2 PS802S B14

4
DBUS0 PS852S A4
34
DBUS15 PS805S B13

5
DBUS8 PS801S A5
35
DBUS7 DF-LS1 B12

6
DBUS1 +5U A6
Image processor PCB
36
DBUS14 PS803S B11

7
DBUS9 +24U A7
DBUS6 PS806S B10
37
8
DBUS2 +24U A8
38
DBUS13 I-DOWN B9
9
DBUS10 +24U A9
DBUS5 M-A-ENB B8
DBUS3 R-GND A10
DBUS12 M-RTRN B7
DBUS11 R-GND A11
for ADF relay PCB
DBUS4 RST-MOT* B6
LPS-TOP* R-GND A12
LPS-BD* M-CCW B5
PCL-CLK OFF5V A13
PCL-STR* M-A-CK B4
INT-PIF1* D-GND A14
PCL-DAT M-MOD3 B3
V-UBE* D-GND A15
INT-PIF2* M-MOD2 B2
DMA-TC* SEN5V A16
LPS-PRT* M-MOD1 B1
Reserved
DAK5*
DAK2*
J205
DRQ5
DRQ2
RST-OPT*
F-IOWR* A1
F-IORD* B1
G4-MNT A2
IOCS7* B2
ESS-ACT* A3
N.C B3
G4-SPKON* A4
+12V B4
LPS-VDO* A5
-12V B5
D-GND A6
G4-PCI B6
A-GND A7
A-GND B7
D-GND A8
A-GND B8
+5U A9
Reserved
+5U B9
D-GND A10
+5U B10
D-GND A11
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
D-GND B11
D-GND A12
B12
A13
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 J215
B13
J218

D0 Vss DBUS0 D-GND
DBUS2 DBUS1

D2 D1
D4 D3 DBUS4 DBUS3
D6 D5 DBUS6 DBUS5
Vcc D7 +5U DBUS7
A0 RDY/BSY* ABUS1 N.C
A2 A1 ABUS3 ABUS2
A4 A3 ABUS5 ABUS4
A6 A5 ABUS7 ABUS6
A8 A7 ABUS9 ABUS8
D9 D8 DBUS9 DBUS8
D11 D10 DBUS11 DBUS10
D13 D12 DBUS13 DBUS12
A9 D14 ABUS10 DBUS14
Vcc A10 +5U ABUS11
A12 A11 ABUS13 ABUS12
CSL*(CS00*) OE* CS-DAT* MRD*
WR* D15 pull-up +5U DBUS15
N.C N.C N.C N.C
A13 Vss ABUS14 D-GND
ABUS21 D-GND
for Program ROM DIMM

A20(N.C) PRTCT*
for Image processor PCB
Program ROM DIMM

N.C N.C N.C N.C
N.C N.C N.C N.C
N.C N.C N.C N.C
A21(N.C) CSH*(CS01*) ABUS22 CS-DAT*
A23(N.C) A22(N.C) D-GND ABUS23
A25(N.C) A24(N.C) D-GND D-GND
N.C Vcc N.C +5U
CS2L*(CS10*) CS2H*(CS11*) CS-PRG* CS-PRG*
WP* Vpp N.C N.C
PD4 PD3 N.C N.C

16/32* BYTE* pull-up +5U N.C
J204 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71
pull-up +5U D-GND
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71
RESET* Vss
DQ0 Vss D0 D-GND

DQ2 DQ1 D2 D1
Image processor PCB
DQ4 DQ3 D4 D3
DQ6 DQ5 D6 D5
Vdd DQ7 +5VB D7
A0 PD1 XA0 N.C
A2 A1 XA2 XA1
A4 A3 XA4 XA3
A6 A5 XA6 XA5
DQ8,N.C A10 N.C XA10
DQ10 DQ9 D9 D8
DQ12 DQ11 D11 D10
DQ14 DQ13 D13 D12
A7 DQ15 XA7 D14
Vdd A11 +5VB N.C
A9 AB XA9 XAB
RE2* RE3* RAS2* N.C
DQ17,N.C DQ16 N.C D15
DQ19 DQ18 D1 D0
CE0* Vss CASL* D-GND
CE3* CE2* CASH* CASL*
RE0 CE1* RAS1* CASH*
A12 RE1* N.C N.C
For Expanded memory
Expanded memory
A13 W* N.C WE*

DQ21 DQ20 D3 D2
DQ23 DQ22 D5 D4
DQ25 DQ24 D7 D6
DQ27 DQ26,N.C D8 N.C
DQ29 DQ28 D10 D9
DQ31 DQ30 D12 D11
DQ32 Vdd D13 +5VB
DQ34 DQ33 D15 D14
PD2 DQ35,N.C N.C N.C
PD4 PD3 N.C N.C
PD5 PD5 N.C N.C
J210 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71
Vss PD7 D-GND N.C

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71
A-7

II. DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB (1/2)
J190

for Analog processor PCB
J94 J182 J184

6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6
J93
J92
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 for G3FAX NCU board

J91 J181 J183
J101 1 2 3 4 5 6 J107 J106 1 2 3 4 J105 1 2 J110
A10
A11
B10
B11
+5VS1
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
GND
AC-H
AC-N
ARG
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
+12V
N.C
PCI
MGND
MGND
DGMD
MGND
+5VS1
+5VS1
+5VS1
+5VS1
+5VS1
AGMD
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
+24V1
+24V1
+24V1
AGND
XPON
+12V
XPCI
-12V
DC power supply PCB
FSRDRV1
FSEDRV2
ZEROX*
MGND
MGND
+5VS1
+5VS1
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
+24V2
+24V2
RLYD
FSRH1
FSRH2
+5VS1
+5VS1
MGND
MGND
+24V2
+24V2
+5VS2
+5VS2
+24V1
+24V1
DGND
DGND
FSRN

GND
GND
1 3 5 7 9 11 13
J103 1 2 3 J111 A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 J108 1 2 3 4 J109 1 2 3 4 J104 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
J352
J102 J156 J157 J151
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
1 2 3 4 5
Reserved Reserved 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314
B12
B11
B10
A10
A11
A12
A1
A2
A3
A4
B9
A5
B8
A6
B7
A7
B6
A8
B5
A9
B4
B3
B2
B1
6 5 4 3 2 1
J377
TB 102 for Cassette feeder
1 2 3 4 5 J324 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 17 18 192021 22 23 24

J323
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J351
J164 1 2 3 4 5 J321 J152
1 2 3 4 J312 J305 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
+24Vdr
+24Vdr
J163 1 2 3 4 5 J364 J301 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
FSRDRV1
FSRDRV2
1 2 3 4
REGTOP*
N.C
N.C
D-GND
R-GND
R-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DOOR SW
CPRDY*
PPRDY*
ZERO
RESET
RLYD
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
J322
CCRT*
CBSY*
PRNT*
PRFD*
SBSY*
CCLK*
+24V
+24V
PCLK*
CMD*
BDO*
VDO*
VDO*
+5U
+5U
RDY*
TOP*
STS*
1 2 3 4 5
ESS
+5U
J172 J308
1
1 FSRTH
2
2 D-GND
3 DSC
3 LEDON
4
4 D-GND PR
5
5 4 3 2 1 6
5
6
PS306S
HALFFAN*
TR DC controller PCB
J171 7
7 FANLOCK
1 2 3 4 8
J162 5 4 3 2 1
8 R-GND DEV TNRCHKT GND
Hivoltage output unit
J161 1 2 3 4 5
MRDY*
R-GND
R-GND
R-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
1 2 3 4
ENBL*
MON*
1200*
VDO*
LON*
+24V
+24V
+24V
VDO
ACC
DEC
600*
+5U
+5U
BDI
J1307 J1306
1 2 3 4 5 1
1 J304 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 2021 22
2
2
3 J353 J356
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
J1307
cr 1 2 3
1 2 J173
RT103 J1305
TB1305 J1304
J1302
TB1306 J174
1 2 3 2 1
1 2 TSW1 J1301 2 1
J1303
Heater H2
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J354 J355 J357 J358
Heater H1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J701 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J601 J1001
M601 J901
M
M
TH1 FM301 M701
Thermistor
BD PCB Laser unit
Exhaust fan Main motor Laser scanner motor
Fixing heater unit
Laser scanner unit
Fixing unit
DC controller PCB (2/2)
Cassette paper Paper width Paper length Pick-up Registration Pick-up vertical
supply sensor VR501
sensor edge sensor sensor paper sensor Multifeeder path clutch Registration PS501 SW501
PS305 PS304 PS301 PS303 PS302

pick-up solenoid clutch
Pick-up solenoid Multifeeder paper Test print Adjust
CL301 CL302
SL301 1 2 3 1 2 3 SL302
J516
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 supply sensor output switch the leading edge
J515
J514
J512
J511
SL SL CL CL
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Sensor PCB

MPSNS*
SNSON*
TPRNT*
RGADJ
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
+5U
2 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 2
J517 J508 J506 J504 J401
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J518 J509 J507 J505 J502
3 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J519 6 5 4 3 2 1 J513 1 2 3 4 5 6 J510 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J503

1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J306 J303 J307 J309
CSTSNS*
PS301 S
SNSON*
SNSON*
SNSON*
SNSON*
MPSNS*
CL301D
PS305S
PS304S
PS303S
PS302S
CL301D
CL302D
PS501S
SL302D
LEDON
LEDON
LEDON
LEDON
LEDON
RGADJ
TSTON
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+5U
DC controller PCB
STERM*
STERM*
RXDO*
RXDO*
TXDO*
TXDO*
SCLK*
SCLK*
PSIZ0
PSIZ1
PSIZ2
PSIZ3
+24V
+24V
STB*
STB*
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5U
J311 J310 J302

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
J371 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
J375 5 4 3 2 1
J368
J325
2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5
J367
J372
J366
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 J365 1 2 3 4 5
J363
J376 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 for DC power supply
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 J364 J362
2 1 5 4 3 2 1
P10
P11
P12
J379
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P7
P8
P9
1 2 3 4 5
J381 J361
TP105 J401 1 2 3 4 5
J364 J365
for Cassette feeder SW301 SW401 SW402 SW403 SW404
Cassette size sensor switch
III. Cassette Feeder
Feeder motor Pick-up solenoid Paper supply sensor Pick-up sensor Cassette size sensor switch
for main body DC controller PCB
M M651 PS652 PS651
K K
SL SL651 SW651
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 4
P12
P11
P10
J677 J680
P9
P8
P7
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
1 2 3 1 2 3

J681 J664
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5
J662 J663 J671 3 2 1 J679
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 3 2 1
J675
1 2 3 4 5
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J561 1 2 3 4 J670 1 2 J678
5 4 3 2 1 J674
3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J651 1 2 3 4 J652 1 2 J653
SL651D
STERMU*
+24VF
J679
RXDOU*
TXDOU*
B*
A*
B
A
SCLK*
1 2 3 4 5
+24V
+24V
STB*
GND
GND
GND
+5U
+5U
6 5 4 3 2 1 J676 5 4 3 2 1
J672
Feeder controller PCB 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 4 3 2 1
STERML*
J655 J655
RXDOL*
TXDOL*
PS652S
PS651S
SCLK*
PSIZE0
PSIZE1
PSIZE2
PSIZE3
CLED
+24V
+24V
STB*
FLED
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5U
+5U
N.C
GND
J656
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J665
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Cassette feeder-one level type
J666 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J667
TP652 Feeder motor Pick-up solenoid Paper supply sensor Pick-up sensor Cassette size sensor switch
J681 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J668
P12
P11
P10
M
P9
P8
P7
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
M651 K PS652 K PS651

SL SL651 SW651
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 4
P12
P11
P10
J677 J680
P9
P8
P7
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
J681 J664 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5
J662 J663 J671 3 2 1 J679
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 3 2 1
J675
1 2 3 4 5
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J561 1 2 3 4 J670 1 2 J678
5 4 3 2 1 J674
3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J651 1 2 3 4 J652 1 2 J653
SL651D
STERMU*
+24VF
J679
RXDOU*
TXDOU*
B*
A*
B
A
SCLK*
1 2 3 4 5
+24V
+24V
STB*
GND
GND
GND
+5U
+5U
6 5 4 3 2 1 J676 5 4 3 2 1
J672
STERML*
J655 J655
RXDOL*
TXDOL*
PS652S
PS651S
SCLK*
PSIZE0
PSIZE1
PSIZE2
PSIZE3
CLED
+24V
+24V
STB*
FLED
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5U
+5U
N.C
GND
J656
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J665
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Cassette feeder-two level type
J666 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J667
TP652 Feeder motor Pick-up solenoid Paper supply sensor Pick-up sensor Cassette size sensor switch
J681 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J668
P12
P11
P10
M
P9
P8
P7
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
M651 K PS652 K PS651

SL SL651 SW651
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 4
P12
P11
P10
J677 J680
P9
P8
P7
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
J681 J664 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5
J662 J663 J671 3 2 1 J679
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 3 2 1
J675
1 2 3 4 5
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J561 1 2 3 4 J670 1 2 J678
5 4 3 2 1 J674
3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J651 1 2 3 4 J652 1 2 J653
SL651D
STERMU*
+24VF
J679
RXDOU*
TXDOU*
B*
A*
B
A
SCLK*
1 2 3 4 5
+24V
+24V
STB*
GND
GND
GND
+5U
+5U
6 5 4 3 2 1 J676 5 4 3 2 1
J672
STERML*
J655 J655
RXDOL*
TXDOL*
PS652S
PS651S
SCLK*
PSIZE0
PSIZE1
PSIZE2
PSIZE3
CLED
+24V
+24V
STB*
FLED
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5U
+5U
N.C
GND
J656
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Cassette feeder-three level type
APPENDIX
D LIST OF SPECIAL TOOLS

The following are special tools used to service to copier: use them in addition the
standard set of tools.
No. Tool Name Tool No. Shape Rank Remarks
1 Digital FY9-2002-000 A Use it to check
Multimeter the power.
2 Door switch TKN-0093 A

acutuator
3 Mirror positioning FY9-3009-040 B For adjusting the

tool (front, rear) distance
between No.1
and No.2 mirror
mounts.
4 Pulley clip FY9-3010-000 C Scanner wire

adjustment
*Consult the following for a stocking idea.

A: Each service person is expected to carry one.
B: Each group of five service persons is expected to carry one.
C: Each workshop is expected to carry one.
APPENDIX
E. SOLVENTS AND OILS

No. Name Use Composition Remarks
1 Alcohol Cleaning: e.g., Carbon hydrogen • C1, IPA (isopropyl alcohol)
glass, plastics of fluorine family
(Note), and rub- Alcohol
ber parts and Surface activating
external covers. agent
Water
2 Solvent Cleaning; e.g., Carbon hydrogen MEK
metal parts; of fluorine family
removing oil or Alcohol
toner. Carbon hydrogen
of chlorine family
3 Lubricant ADF drive gear. Silicone oil CK-8005
4 Lubricant Mineral oil (paraf- CK-0451
fin family)

Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 3
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION
CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
REVISION 0 (FEB. 1999) [28319]
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan

This publication is printed on
70% reprocessed paper.
PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 0299AB1.51-1

Canon GP160 - F160 - DF160 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon GP160 - F160 - DF160 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon GP160 - F160 - DF160 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GP160F/160DF/160

FEB. 1999 FY8-13G2-000

Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com

SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY

ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.

Use of this manual should

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 3

5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan

Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com

Material Name Content

Each chapter consists of the following sections.

Chapter 1, “Introduction,” : Features, specifications, operation methods, copying

Chapter 2, “Basic operation,” : Explanation of the machine’s basic operations

Chapter 3, “Exposure system,” : Explanation of the exposure system’s mechanical /

Chapter 4, “Image processing system,” : Explanation of the CCD, analogue / digital

Chapter 5, “Laser exposure system,” : Explanation of the laser exposure system’s

Chapter 6, “Image formation system,” : Explanation of the image formation system’s

Chapter 7, “Pick-up / Feed system,” : Explanation of the pick-up / feed system’s

Chapter 8, “Fixing system,” : Explanation of the fixing system’s mechanical / electri-

Chapter 10, “Cassette feeder,” : Explanation of the cassette feeder’s mechanical /

Chapter 13, “Troubleshooting,” : Standards / adjustments, operation failure counter-

Appendix : General timing chart, general circuit diagram, etc..

The explanations in this manual are based on the following principles.

Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.

Standard equipment Standard equipment Option

Option Option Option

Option Option Option

Modular Standard equipment Option Option

Super G3 FAX board

CANON GP160 REV.0 FEB. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com

Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP / FEEDING SYSTEM

CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com

CHAPTER 10 CASSETTE FEEDER

CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com

I. FEATURES ..............................................1-1 D. User mode .......................................1-14

Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com

< Fax function >

Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com

*1: 50 or less sheets of tracing paper (GNT-80) by cassette.

Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com

Reproduction mode Size Copy paper size No. of copies / minute

Specifications are subject to change for the sake of product improvements.

III. NAMES OF PARTS

ADF standard equipment model

Figure 1-301 Figure 1-302

Copyboard cover model

Figure 1-303 Figure 1-304

Cassette feeder (accessory)

Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com